THE  LIBRARY 
OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 

OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


^_ 

<^C5- 


ER 
ER 


INSTRUCTION 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND: 

A  Simple  Arrangement  of  the  Essentials  of 
Graham  Phonography  for  All  Schools. 

Comprising  also   a  "Progressive    Scheme  of    Word-Sign    Study; 

t/l  T^evised  Version  of  Smith's  Numerals  ;  <A  {Manual  of 

^Blackboard  Illustrations  for  Shorthand   Teachers; 

and  Suggestions  for  Typewriter  Practice. 

THE  SYLLABLE  THE  UNIT  OF  WORD  ANALYSIS. 
BY 

BATES    TORREY, 
Author  of  "Practical  Typewriting." 


Published  by  Charles  E.  Comer,  Boston,  Mass. 


Copyright,  I&Q3, 

by 
Bates  Torrey. 


The  Sailings  Press,  Boston,  Mass. 


Jg«    PREFACE.    »9_ 


So  many  books  have  been  prepared  on  the  subject 

of  shorthand  that  preface  material  has  become  scarce. 

v>     It  would  be  profitless  to  declare  there  is  anything  new 

*»     (outside   of    tricks   of    arrangement)    in   this   work, 

£j     because  nothing   original   has   been   produced    about 

g-  shorthand    for  many   years.      It   would    be    likewise 

-1    vain  to  say  this  is  a  profound  treatise.       We  could 

not  write  such  a  book  —  and  would  not  if  we  could  ! 

?*•     In    popularizing   shorthand    study   there    is    no    use 

dredging  deprofundis.     The  convincing  writer  should 

^     dwell  with   his   audience. 

A  publisher  waited  for  these  pages  to  issue  from 
the  pen,  which  fact  disarms  the  criticism  that  it  was 
made  to  sell ;  and  considerable  experience  teaching 
shorthand  was  the  impulse  directing  the  pen,  which 
should  have  weight  if  the  record  of  a  successful 
instructor  counts  for  aught. 

a 

448596 


There  are  too  many  manuals  of  shorthand  already. 
That  is  cheerfully  granted.  Yet  none  of  them  show 
a  "royal  road"  to  its  acquirement,  whatever  their 
claims.  There  is  no  such  road.  But  as  improved 
vehicles  of  locomotion  and  new  methods  of  propul- 
sion almost  bring  time  and  distance  to  naught,  so  in 
shorthand  improved  methods  of  instruction  make 
easier  the  journey  to  proficiency,  and  hasten  arrival 
at  that  destination. 

The  learner  is  our  audience.  We  address  him  with 
deep  designs,  as  these  pages  will  disclose.  We  care 
more  for  the  impression  (as  shown  by  accomplish- 
ment) the  book  makes  upon  him  than  for  e.r  <-ntl»f<l,-« 
comments  of  rival  authors,  or  the  opinions  of  theorists 
on  teaching. 

BATES   TOR KEY. 


TO  TEACHERS. 

Another  case  of  "pernicious  authorship,"  we  seem 
to  hear  you  remark;  but  be  kind  enough  to  examine 
the  contents  of  this  volume  before  classing  it  with  the 
rank  and  file.  We  venture  to  say  it  will  be  found 
near  enough  like  the  others  to  shatter  no  idols,  and 
unlike  enough  to  deserve  a  reading. 

It  has  been  made  for  teachers  —  and  schools. 
Observe  the  sequence  of  action.  Everything  is 
systematic,  and  every  progression  has  a  meaning. 
Design  pervades  every  step ;  no  accidents  are  allowed 
to  happen.  Much  unwarranted  effort  in  shorthand 
study  has  prevailed  ;  it  remains  for  teachers  to  com- 
bine in  banishing  the  same. 

The  shorthand  of  today  must  be  practical  if  any- 
thing, therefore  only  the  essentials  need  be  studied. 
For  abstruse  treatment,  consult  the  standard  text- 
books of  the  systems  :  this  the  teacher  can  always  do 
to  advantage.  The  business  man  has  no  time  for 
deep  study  of  social  problems,  leaving  that  for  the 
political  economist  or  the  lecturer  on  finance.  We 
may  consider  the  average  student  of  shorthand  as 
bent  upon  the  business  of  brief  writing;  and  being 
eager  for  quick  results,  depends  upon  the  teacher  to 
administer  wisely  to  his  need,  out  of  knowledge 
wherever  obtained . 

We  are  of  the  opinion,  also,  that  practical  short- 
hand is  quite  as  much  a  mechanical  art  as  an  intel- 
lectual one ;  hence  the  prominence  given  herein  to 
mechanical  processes.  Anyone  in  search  of  theory 


can  find  enough  bf  it  in  the  works  of  the  system 
makers  ;  but  this  being  a  working  plan,  rather  than  a 
varnished  model,  the  mechanical  is  admitted  if  it  will 
serve  the  purposes  of  effective  instruction.  For  even 
in  the  sublime  presence  of  the  arch  theorist  himself 
(whoever  he  may  be),  his  amanuensis  must  needs 
write  according  to  fluent  methods ;  and  those  who 
are  unhappy  if  they  do  not  have  a  daily  baptism  of 
theory  will  turn  from  these  pages  unconsolable, 
simply  because  we  have  to  confine  ourselves  to  the 
performable  in  shorthand  rather  than  to  the  imagin- 
able ! 

u  It  is  a  condition  and  not  a  theory  which  confronts 
us."  The  essence  of  good  teaching  is  to  adapt  the 
means  to  the  pupil.  If  there  is  one  study  that 
demands  such  tact  more  than  any  other,  it  is  short- 
hand. Consequently  certain  elements  of  instruction 
are  herein  made  important,  and  there  is  furnished 
sufficient  variety  to  fit  every  need. 

A  few  of   the  more  obvious  features  of  the  book 
are :  — 
Common  sense  nomenclature  and  definitions. 

Reading  as  well  as  writing  from  the  beginning. 
Systematic  arrangement  of  principles. 
Progressive  and  interesting  tasks. 

Early  neglect  of  vowels  and  position. 
Word-Signs  favorably  presented. 

Business  correspondence  a  feature. 
A  tested  system  of  writing  figures. 

Blackboard  illustrations  for  Teachers. 
Suggestions  for  typewriter  practice. 


TO   THE   STUDENT. 

This  book  has  been  made  especially  for  you  — 
after  watching  a  great  many  of  you  work,  and  in- 
spired by  your  work,  appreciating  your  needs.  Like- 
wise your  discouragements  have  been  noted,  and  a 
mitigation  sought  for  and  found.  The  aim  has  been 
to  render  shorthand  study  interesting.  If  interest 
can  be  awakened  early,  and  maintained  continuously, 
good  work  and  tangible  results  will  follow. 

Assuredly  tvork  is  necessary  in  shorthand  study ; 
but  it  would  be  unreasonable  to  expect  it  to  continue 
with  stolid  doggedness  when  all  the  conditions  were 
unfavorable.  "We  have  endeavored  to  make  them 
favorable  by  divesting  the  subject  of  disagreeable  and 
useless  features,  and  clothing  it  with  pleasanter  ones. 

We  trust  that  success  has  attended  our  efforts.  At 
any  rate  may  it  attend  yours.  Therefore  work  — 
win  ! 


CONTENTS. 


PART  I.  — DESK  WORK. 

STEP  1.  — The  scheme  of  consonant  signs  and  its  management. 

STEP  II.  —  Joined  consonant  strokes.    Early  word-signs. 

STEP  III.  —  Circle-S  and  its  modifications.   Simple  phrases  introduced. 

STEP  IV.  —  The  vowel  and  vowel  procedure. 

STEP  V.  —  Diphthongs.    The  tick  denned  and  illustrated.     Position 

foreshadowed.    Group  word-signs,  List  I. 
STEP  VI.—  Further  consonant  signs,  —  strokes  S  and  Z,  Wand  Y.    Kule 

for  syllabic  writing.    Treatment  of  H. 
STEP  VII.  —  Syllabic  R  and  L,  with  specific  Rules  for  same,   con-,  com-, 

cog-,  -ing  and  -ings.    Group  word-signs,  List  II. 
STEP  VIII.  —  Simple  stroke  word-signs.    Special  practice  material. 

Remarks   upon   syllabic   shorthand,  angles   and  "  convenience." 

Conclusion  of  Part  I. 

PART  II.  —  BUSINESS  SHORTHAND. 

STEP  IX.  — Initial  hooks, —  L  and  R.  Vowels  omitted,  and  position 
substituted. 

STEP  X.  —  Circle-S  and  the  initial  hooks.    Group  word-signs,  List  III. 

Syllabic  halving  introduced.    Dictation  begun. 
STEP  XL  — Final  hooks,  F,  V  and  N.    Group  word-signs,  List  IV. 

Position  continued.    Numbers,  Lesson  I.    Dictation. 
STEP  XII. — Further  final  hooks  -shun  and  -live.    Group  word-signs, 

List  V.    Halving  continued.    Numbers,  Lesson  II.    Dictation. 
STEP  XIII. — The  business  letter.    Business  phrases.    Numbers,  Lesson 

III.    Letter-writing  in  shorthand.  •  Dictation. 
STEP  XIV.  —  Further  developments  of  halving.    Group  word-signs, 

List  VI.    Speed  practice.    Dictation. 
STEP  XV. —  The  lengthening  principle.    A  shorthand  multiplication 

table.    Prefixes  and  affixes.    Models  for  dictation  practice. 
STEP  XVI.  — Expedients  for  swift  and  legible  writing.     Shorthand 

penmanship.    Dictation.    Conclusion  of  Part  II. 

PART  III.  —  ADVANCED  INQUIRY. 

Word-signs  classified.  Word-signs  of  Parts  I.  and  II.  presented  alpha- 
betically. Imitative  word-signs.  The  great  list,  — 19  pages.  Sa- 
cred word-signs.  Shorthand  text  for  reading  practice,—  11  pages. 

Instructive  articles  upon:  Syllabication  —  Angles  and  Direction  of 
Strokes  —  Distinguished  Words  —  A nalogy  —  Phrasing  —  Syllabic-S 
—Alternative  Procedure  —  Vowel  Implication.  Suggestions  for 
Typewriting. 

Index. 

Appendix  (in  Teachers'  edition). 


PART  I.  —  Introductory  Steps. 


DESK    WORK. 


5TEP  I. 

SCHEME  OF  CONSONANT  SIGNS. 


Sign. 

Sound       Conventional 
Name.            Name. 

Power  and  Use. 

Written  Downward 

Tub      -} 
Duh 
.    Puh 
Buh 
Chub 

T 
D 
P 
B 
;  CHav 

T 
D 
P 
B 

C1 

in  T-ip 
"  D-ip 
"  P-ut 
"  B-ut 
"  Ch-.at 

or  Tuh-ip 
"  Duh-ip 
"  Puh-ut 
"  Buh-ut 
"  Ri-ph 

1 

\ 

\ 

P 

Juh      ^J  J     "  J-ug       "  Gin  Gem 

a 

03 

Kuh      |K  K    "  K-it        "  C  in  Cat 

Guh     I  Gay       G    "  G-et        "  Guh-et 

« 

Fuh      £F  F     "  F-at        "  Fuli-at 


.L.  v 


uh 


J... 


Thuh 


Dthuh 


Shuh 


Zshuh 


V    "  V-at        "  Vuh-at 


iTH       TH"Th-ish 


My-th 


THe      TH"Th-y        "  Wi-th 
iSH       SH"  Sh-y         "   Wi-sh 

Z    "  A-z-ure  "  Sin  Leisure 


SCHEME  OF  CONSONANT  SIGNS  —  Continued. 


Sound 
Sign.     Name. 


Conventional 
Name. 


Power  and  Use. 


Ruh 
uR 
Luh 
uL 


R  in  R-ate 
R  "  Ar-t 
L  "L-aps 
L  "  Al-ps^1 


Followed  ,-j 

a 
g 

fi  Preceded    § 


>.  > 

•*•  Followed    o 

Preceded  w 


o 

if. 


Muh 

Nuh 


to 


M  M"M-ew         Na-me 

N  N  "  N-ew         Mai-ne 

iNG         as"  K-ing        In-k 


Suli  or  Zuh 


iS 


S  "  Hi-ss    or  Z  in  Bu-zz 


Willie  Brief  Way  W'W-oo    "    Wuh-oo 

Semi- 
vowel 
n....  Yuh   ]  Brief  Yay  Y  "  Y-ou    "    Yuh-ou 


TT  ,     (  Breath- 

Huh  j      ing          Hay         H  "  H-at    "    Huh-at 


STEP  I. 


THE  ALPHABET  AND  EARLY  STUDY. 

(1)  The  foregoing  is  a  classified  scheme  of  signs 
for  the  consonant  sounds  of  language,   and  is  not  to 
be  considered  in  any  sense  as  an  alphabet  of  letters. 
It  is  so  arranged  that  the  size,  shape  and  direction  of 
writing  the  signs  can  be  seen  at  a  glance. 

(2)  These  signs  are  segments  of  the  circle  and 
straight  lines,  the  length  of  the  straight  lines  being 
about  one-sixth  of  an  inch,  and  the  distance  between 
the  extremities  of  a  curve  should  be  the  same. 

(3)  The  consonant  signs  are  written  in  the  direc- 
tions indicated,  and  the  first  fourteen  are  made  alter- 
nately light    and  shaded,  to   picture    Whispered   and 
Voiced  sounds.     This  ingenious  distinction  should  be 
taken  advantage  of  in  memorizing  the  sounds  and  their 
signs. 

(4)  The    liquids,   L  and   R,   the  nasals,   M,   N, 
LNG,  and  the  breathing  H,  are  less  regularly  formed ; 


14  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   I. 

while  S,  Z,  W  and  Y  are  very  brief  characters  which 
are  termed  appendages  simply.  Note  particularly 
the  liquids,  as  they  have  repeated  mention  farther  on. 

(5)  SH  (shuh)  is  written  upward  or  downward  for 
purely  mechanical  reasons.     That  direction  is  selected 
which  makes  the  better  angular  junction  with  another 
sign,  as  illustrated  below.     When  alone,  SH  is  always 
written  downward. 

duh-shuh       guh-ghuli    nuh-sliuh   muh-shuli   luli-shuh    puh-shuh 

U ~D. 3. <=J CL \1 

(6)  L  standing  alone  is  invariably  written  upward. 

(7)  In   order   to    appreciate   fully  the  consonant 
sounds,  words  must  first  be  reduced  to  their  vocal  ele- 
ments.    In  the  Diagram  two  names  are  applied  to  the 
consonants,  namely,  the  sound-name*  and  the  con- 
ventional-name.    The  former  represents   the  con- 
sonants as  devoid  of  vowel  modification   as  may   be 
possible.       The    Conventional    name    resembles    the 
regular  alphabet,  and  is  desirable  for  class-room  use 
after  the  student  has  attained  some  proficiency  ;  though 
it  should  never  be  confounded  with  the  consonants  of 
the  common  alphabet  of  letters. 

(8)  The  vowels  of  the  English  language  are  A 
E     I     O     U     and  sometimes  W  and  Y.     The  vowels 
are  not  considered  at  this  stage  of  study. 

*The  indefinite  sound  "  uh  "  has  been  selected  for  this 
nomenclature,  because  to  speak  a  consonant  requires  sonic 
vowel  assistance,  but  the  less  it  is  like  the  common  vowels 
the  more  closely  the  combination  approaches  the  primary  con- 
sonant. We  presented  this  form  of  sound-name  in  1886, 
and  have  ever  since  used  it  with  success  as  a  convincing  way 
of  "talking"  the  consonants. 


STEP   I.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  15 

(9)  Name  the  consonants  and  vowels  in  the  fol- 
lowing words  ;  and  then,  ignoring  the  vowels,  give 
its  most  primary  sound  to  each  consonant,  speaking 
the  sound-name  tuh,  buh,  kuh,  vuh,  as  the  case  may 
require  :  — 


r-o  (tuh-oo)       d-o  (duh-oo)        p-a  (puh-ah)     b-e 

3(t)-ch 

e(d)-ge 

g-o 

i-f 

f-ie 

e-gg 

sh-e 

th-e 

th-y 

m-e 

a-sh 

n-o 

k-ey 

y-e-t 

t-u-b 

b-a-d 

nr-e-t 

h-a-t 

g-u-m 

c-a-t 

3h-a-p 

ar-k 

r-u-g 

el-k 

th-i-n 

th-e-m 

r-i-ug 

sh-o-p 

ii-s-u-al 

e-v-e-n 

ch-ea-p 

g-e-m 

ah-a-s-e 

in-k 

th-a-t 

k-e-g 

f-e(t)-ch 

t-a-g 

d-i-g 

m-u-ff 

Signs  for  the  foregoing  words  : 

1  \\ 

/    /.LI 

....(  J...U 

Lu. 

LLVL 

C...U 

XT, 

s\    ^ 

A  Ai 

(L 

^ 

.                 p 

(10)  Cultivate  the  habit  of  speaking  the  sounds 
when  both  reading  and  writing.  Do  not  confound 
juh  with  guh,  for  it  must  be  remembered  that  G  (as 
a  letter)  has  both  a  hard  and  a  soft  sound,  while  J 
has  not.  Note  also  that  C  of  the  alphabet  is  not 
represented  upon  the  Diagram,  because  C,  hard,  is 
K ;  and  C,  soft,  S.  Separate  thuh  clearly  from 
dthuh,  and  do  not  be  diverted  from  the  true  sounds 
by  unsuggestive  spelling.  Forget  spelling  for  the  time 
being  ! 


16  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP  I. 

(11)  The  first  fourteen  signs  will  be  more  readily 
learned  when  the  relations  between  them  are  under- 
stood, viz.  :  — 

1.  That  two  sounds  uttered  with  the  organs*  of 
speech  in  the  same  position  are  paired. 

2.  That  one  of  each  pair  is  a  whispered  sound, 
and  the  other  a  voiced. 

3.  That  the  whisper  is  represented  by  a  hair-line 
character,  and  the  voiced  by  a  shaded  one. 

(12)  The  remaining   sounds,    and   corresponding 
signs,   are  less  regular  and  suggestive,  but  are  not 
difficult  to  memorize.     Remember  that  these  characters 
picture  the  phonetic    (sound)   elements  of  language, 
and  should  appeal  more  to  the  ear  than  to  the  eye. 
At  the  same  time  the  eye  does  for  the  memory  what 
the  ear   (in  this  case)    does  for  the  understanding; 
therefore  it  is  essential  that  all  the  signs  should  be 
written  many  times  while  being  memorized.     Each 
should  be  known  by  its  name,  preferably  the  sound- 
name  at  this  step,  and  the  names  spoken  as  writing 
progresses. 


The  attention  of  the  student  is  directed  to  the 
blackboard  illustrations,  which  should  be  displayed 
upon  the  walls,  and  which  are  intended  to  supplement 
the  scheme  of  study  set  forth  in  the  Steps. 

Also  note  the  suggestions  for  typewriter  practice  in 
Part  III.  Typewriting  is  acknowledged  to  be  an 
especially  appropriate  auxiliary  to  the  practice  of  short- 
hand writing,  and  if  it  is  intended  to  use  the  latter  in 
a  business  way,  the  acquii'ement  of  a  good  style  of 
typewriting  should  take  place  coincidently  with  short- 
hand study. 

*  The  lips,  teeth,  tongue,  palate  or  throat. 


rilACTICAl,    SHORTHAND. 


17 


(I.'!)      Fill  one  or  inure  lines  with  each  consonant 
sign  very  carefully  traced,  as:  — 


LLCLCLLCL 


ooooooooo 

OOOOOOOOO 


CCCC 


(14)  ADVICE  to  STUDENT.  Write  the 
whole  scheme  of  signs  in  this  way  five  times,  or 
until  each  character  can  be  written  in  a  satisfactory 
manner. 


18  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   I. 

(15)  Always  write  shorthand  with  :v  pen,  because 
of  the  shadiug  required,  and  upon  ruled  paprr,  using 
the  lines  as  a  guide  to  direction.     There  is  a  penman- 
ship to  shorthand  as  well  as  to  other  writing.    Hold  the 
pen-stock   outside   the   index   finger,   as  in   ordinary 
writing,    but  allow  the  top  to  point  a  little   outward 
from  the  shoulder.     When  executing  the  shaded  charac- 
ters juhr  guh  or  ung,  twist  the  pen-handle  slightly 
with  the  fingers,  without  moving  the  hand  very  much 
from  normal  position. 

(16)  DEFINITIONS.      A  Stroke  in  short- 
hand writing  is  a  consonant  sign  with  or  with- 
out appendages.     The  possible  appendages  are 
suh  (called  also  circle-S)  ,  its  loop  modifications, 
brief  wuh  or  yuh,  or  the  hooks. 

A  stroke  commonly  stands  for  a  syllable 
in  simple  (and  theoretic)  shorthand.  This 
book  makes  the  syllable  the  unit  of  word 
analysis,  and  the  term  STROKE  will  be  used 
with  marked  intent  throughout  these  pages. 

The  followin     characters  are  all  Strokes  :  — 


(17)  The  stem  is  that  part  of  the  stroke  to  which 
the  appendages  are  attached. 

(18)  Write  the  length  of  each  stroke  one-sixth  of 
an   inch,    and    draw   the   characters  with   scrupulous 
exactness.     Shade  the  straight  strokes  evenly  through- 
out, but  taper  the  curves  at  the  ends  like  examples 
given.      The   curve   should  take   the    same   direction 
as  a  straight  line  extended  between  its  extremes,  and 
be  the  same   length   as    the   straight   line  of    similar 
direction. 


STEP    I.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  19 

(19)  Write  the  stems  only  in  the  direction  speci- 
fied by  the  Diagram,  thereby  becoming  able  to  identify 
a  stroke  quite  as  much  by  its  direction  as  by  length 
or  thickness.     Write  slowly  and  with  painstaking  ;  do 
not  lift  the  pen  from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  a 
stroke.     Also  have   the  stems  of    the    same   relative 
length ;  future  legibility  depends  largely  upon  this. 

(20)  Repeat  the  writing  and  enunciation   of    the 
simple  stems   and  strokes  thus  far  given  until    they 
are  pronounced  perfect. 

The  student  should  be  prepared  to  answer  the 
following  questions,  which  are  designed  to  furnish  re- 
view practice.  Some  are  also  a  trifle  eductive  (draw- 
ing out)  in  character  :  — 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  — STEP   I. 

What  scheme  does  the  Diagram  show?  What  descrip- 
tive features  of  the  consonants  are  shown?  How  many 
consonant  signs  are  given?  What  significance  attaches  to 
the  queer  names  tuh,  duh,  puh,  buh?  What  do  the  conven- 
tional names  resemble?  Is  this  scheme  of  signs  at  all  like 
an  alphabet?  Why  not?  What  are  the  English  vowels?  Are 
they  considered  now?  Probably  why  not?  Name  a  word 
in  which  //  is  a  vowel.  Name  the  first  fourteen  consonant 
signs  in  order.  Describe  the  signs  in  their  relations  of 
size,  shape  and  direction.  What  is  a  whisper?  A  voice? 
What  is  the  sound  of  G  in  gpt?  In  germ? 

What  are  the  liquids?  The  nasals?  The  semi-vowels? 
The  breathing?  Is  the  same  sign  used  forSorZ?  Is  not 
this  a  trifle  strange?  Name  some  other  letters  or  sounds  of 
like  character  (C,  K,  J,  G).  Which  sounds  more  like  a  hiss, 
S  or  Z?  Which  like  a  buzz?  Why  are  L  and  R  called 
liquids?  What  are  the  consonant  sounds  in  schism, 
sword,  psalm?  How  many  signs  are  given  for  wuh  and 
yuh?  What  is  the  difference  between  them?  Is  there  any 
difference  except  direction?  Which  11  is  used  when  it  is 
preceded  by  a  vowel  sound?  Is  it  vowel  or  vowel  sound  we 
should  be  particular  to  note?  Which  R  is  employed  when  a 
vowel  sound  follows?  Which  L  is  used  under  similar 
circumstances? 


20  INSTRUCTION    I\  [  STKP    I. 

What  sound  of  language  does  huh  represent?  Docs 
"huh  "  strike  you  as  a  good  name  for  it?  Does  it  at  all  re- 
semble the  hiss  of  a  cat?  Recite  the  consonant  sounds, 
lining  the  sound-name  of  the  Diagram.  Is  II  sometimes 
called  the  aspirate?  (Yes.)  What  are  the  consonant  sounds 
in  bdellium,  phthisic,  Czar,  quay  ?  Is  there  a  marked  dillcr- 
ence  between  voiced  and  whispered  sounds?  How  many  of 
the  consonant  signs  are  irregular  in  formation  ;  that  is.  not 
paired?  At  what  angle  is  tuh  struck  with  reference  to  the 
line?  At  what  angle  does  chuh  depart  from  tuh?  At  Avhat 
angle  does  rnh  or  huh  lift  from  knh?  Spell  //////<.  <jhn*t. 
throwjh,  by  sound.  What  are  the  consonants  in  Lhromjli .' 
The  vowels?  Do  the  words  gem  and  i/iun,  suggest  why 
guh  and  juh  are  often  confounded?  Is  it  important  to 
speak  the  exact  sounds  while  writing?  Why?  What  is  a 
stroke?  A  stem? 

Why  write  shorthand  with  a  pen?  Why  use  ruled  paper? 
How  are  straight  strokes  shaded?  How  curves?  What 
length  of  stroke  should  be  fixed  upon?  What  distance  above 
a  line  should  never  be  exceeded?  (Two-thirds  the  space 
between  the  ruling.)  How  should  the  pen  be  held?  Is  it 
necessary  to  disturb  hand  position  very  much  to  write  guh 
or  ing?  Is  a  fixed  direction  of  strokes  necessary?  Why? 
What  primitive  material  are  the  signs  snpposably  derived 
from?  Are  the  curves  longer  than  straight  strokes? 
What  direction  are  kuh,  guh,  muh,  nuh  and  ing  written? 
Huh?  Is  shuh  invariably  written  downward?  Why  some- 
times upward?  How  is  L  written  when  standing  alone? 
What  helps  to  memorize  the  first  fourteen  siirus?  Which 
do  you  consider  the  better  angle  in  the  illustrations  of  shuh 
joined  to  another  stroke? 

Does  correct  spelling  assist  any  in  determining  the  con- 
sonant sounds?  What  are  the  organs  of  speech?  What  are 
phonetics?  What  is  an  appendage?  Name  three.  How 
does  the  attitude  of  the  pen-holder  differ  from  the  position 
when  writing  long-hand?  Name  a  few  words  containing 
zshuh.  A  few  containing  guh  or  juh.  A  few  containing 
both  guh  and  juh.  What  is  a  syllable?  Name  a  syllable  in 
which  II  is  followed  by  a  vowel  sound.  Preceded.  L 
followed.  Preceded.  Name  a  word  containing  a  stem  and 
an  appendage.  Do  you  understand  thoroughly  everything 
in  Step  I.? 


STEP  II.] 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


21 


STEP  II. 


TO   JOIN   CONSONANT   STROKES: 

(21)  The  signs  which  separately  stand  for  sounds 
(or  strokes  for  syllables)  are  joined  together  to  denote 
words. 

(-2-2)  RULE:  Join  the  beginning  of  the 
second  stroke  (or  sign)  to  the  end  of  the  first, 
the  third  to  the  second  in  like  manner,  and  so 
on,  taking  care  to  trace  each  stem  in  its  proper 
direction,  and  not  lifting  the  pen  until  the  end 
is  reached.  The  resulting  character  is  termed 
an  outline. 

(23)  As  an  exercise  for  preserving  the  exact  di- 
ivctiou  and  relations  of  stems,  write  the  signs  for  the 
following  sounds,  joining  them  as  above  directed,  and 
extending  the  outline  after  the  fashion  of  these  illus- 
trations :  — 


Write:  Diik-kuh-slmh-nuh-ul.  Kuh-nuh-suh-tuh- 
nuh-tuh-nuh-puh-ul.  Puh-luh-nuh-puh-tuh- 
nuh-shuh-ruh.  Suh-puh-ur-nuh-nmh-ruh-ruh. 
Vuh-zuh-buh-luh.  Nuh-vuh-nuh-suh-buh-ul. 
Kuh-muh-puh-ruh-nuh-huh-nuh-suh-buh-ul. 
Ruh-puh-ruh-huh-nuh-suh-vuh.  Puh-ur-vuh- 
ur-shuh-mih.  Kuh-suh-puli-nuh-shuh-nuh. 

Tuli-piih-ruh-tnh-ur.        Shuh-ur-tuh-huh-nuh- 
diili.        Kuh-imili-ur-shuh-ul. 


22  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP  n. 

(24)  When  in  doubt,  a  simple  way  to  disclose  the 
consonants  of  a  word  is  to  write  it  in  letters,  spelling 
phonetically  (by  sound),  dividing  into  correct  sylla- 
bles, and  then  cancelling  the  vowels  and  silent  conso- 
nants, like  — 

^d-/-k/-sh/n,     Sfi-lfii-ffl,     Skfi-jty, 


The  part  not  cancelled  is  the  consonant  skeleton  of 
the  word.  Represent  this  skeleton  by  the  appropriate 
signs  of  the  Diagram,  joining  them  as  the  rule  directs. 
Always  ignore  silent  letters,  whether  consonants  or 
vowels. 

(25)  A  curved  sign  repeated  must  exhibit  an 
angle  at  the  point  of  junction,  but  a  repeated  straight 
stem  is  a  double  length,  as 


(26)  Note  the  difference  of  incline  to  chuh  and 
rub.  (see  blackboard).  Curves  are  made  flat*  rather 
than  arched.  Any  stroke  may  be  slightly  changed  in 
direction  to  invite  a  convenient  junction,  as 


(27)  The  excitement  of  fast  writing  sometimes 
leads  to  shading  the  wrong  stroke ;  that  is,  when 
a  darkened  stem  follows  a  light  one  the  eager  mind 
anticipates,  and  the  hand  obeys  the  will.  This  should 

*  As  the  riirht  line  is  the  shortest  distance  between  two 
points,  so  the  fluent  curve  is  the  one  which  more  nearly 
approaches  the  straight  line. 


STKI'  II.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  23 

not  occur  in  slow  writing   if   care  be   taken.     Treat 
consecutive  light  and  heavy  lines  as  follows :  — 

T-D     P-B  K-G         B-N         Luh-iNG    H-G      M-iNG    P-iNG 


(28)  In  order  to  give  the  writing  a  good  appear- 
ance it  may  be  well  for  the  beginner  to  make  the  first 
vertical  stroke  of   any  outline  rest  upon   the    line ; 
although  this  is  not  absolutely  necessary,  the  relation 
of  outline  and  ruling  having  no  particular  importance 
until  "  position"  is  reached. 

(29)  Write  the  proper  consonant  skeletons  for 
the  following  simple  words  :  — 

Cat       dog      pup       hen         pig         rat     path     good 
mum     fife       nun       make      bathe     hat     red       pink 
ship      goal     dish       bush       jail         nap    came    can 
shell     babe    mat       Ned        pipe       map  Tom     pat 
neck     take     tap        food       rode       mud  cup      bat 
cab       lip       dip        lobe        kid        pug    dim      pad 

The  student  should  write  each  task  at  least  five 
times,  correcting  and  revising  after  each  writing ;  then 
hand  to  the  teacher  a  nice  copy  of  the  last  rendering. 

(30)  Copy  the  following  shorthand  outlines  of  the 
above  words  many  times  :  — 


24  INSTRUCTION   IN  [sTK.r    II. 

(31)  The  most  diflicult  part  of  primary  shorthand 
writing  is  to  forget  the  spelling,  and  to  represent  the 
exact  consonant  skeleton  of   a   word.     The  eye    has 
commonly  been  trained  to  spell  —  and   to   remember 
spelling — in  the  use  of  language;    but  in  shorthand 
writing  the  'ear  must  be  equally  disciplined.     Repre- 
sent in  shorthand  the  following  unphonetic  spelling  :  — 

Write :  Duck  laugh  cough  thumb  etch  gem 
lamb  image  knack  palm  talk  through  catch 
knave  ache  luck  thatch  knee  judge  Dutch 
dumb  gauge  pity  gnaw  myth  calm  bank  ditch 
balm  page  vogue  write  edge  enough  loaf 
tomb  bouquet  budge  peach  walk  magic 

(32)  No  reading   will  be   required    in   this    step, 
because  the  vowel  sounds  are  not  indicated,  and  there- 
fore the  word  outlines   are   incomplete.       Yet,  after 
writing  the  next  exercise  it  may  be  well  to  use  the 
notes  for  a  reading  lesson,  just  for  practice  in  attain- 
ing a  quick  recognition  of  the  consonant  signs. 

(33)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

Peach  cage  cheap  joke  gig  beach  jug  book 
dip  king  muff  ink  fame  peek  mush  nick 
sham  keep  cane  make  hate  came  Jove  voyage 
theme  damage  chimney  myth  tomato  drem 
jamb  potato  meed  gimp  shaggy  mob  thing 
boom  shave  main  match  name  chum  pang 
junk  Jamaica  unpack  memento  coacli  Pope 
choke  tobacco  ticket  cabbage  pocket  Clioctnu 
tattoo  nominee  five  dado  enigma  poppy 
cuckoo  main  Nain  haughty  badge  bang  gong 
phenomena  feminine  message 


STK1'   II.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  25 

(34)    WORD-SIGNS : 

DEFINITION.  A  Word-sign  is  a  sign  for  a 
word;  generally  a  part  for  the  whole,  resem- 
bling longhand  abbreviation.  The  more  sug- 
gestive the  part,  the  better  the  word-sign. 

(35)  Word-signs  appear  for  two  reasons:     (1)  to 
furnish  brief   outlines    for   the    frequently  recurring* 
words  of  language;    and    (2)    to  provide  fluent  form 
for  those  outlines  which  in  full  would  exhibit  awkward 
elements. 

(36)  It  has  been  the  wont  to  consider  word-signs 
as  necessarily  an  arbitrary  creation.     True  some  are, 
but  the  majority  are  not,  and    thereby  is    shorthand 
illuminated.       It  is  believed  a  thorough  appreciation 
of    the    systematic  word-sign    study,  underlying   the 
arrangement   of   these  steps,  will  convince  the  most 
skeptical  that  word-signs  can  be  divested  of  half  their 
terrors,  if   presented    properly  and    given  reasonable 
attributes.     Purely    arbitrary    systems    of    shorthand 
have  not  nourished  alongside  the  phonetic  idea,  and 
the  arbitrary  word-sign  will  gradually  be  superseded 
by  the  suggestive  one;  all  of  which  is  in  the  direction 
of  reason  and  simplicity,  which  in  shorthand  stands 
for  speed  and  legibility. 

(37)  Word-signs   are  absolutely  indispensable  in 
order  to  make  shorthand  practical :  that  is,  equal  to 
the  demands  of  business.     The  student  should  memo- 
rize the  word-signs  exactly  as  presented,  taking  note 
of   their  position   with  respect  to  the  line,   and   the 
nature  and  extent  of  abbreviation,  as  Avell  as  attracting 

*From  1LT)  to  l.">0  words  like — Of  bnt  to  when  ii«w 
that  (hi*  //in/,  etc.,  constitute  fully  one-half  of  ordinary 
discourse  or  writing. 


26  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKP   II. 

to  the  task  all  the  helps  of  suggestion  and  association 
that  may  appear.  The  following  examples  are  fnml 
forms;  in  fact,  a  word-sign  is  not  susceptible  of 
further  abbreviation. 


(38)    SIMPLE  STROKE  WORD-SIGNS—LIST  1  : 

do 

be              have 

will 

shall        was 

*          which 

I 

\       L 

C 

;    ) 

/ 

them  or  they    him  or  am 

think 

usual-ly 

hope 

(       ^ 

( 

; 

\ 

are 

you  or  your 

yet 

were 

would   for 

^jX* 

n 

u 

c 

3          V_ 

(39)  Learn  the  word-signs  so  they  will  be  appre- 
ciated by  two  faculties,  the  ear  and  the  eye.     Memorize 
them  thoroughly,  having  thought  of  their  sounds,  or 
the   resemblance    of    sound,    and   exerting   as   much 
reason  in  the  endeavor  as  may  be  needed ;   then  have 
another  test  your  knowledge  in  two  ways  —  first,  by 
asking   what  the  word- sign  is  for  such  and    such    a 
word ;    and,  second,  by  writing   the    word-signs  and 
asking   what    they  stand    for.     Much   writing  of  the 
word-sign  lists  serves  to  fix  them  in  the  mind. 

(40)  The  student  should  arrange  each  day's  work 
in    a    fair    proportion    of    study   of    the    principles, 
writing  words  and  sentences  illustrative  of  the  same, 
reading  shorthand  from  the  book  or  blackboard,  and 
making  a  point  to  submit  to  the  teacher  the  written 
result  of  the  day's  labor,  which  same  should  be  cor- 
rected and  returned  the  following  day.     At  the  same 
time  ask  questions  during  the  progress  of  the  work,  in 
order  not  to  remain  long  in  error  if  any  detail  of  Hie 
subject  is  not  understood.     Cultivate  the  habit  of  self- 
criticism.     Write,  correct,  rewrite.     Never  knowingly 
hand  in  an  error. 

*See  characters  of  Step  VI. 


STEP  II.]  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  27 

(41)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

The  following  sentences  are  to  be  composed  of  the  short- 
hand material  thus  far  given.  Employ  word-signs  freely, 
and  write  well.  No  mark  of  punctuation  is  necessary ;  01  "y 
a  blank  space  of  about  an  inch  between  sentences. 

Write  these  sentences  also  from  dictation,  and  read  them 
without  the  key  :  — 

They  are.  Are  you  ?  Will  you  have  them  ?  Which 
are  due?  Have  hope.  You  shall  have.  They  shall 
be.  Will  have  them.  You  would  be.  Which  was  for 
him?  They  would  thiuk.  Will  yet  be.  Will  have 
them  thiuk.  A,h  !  your  hope  will  be  vain.  Shall  you 
have  them  yet  ?  Usually  they  will  have.  Shall  thiuk 
they  have.  Will  you  have  him  do  it?  You  hope  they 
were  willing.  Think  they  would  have.  They  will 
have  him  yet.  Do  they  think  you  will  be?  Which 
will  usually  do? 

Your  theme  was  good.  Ned  and  Tom  will  have 
money.  It  will  be  thorough.  Unpack  your  tobacco 
package.  Which  ticket  will  it  be?  Your  gig  will  be 
damaged.  Do  they  usually  have  him  for  judge? 
They  hope  your  ship  will  make  no  voyage.  They 
gauged  your  keg.  Your  thatch  was  shaggy.  Which 
muff  do  you  think  cheap?  Were  your  teeth  good  for 
gum?  Will  you  have  him  come?  Which  are  you 
willing  they  shall  have?  Would  you  have  them  go? 
You  will  not  get  half  you  need.  They  hope  you  will 
be  here  ('ere)  Monday. 

REVIEW   QUESTIONS  —  STEP   II.: 

How  are  word  outlines  formed  of  the  consonant  strokes? 
What  is  the  rule  for  joining  strokes?  Is  there  more  than 
one  way  to  do  this?  How  many  directions  does  a  stem 
commonly  have  ?  Is  it  proper  to  lift  the  pen  before  an 
outline  is  linished  ?  What  is  an  outline  ?  How  long  a  word 
outline  can  be  written  ?  Can  you  make  the  outlines  in  Sec- 
tion 28  stand  for  words  ?  What  words  ?  What  are  pho- 
netics ?  What  is  spelling  phonetically  ?  What  is  the 


28  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP   IT. 

simplest  way  to  discover  the  exact  sounds  of  a  word  ? 
Spell  imaijc,  bouquet  and  lauijh  by  sound.  Why  are  tbe 
vowels  stricken  out  of  the  words  now  considered  ?  Why 
the  silent  letters  ? 

What  is  the  consonant  skeleton  of  a  word  ?  How  are 
curved  characters  joined  ?  Straight  ?  At  what  angle  does 
clmh  incline?  Ruh  ?  Which  is  the  quicker  curve,  a  Hat  or 
an  arched?  Can  the  curvature  or  direction  of  a  stroke  be 
changed  ?  How  much  ?  And  what  for  ?  Why  does  a 
writer  sometimes  shade  the  wrong  stem  ?  What  is  the 
consonant  skeleton  of  —  nominee,  typewriting,  short  Innid.' 
Does  English  spelling  assist  in  arriving  at  the  exact  sounds 
of  a  word  ?  Which  is  exerted  more  in  spelling,  the  eye  or 
the  ear;  that  is,  which  helps  the  memory  more  ?  Which  in 
writing  phonetically  ?  Is  reading  the  outlines  required  at 
this  stage?  Can  you  read  what  you  write?  If  not,  why 
not? 

What  is  a  word- sign  ?  What  are  word-signs  for?  Are 
they  difficult  to  learn?  Are  some  easier  than  others  ?  Which 
are  the  easier?  Are  word-signs  necessary  in  shorthand 
writing  ?  In  what  sense  is  the  word  practical  used  as 
herein  applied  to  shorthand  ?  What  demand  does  business 
make  of  shorthand  ?  Must  practical  shorthand  be  written 
rapidly  ?  Must  it  be  legible  ?  How  are  word-signs  to  be 
learned  ?  Name  five  of  the  simple  word-signs  given.  What 
is  the  word-sign  for  hope.,  think,  yet?  Do  all  these  word- 
signs  rest  on  the  line  ?  Is  this  to  be  remembered  ?  What 
sort  of  a  mental  process  conduces  to  ease  of  shorthand 
Avriting?  What  is  the  sign  for  usual  S  How  would  you 
know  when  this  same  sign  was  made  for  usual  I;/  .'  Is 
zshuh  a  common  sound  ?  Name  three  words  containing  the 
same  sound. 

What  do  'ave,  'ope  and  'im  remind  you  of  (Cockney  dialect, 
perhaps)?  How  can  the  same  sign  stand  for  you  ar.d  nnm- 
—  him  or  am  ?  Are  him  and  ant  the  same  parts  of  speech 
in  grammar?  Are  they  employed  similarly  in  a  sentence? 
Then  you  would  infer  that  different  parts  of  speech  will  not 
conflict  if  they  have  the  same  sign  ?  What  position  with 
reference  to  the  line  is  now  recommended  for  outlines  ? 
Which  stroke  determines  the  position  alluded  to  ?  What  is 
a  '•  final  form  ?  '.'  How  can  word-signs  best  be  memorized  ? 
What  two  ways  are  good  for  examining  upon  the  word- 
signs  ? 

Do  you  understand  fully  all  the  teachings  of  Step  II.? 


STKP    III.]  PRACTICAL    SUOKTIIAND.  29 


STEP  III. 

CIRCLE-S  AND  MODIFICATIONS: 

( \'2)  Thus  far  the  characters  have  been  principally 
linear,  but  circle-S  (or  /)  and  brief  wuh  and  yah 
merit  special  consideration. 

(!."))  The  small  circle  (°)  is  in  this  step  written 
mostly  in  the  evolnte,  or  unrolling,  direction  (see 
blackboard),  and  is  always  read  first  when 
initially  applied.  Remember  also  that  S  is  read 
last  when  written  last. 

(41)  Mechanically  considered  wuh  and  yuh  are 
apparent  I  j  halves  of  °.  They  are  presented  in  two 
si  in  pcs  for  convenience  in  securing  good  angular  junc- 
tion with  the  strokes  to  which  they  may  be  applied. 

(45)  Note  particularly  that  circle-S  and  the  brief 
wuh  and  yuh  forms  are  only  appendages,  to  be 
joined  to  consonant  stems  as  a  component  part  of  a 
stroke. 

(1C)      RULE.     Circle-S    (or    Z*)    is    written 

(1)  On  the  right  side  of  upright  stems. 

(2)  On  the  upper  side   of  horizontals  (run 

and  huh  being  classed  as  such). 

(3)  On  the  inside  of  curves. 


*  The   small   circle   occasionally   stands    for   Z    in    final 
.situations. 


30  INSTUUCT1ON   IN  [STEP   III. 

EXAMPLES  : 

sF   Ds  sCH  Ts      Ks  sG     Us  Hs      sV   sN  sTH 

A 


This  is  S  attached  to  a  simple  stem,  and  entirely 
unsyUabic. 

(47)  Circle-S  between  two  curves,  or  followed  by 
a  curve,  conforms  generally  to  the  direction  of  the 
second  stroke  ;  as 

noiseless        nasal        atheism       facile      pianissimo    for-same 


Exception  might  be  made  in  cases  of  extreme 
awkwardness. 

(48)  Circle-S  between  straight  strokes  that  make 
an  angle  is  turned  outside  the  angle.  This  is  de- 
manded as  a  law  of  motion,  irrespective  of  rules  to 
the  contrary. 

bask        passage       task  Jessica         paschal     discuss      risk 

_JL      J- 


(49)  Write :  Does  said  pass  (pas)  sap  puss 
sell  loose  choose  sage  sod  gas  sit  tease 
face  seem  nice  miss  seen  hiss  some  sash 
soothe  save  sign  smoke  vase  fix  (x  is  A'*) 
sing  sand  chase  case  despise  Jessop  sake 
soap  dusk  gossip  miser  wrestle  basic  passive 
vassal  misseth  desk  facile  atheism  nicely  passage 
missile  lessen  moisten 


STKl'    III.]                         PRACTICAL    SIIOKTHAND.  31 

(50)      Rule :     \Vuh    and   yah  join    to  the  strokes 
at  an  angle,  like  — 

wit         weak         yoke         wing          you          whip  yell      Yates 


(51)  Exception:    Except  that  wuh   (only  wuh) 
attaches    to    the  signs    for    L,    M,    N,   R,  in    imita- 
tion of  a  hook.     Always  upward  R  and  L ;  never  the 
downward. 

when         well  one  where       whim        worth     work    whelp 

.^ C *~*. *f.. .0. </{..</^:...C^. 

(52)  The   following  are   to   be   regarded    as  ex- 
ceedingly improper    joinings  of    wuh  and  yuh.     The 
student  should  note  them  carefully,  and  be  warned. 


C.  ......  C.  ......  C 


(53)  Although  wuh  and  yuh  may  be  written   in 
two  directions,  the   involute   and   evolute,    preference 
should  be  given  the  latter.     Avoid  junctions  like  the 
following,  when  such  are  wholly  unnecessary  :  — 

weed          wish  yoke  watch         wife          weep 

.........  I  ..............  }.  ............  _  ............  Z  .............  C  ..............  \  ........ 

(54)  Wuh    and   yuh    may   be    disjoined    in    rare 
cases  when  absolutely  inconvenient  to  attach  them. 

(55)  Circle-S  intiy    be  .written  within   either  wuh 
or  yuh,  like 

sweet       Swede         swell      swear         swan        twice       yes-sir 

....]  ........  I  .......  C  .......  c/  ........  <u  ........  1  ........  *£__ 


32  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP    III. 

(50)  When  the  letters  W  and  Y  precede  a  vowel  in 
a  word,  they  represent  consonant  sounds.  In  the  next 
step  it  will  be  shown  when  W  and  Y  are  vowels. 

(57)  Write:  Wake  weep  web  weed  wag 
yak  wink  yank  wear  yacht  wife  sweet  weave 
withe  swash  when*  (wen)'  swim  woof  whim* 
wash  wagon  went  once  yam  weight  unwell 
word  wheat*  whiff  wasp  whack  wheel  twice 
unworthy  wool  twain  weary  wax  PMwin  work 
wind  swap  unwieldy  swing  swollen  yours 
(yuh-s)  queen  qualm  bewail  dwell  quell 
yellow  Wednesday  acquire  square  Ipswich  warm 
equipage  squall  ammonia  equinox  insignia 
unison  inquest  twist  maniac  young  euphony 
Europe  eulogy  nephew  twig  Dwight  unique 

MODIFICATION    OF   CIRCLE-S: 

(5K)  The  addition  of  the  sound  of  T  or  1)  (tuh 
or  duh)  to  the  sound  denoted  by  the  circle-S  may  be 
indicated  by  a  small  loop,  called  the  st-loop,  or 
stuh. 

pass          passed  days  dazed          save  stave 

V :> I I C L... 

(50)  A  further  sound  of  R  is  added  by  enlarging 
the  loop.  This  larger  loop  is  called  the  str- 
loop,  or  ster. 

past  pastor        boast          boaster         fast  faster 


*  The  aspirate  (huh)  is  not  written  in  words  beijmnini? 
ich,  as  legibility  is  not  impaired  by  its  omission. 


STKI'    III.J  I'KAOTICAL    SIIOKTIIAM).  33 

.  (60)  T\vo  sounds  of  S  or  Z  (i.e.,  ses,  sus,  sis, 
etc.)?  ZS  or  SZ,  are  denoted  by  enlarging  the  circle. 
This  is  called  the  ses-circle,  or  ses. 

fuss     fusses    base     bases     lace     laces 

.........  L  ............  L  .............  \,  .............  No  .........  C.  ............  <?_  ...... 

(61)     A  third  sound  of  S  is  represented  as  follows 
(also  S  after  a  loop)  :  — 

excesses    possesses    recesses      tests         posters       masters 


(62)  Cautions.  Double-S  in  spelling  is  not 
necessarily  two  sounds  of  S.  Be  governed  solely  by 
the  sounds. 

The  use  of  stuh  initially  on  straight  strokes  (more 
especially  light  lines)  is  of  doubtful  -value,  because 
mechanically  difficult*  to  execute  and  preserve  legi- 
bility. 

If  proof  of  the  above  were  needed,  let  the  student  wcite 
very  rapidly  the  words  —  step,  stock,  state,  employing  the 
loop  for  sf,  when  it  will  be  demonstrated  that  the  pen  move- 
ment has  an  almost  irresistible  tendency  to  turn  straight 
stems  into  curves.  On  the  other  hand  shaded  straight 
strokes  are  less  liable  to  be  so  affected,  and  words  like  stuli, 
stui/.  stni/e,  can  conform  to  theory  and  be  written  with  the 
loop.  Curved  stems  are  obviously  unaffected,  and  admit  the 
stuh-loop  invariably. 

Stuh  primarily  stands  for  st  or  ftd  in  the  same 
syllabic  stroke  ;  another  syllable  would  require  the 
addition  of  tuh  or  duh. 

Ster  (str)  should  never  be  used  initially. 

*  The  tendency  of  expert  stenographers  to  write  words 
like  jn'i  iist'i!  with  the  stroke-D  for  the  past  tense  shows 
that  the  motion  required  for  the  loop  is  displeasing,  even 
when  linal;  confirming  the  opinion  that  it  is  more  a  matter 
of  dynamics  than  of  shorthand  theciVy. 


34  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP  III 

(63)     WRITING    EXERCISE: 

Past  best  pieces  guesses  feast  stone  pieced 
just  stitch  state  paused  stage  coaster  Chester 
host  jester  lest  Hester  most  hisses  success 
guest  toaster  Nestor  stakes  losses  amazed 
castor  advised  sashes  seems  must  steam  sense 
abscesses  '  stems  Sussex  suggest  masses  Lester 
lobster  decisive  Dexter  postal  mastiff  justify 
ensilage  successes  songster  misses  diseases 
investor  register  sausage  system  Sisyphus 
destiny  thesis  tests  Moses  bases  buster 
necessaries  Jesus  season  youngster  successive 
hazed  insist  Mississippi  testify  schism  Susan 
staff  Texas  roosters  possessor 

(64)     WORD-SIGNS  — LIST   II.  • 

special        subject       necessary      fl.-st    steuograph-y-er   mistake 
'    \  \          vQ  0 


next 

system             as  or  has 

come,  Co. 

without 

• 

.....e... 

e 

her 

several       soon 

this              i 

t 

^ 

P 

^k                           X.  _s 

c 

(65)  The  plural  of  word  or  word-sign  forms  is 
denoted  by  attaching  the  circle-S,  which  also  can 
stand  for  the  affix  self,  as 

subjects       systems     mistakes       himself     herself         yourselt 
...\> t. STXrr?. ^>. J «.... 


8TKP   III.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  35 

(66)      A  word- sign  can  constitute   a   part  of    the 
outline  of  a  derivative  word :  — 

specially       unusual     severally    mistaken      unnecessary  willing 


READ  BLACKBOARD  SENTENCES  No.  1  : 

(This  and  subsequent  reference  to  blackboard  to  be 
observed  when  the  teacher  prepares  illustrations  according 
to  the  accompanying  exhibit  of  Blackboard  Suggestions.) 

(67)     PHRASES  : 

Definition.  A  phrase  in  shorthand  consists 
of  two  or  more  word  outlines  joined.  Phrasing 
is  done  to  facilitate  speed,  and  when  that  is  accom- 
plished the  practice  is  warranted  ;  otherwise  not.  Natu- 
ral phrases,  almost  unconsciously  written,  are  useful ; 
but  phrasing  must  be  cultivated  coincideutly  with  other 
procedure.  In  furtherance  of  that  idea,  a  few  common- 
place phrases  will  be  presented  in  the  following  steps. 
More  extended  remarks  regarding  phrasing  as  an 
artistic  and  valuable  development  of  shorthand  writing 
will  appear  near  the  close  of  this  volume. 

(68)     SIMPLE   PHRASES  — I.: 

you-will       would-be  you-are  shall-have 


will-be  must-be  hope-you-will 


as-soon-as  as-yct  you-ina\ 

Q-9  *  r^->.... 


36  INSTRUCTION    IX  [STKI'    III. 

(69)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

(Write  these  sentences  slowly  and  carefully,  remembering 
to  apply  the  principles,  suggestions,  word-signs  and  phrases 
thus  far  learned.  Prepare  a  neat  paper  specifying  the  step 
and  section  number.  Submit  same  to  teacher  for  correc- 
tion, never  consciously  handing  in  an  error.  Use  the 
sentences  for  dictation  practice  when  they  can  be  accurately 
written.) 

It  will  soon  be  necessary.  This  special  stenographer 
himself.  Which  will  you  wait  for?  They  hope  this 
subject  will  be  as  you  desire.  Stenographers  have 
special  systems.  Necessary  facility  comes  soon 
enough.  Edward's  first  subject  was  ''Ensilage." 
Suggest  some  special  system.  Several  testify  for 
him.  Hester  raised  it  herself.  Atheism  has  some 
lessons.  Several  seasons  have  passed.  Yes,  as  usual, 
though  you  may  think  her  system  unnecessary.  Have 
him  sweep  off  this  wax.  Edwin's  nasal  passage  was 
stopped.  Wash  this  wool  when  you  think  it  necessary. 
Jesse's  system  has  passed  best  tests.  As  soon  MS 
you  come  you  may  have  him  know  it.  Dexter  regis- 
tered by  mistake.  You  will  have  him  do  it  well,  won't 
you?  Last  month  Bessie's  weaving  was  unworthy. 
They  are  coming  as  usual  next  season.  Twain's 
whim  was  specially  funny.  Do  you  think  Wednesday 
will  be  soon  enough?  It  shall  be  done,  though 
Winnie  was  unwilling.  This  unwieldy  subject  has 
some  sage  sense. 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  — STEP  III.: 
What  is  the  small  circle  for  S  called?  What  else?  In  what 
direction  does  the  pen  move  when  circle-S  is  written !  Is 
this  a  familiar  motion ?  Where  do  you  see  it  illustrated? 
How  do  wuh  and  ynh  resemble  circle-S?  Are  they  written 
similarly?  Are  these  characters  strokes?  Why  are  two 
directions  of  wuh  and  yuh  presented?  When  is  S  read  in 
an  outline?  Is  there  anything  peculiar  about  this?  Is  an 
appendage  usually  considered  before  its  principal  stroke? 
(It  is  not.)  When  is  S  read  last?  How  is  S  attached  to 


STKT   III.]  PRACTICAL   SHOKTHAXD.  37 

upright  stems?  How  to  horizontal?  How  to  curves?  How 
formed  between  two  curves?  How  between  straight  strokes 
that  make  an  angle?  How  between  T  and  D  or  P  and  B? 
What  law  governs  the  place  of  the  S  outside  an  angle? 
What  other  use  has  S?  How  is  self  indicated? 

How  are  wnh  and  ynh  joined  to  strokes?  Any  exceptions 
to  this  practice?  What  phonetic  quality  have  L  and  K? 
( Liquids. )  Is  wnh  ever  attached  to  clownward-ll  or  down- 
wan  1-L?  Why  not?  (The  form  will  conflict  with  a  later 
principle.)  (\inSbejoinedtowuhandyuh?  How?  What 
does  the  word  "modification"  mean?  How  is  circle-S 
changed  in  form?  What  is  Stub?  What  does  it  stand  for? 
What  isSter,  and  its  meaning?  How  is  clonble-S  indicated? 
How  two  sounds  of  S?  Does  English  spelling  have  any  force 
in  the  matter?  Does  the  same  sign  stand  for  SZ,  ZS,  ZZ, 
etc.?  What  is  it  called?  What  does  it  look  like?  How 
many  times  larger  is  it  than  circle-S?  (Five.)  How  is  a 
third  sound  of  S  denoted?  S  after  a  loop? 

How  would  the  words  hawd,  chased,  cased,  be  written? 
The  words  1nisie<l,  msf;/,  elicit/  What  is  the  caution  with 
regard  to  the  loops?  is  it  a  matter  of  theory,  or  does  it 
relate  to  practical  writing?  Why  should  expert  writers 
sometimes  use  a  stroke  when  the  loop  is  called  for? 
Why  does  stuh,  initial  or  final,  attach  better  to  a  shaded 
stroke  than  to  a  light?  Is  stuh  employed  when  another 
syllable  is  needed?  How  is  the  plural  number  of  a  word- 
sign  denoted?  Does  this  differ  from  the  usual  procedure? 
l'an  the  word-signs  enter  into  the  make-up  of  other  word 
outlines? 

What  is  a  phrase?  What  docs  phrasing  amount  to?  Are 
phrases  readily  made?  Always?  Do  they  come  by  inspira- 
tion? How  is  facility  is  phrasing  acquired?  Mention  a 
simple  phrase.  Is  it  time  wasted  at  this  stage  to  invent 
phrases?  (Yes.)  Do  the  right  kind  of  phrases  hasten 
speed?  Why? 

Write  on  the  blackboard  any  bad  joinings  of  wuh  or  yuh 
with  another  sign.  What  motion,  involute  or  evolute,  is  it 
preferable  to  give  to  wnh  and  yuh?  Which  of  these  motions 
is  like  that  of  the  hands  of  a  clock?  How  are  the  words 
<'•!,<•».  n-liijT.  n-lnii-k,  written?  Where  lies  the  difficulty  in 
writing  the  outlines  of  unirichlly,  inm-dl,  ninr,,rthy?  How 
would  yon  write  hrim/l.  <l"-i'U,  </i«ti/ /  What  is  the  single 
word  that  defines  the  law  of  motion?  (Dynamics.) 

Have  yon  committed  to  memory  the  word-signs  of  Steps 
II.  and  ILL? 


448596 


38  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP   IV. 


STEP    IV. 

THE  VOWELS  AND  VOWEL  PROCEDURE: 

(70)  Definition.     A  vowel  is  a  free,  voiced  sound 
made  with  the  vocal  organs  more  or  less  without  con- 
tact.    Only  twelve  vowel  sounds  are  utilized,  although 
this   is  obviously  but   a  partial*  exhibit.     However, 
the    following    signs    are    sufficient    for   all    practical 
purposes   in    shorthand   writing.     Vowels  are    repre- 
sented by  dots  and  dashes  disjoined,  and  made  shaded 
or  light  according  to  the  strength  of  the  sound. 

(71)  The  vowel  signs  are  divided  into  four  groups, 
the  same  sign  serving  in  each  group,  which  is  placed 
to  (beside)  the  consonant  stroke    in  three  positions, 
the  difference  of  place  indicating  the  variation  of  sound. 

(72)     LONG   VOWEL    SCALE: 

LOXG  1      e      like  ee    in  fee 

DoT  2      a         "    ay    "  lay     V   (.    /      medial  5  position. 

VOWEL  SIGNS:    3      Sir       "    ar     "  far 


I,OXG  1      Sw  like  aw  in  maw  f~^          initial 

DASH  26         "    ow   "  mow      sf^       medial  I  position. 

VOWKL   SIGXS:     3     Co       "     oo     "   moo"       ^    final      ) 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  above  are  all  shaded  signs, 
standing  for  extended  vowel  utterance.  The  "  long  " 
vowel  is  one  that  can  be  indefinitely  sounded. 

(73)  The  same  vowel  sign  is  used  for  words  like 
pa,  palm,  ah,  as  for  far,  park,  yard,  though  the  latter 
class  (in  which  a  is  followed  by  ?•)  far  outnumbers  the 
other.  A  proper  rolling  of  the  r  apparently  modifies 

*A  alone  is  said  to  have  nine  delicate  shades  of  sound  : 
five  are  common. 


STEP  IV.] 


PKACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


39 


the  sound  of  the  a.  In  some  sections  *  of  the  United 
States  par  is  pronounced  like  pa,  no  sound  of  r  being 
heard.  Good  pronunciation  demands  a  slight  rolling 
of  the  r,  though  as  far  as  shorthand  is  concerned  the 
above  vowel  indication  is  sufficient. 

(74)     SHORT   VOWEL    SCALE: 


SHORT  i 

DOT  2 

VOWEL  SIGNS  :     3 


like  i 


SHORT 

DASH 

VOWEL     SIGNS 


initial  ) 

medial  5  position. 

final     ) 

initial  ) 

medial  >  position. 

final     ) 


(75)  The  figures  in  the  above  groups  indicate 
initial,  medial  or  final  position,  with  reference  to  the 
consonant  stroke.  The  words  and  outlines  for  illustra- 
tion will  make  this  plain.  The  beginning  of  a  stroke 
is  always  first  position  for  the  applied  vowel  sign.  A 
precise  direction  of  strokes  is  necessary. 

(7G)    EXAMPLES  OF  APPLIED  VOWEL  SIGNS  : 

key  wake  make 


Shah        wrought         rope  soup        set       switch     wick          sack 


sash 


up 


J 


whoop         watch          shoo  caw 

\    \     i     j     „- 


*  Some  New  Yorkers  (and  the  same  is  true  of  certain 
sections  of  the  South)  give  to  the  r  such  an  excess  of  trill 
that  it  seems  as  though  a  vowel  foreign  to  the  word  followed 
it.  This  provincialism  makes  of  bird  —  bitr-yid,  of  earth  — 
ur-yith,  murder  —  mur-yider,  and  heard — hnr-yid. 


40  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKP   IV. 

EXAMPLES  —  Conti*  tied  : 

talk  oath  soap  slioe          post  jib  etch 


The  position  of  vowel  signs  between  two  strokes 
will  be  explained  further  on  in  this  step. 

(77)  A  singer    sounding  the    intervals  of   music 
runs  up  the  "do,  ra,  me,  fa"  scale  until  the  desired 
note  is  reached.     When  seeking  for  the  vowel  sound 
of  a  word,  the  shorthand  student  should    sing   the  —  E 
A    AR—  AW    O      GO  —  I     E     A—  O     U    OO- 
vowel  scale  until  he  has  such  a  clear  idea  of  the  sound, 
sign  and  sign  position,  that  he  can  instantly  apply  his 
knowledge. 

(78)  Recite  the  correct  vowel    sounds  in  the  fol- 
lowing words  :  — 

Note  not  beat  fat  niay  fate  fix  top  food 
good  but  that  took  fed  sad  soot  off  map 
hid  did  pet  hot  let  gag  sum  mean  gate 
harm  root  cart  food  part  ask  fall  soft 
aught  said  Shah  laugh  pea  eight  neigh  soak 
dough  Stella  gnaw  ache  knee  thaw  brew 
deaf  true  daub  taught. 

The  learner  is  recommended  to  select  a  variety  of 
words,  and  strive  to  utter  with  exactness  their  sounds, 
both  consonant  and  vowel. 

(79)  Exceptional.     In  the  foregoing  vowel  scale 
there  is  no  provision  for  the  vowels  of  words  like  —  <u'r, 
err,  whole,  pair,  her,   etc.     This    is  understood   (see 
Sect.  70),  and  such  words  are  to  be  represented  by  the 
signs  of  the  sound  of  nearest  resemblance,  as 

air  err  whole  sir  mare  worm 

.3.  .......  3.  .........  r. 


STI-'.r    IV.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  41 

(-SO)  Circle-S  and  brief  wuh  and  yiih  have  no 
vowel  position,  being  merely  appendages.  They  are 
always  rcarJ  first  when  attached  to  the  beginning  of  a 
stroke,  and  if  a  vowel  occurs  it  is  applied  and  read 
with  reference  to  the  stroke  as  a  whole. 

VOWEL  BEFORE  OR  AFTER  A  STROKE : 

(.si)  RULE.  A  vowel  sound  heard  before 
a  consonant  is  written  before  the  stroke  ;  i.e.,  at 
the  left  of  an  upright,  and  above  a  horizontal. 
A  vowel  after  a  consonant  is  placed  at  the  right 
of  vertical  strokes  and  below  horizontals. 

(See  examples  under  Section  76.) 

(s2)  The  above  is  not  a  precise  statement.  The 
actual  procedure  is  to  write  the  consonant  outline 
first,  and  then  place  the  vowel  signs,  whether 
they  are  to  appear  before  or  after  the  stems. 

(83)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

(Insert  all  vowel  signs  according  to  the  sound,  and 
not  the  spelling. ) 

Ate  ought  eat  art  oat  aim  tar  toe  char 
hoe  shoe  foe  seethe  doe  sooth  once  ache 
watch  since  such  knee  neigh  thaAv  though 
sad  stop  soup  stain  gnaw  Yates  own  owing 
ode  oath  awed  eve  ebb  itch  owed  ash  soak 
she  tease  dose  seed  seat  pass  piece  guesses 
pester  pieces  stage  hisses  host  poster  mosses 
want  sweep  weave  fuss  hay  axe  jaw  odd 
Joe  Shaw  obey  wages  Opie  ado  aha  census 
Eph  pause  noses  Jay  eighty  chaise  egg  show 
into  switch  face  sting  whip  web  echo  Webster 
steam  sake  wept  stove  widow  wave  dazed 
sum  lost  musters  thesis  Swede  stem  roses 
test  spaced  ashy  lest  oxen  sixty  safety  stucco 


42  INSTRUCTION   IN  [.STEP   IV. 

(84)     READING  EXERCISE  : 


L/J.1.1LJ  .....  ; 


I     \ 

h.A 


(85)  There  is  no  particular  need  of  indicating  the 
vowel  that  is  understood  within  the  ses  character. 
The  common  words,  like  same,  £/«s,  o?r«,  w/.sf,  etc., 
in  the  foregoing  reading  exercise,  will  further  on  have 
word-  sign  forms  ;  so  but  little  attention  need  now 
be  paid  to  them  except  as  instruments  to  teach  the 
vowels. 

(8G)     VOWEL  SIGNS  BETWEEN  STROKES: 

Vowels  before  and  after  single  consonant  strokes 
have  already  been  noted.  A  vowel  between  two 
strokes  that  represent  a  word  of  one  syllable  takes 
three  situations  :  — 

1.  First  position  vowels  are  written  (in  correct 
place)  after  the  first  stroke,  as 

beat  feet  heat  bit  tit  fiit 


SIT.l'   IV.] 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


43 


2.  Second  position  vowels  are  written  after  the 
first  stroke  if  long;  but  before  the  second  if  short, 
.as 


bait 


fate 


hate 


but 


shut 


hut 


fe_*£] \ 


3.     Third  position  vowels   are  written  before  the 
second  stroke,  as 


bat 


hat 


foot 


hood 


*  In  other  words,  all  first  and  all  long  second  posi- 
tion vowels  are  applied  to  the  first  consonant ;   and 
every  other  vowel  to  the  second ;    the  design  being 
to  make  the  place  of  the  vowel  show  its  character, 
even  if  the  dot  or  dash  be  carelessly  written. 

*  This  is  the  traditional  rule,  formulated  for  a  time  when 
vowels  were  more  used  than  now.     The  treatment  we  would 
surest  for  this  situation  is  this  :  — 

Rule.  A  vowel  sign  occurring  between  two  strokes  that 
stand  for  a  syllable  should  be  written  in  proper  position  after 
the  first  stroke,  when  convenient ;  otherwise,  before  the 
second  stroke.  The  measure  of  convenience  may  be  illus- 
trated as  follows :  — 


take       cool         rang         dash   depth        rap 


look 


catch 

7 


—  the  endeavor  being  to  keep  the  Towel  out  of  angles 
and  ambiguous  positions;  and  that  accomplished,  all  fur- 
ther effort  may  end. 


44  INSTRUCTION   IN  [sTEr   IV. 

(87)  Where  two  strokes  stand  for  two  syllables, 
the  vowel  sign  is  applied  to  the  stroke  of  its  syllable, 
as 

poet     poem          Leon         Cayenne         Cohen       bevy         coda 


(88)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

(Always  execute  the  full  consonant  outline  first, 
and  then  apply  the  vowel  signs.) 

Tip  deep  fat  fade  mark  meek  feed  took 
book  did  read  can  look  been  done  road 
foot  ship  note  sham  rude  boat  that  much 
made  get  good  rush  push  ditch  shock  leave 
leech  shook  lave  patch  depth  latch  vim  vex 
hark  botch  match  tax  thick  tub  teetli  kith 
chin  kin  chat  knit  lady*  many  Effie  Emma 
Annie  Eddie  Abbie  papist  memento  gummy 
tobacco  funny  mimic  sesame  invest  symphony 
dusky  twit  Memphis  dusty  late  receipt  fishy 
evade  showed  nail  route  theme  lathe  towage 
thief  piano  fasten  muscle 

For  words  like  Emma  and  Annie  write  as  many 
strokes  as  there  are  syllables,  and  vowelize  according 
to  Sect.  87. 

(89)  Use  a  pen  for  all  these  exercises,  selecting 
one  not  so  pliable  as  to  shade  too  broadly.  Since  the 
advent  of  reliable  fountain  pens  the  pencil  has  become 
unpopular  for  shorthand,  not  only  because  pen  notes 
are  superior  in  point  of  legibility,  but  because  con- 
tinued use  of  the  pencil  hurts  other  penmanship. 

*  Note  that  final  //  has  the  vowel  sound  of  i.  In  the  words 
one  and  once  the  vowel  takes  the  sound  of  wuh.  These  are 
peculiar  aspects  of  w  and  y. 


STKI*  iv.]  :M:ACI  icAi,  SHORTHAND.  45 

(1)0)     READING  EXERCISE: 


Proper  nouns  arc  distinguished  from  ihe  i;ias>  of  words 
by  tlic  underscore. 

READ  BLACKBOARD  SENTENCES  No.  2. 
(1)1)     REMARKS: 

After  the  consideration  of  one  more  principle 
(diphthongs),  the  student  will  have  shorthand  material 
sullicient  to  represent  all  the  sounds  of  language,  so 
that  word  outlines  can  be  read ;  which  leads  to  the 
remark  that  everything  written  should  be  read,  and 
read  many  times  in  order  to  acquire  perfect  familiarity 
with  every  step.  Write  the  same  thing  many  times. 
Read  that  writing  many  times.  Shirk  nothing.  These 
tasks  cannot  be  dwelt  upon  too  long  or  too  assiduously. 

('.1 2)  Do  not  lift  the  pen  ofteiier  than  necessary. 
Make  each  consonant  outline  entire  before  removing 
the  pen  from  the  paper.  Much  of  the  procedure  of 
this  immual  is  in  the  direction  of  avoiding  foolish  pen 
liftings.  A  pertinent  illustration  of  this  will  be  found 
in  the  use  of  the  ticks  in  Step  V.  ;  and  the  early  dis- 
carding of  the  vowel  sign  obviates  much  pen  lifting. 


46  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP  IV. 


REVIEW  QUESTIONS  — STEP  IV.: 

What  is  a-vowel?  Ho\v  many  are  mentioned  in  this  step? 
How  are  they  represented?  Do  these  dots  and  dashes  bear 
any  resemblance  to  other  shaded  and  light  characters?  Is 
there  a  design  in  so  indicating  the  vowels?  There  are  how 
many  dot-vowel  signs?  How  many  clash?  Name  the  long 
dot-vowels.  The  long  dash.  The  short  dot.  The  short  dash. 
Name  all  the  first  position  vowels.  Where  is  first  position? 
Does  it  have  anything  to  do  with  the  ruling  of  the  paper? 
Name  four  of  the  third  place  vowels.  How  many  more  are 
there?  How  many  shades  of  sound  is  voweJ-a  said  to  have? 
Name  three  words  containing  dash  vowel  signs.  Name  throe 
containing  the  short-dot  signs.  What  do  the  figures  refer 
to  in  Sects.  72  and  74?  Does  spelling  appear  to  regulate  the 
vowel  sounds?  How  are  the  "exceptional"  vowels  repre- 
sented? (Sect.  79.) 

How  would  you  pronounce  Noah,  Eva,  EUa.J  How  is  the 
vowel  read  when  written  before  a  stroke  containing  wuh? 
Then  wuh  is  really  a  consonant  without  vowel  limitation? 
Which  are  written  first  in  an  outline,  the  consonants  or 
vowels?  A  vowel  read  before  a  consonant  is  how  written? 
Which  side  of  an  upright  stroke?  Which  side  of  a  horizon- 
tal? How  about  curves?  Are  the  vowel  signs  ever  joined 
to  the  consonant?  Is  it  necessary  to  indicate  the  vowel 
within  ses?  What  is  the  best  way  to  discover  the  vowel 
sounds  of  a  word?  What  is  the  vowel  "  scale  "  ?  Sound  it. 

Do  vowels  between  two  strokes  have  a  fixed  or  variable 
position?  What  governs  the  position?  Do  the  syllables 
have  anything  to  do  with  it?  What  is  the  rule  for  first  posi- 
tion vowels?  For  second?  For  third?  Why  is  such  pains- 
taking demanded?  What  will  it  amount  to  when  vowels  are 
discarded?  When  is  y  a  vowel?  Give  a  few  examples. 
How  would  you  Avrite  Annie  to  make  it  differ  from  Ann? 
Eddie  from  Ed?  Emma  from  Em?  What  is  the  rule? 

When  two  vowels  occur  between  two  strokes,  what  is 
done?  There  are  probably  how  many  syllables?  Then  the 
syllable  idea  really  settles  the  question?  Which  is  prefer- 
able to  use,  a  pen  or  a  pencil?  What  is  a  foolish  pen- 
lifting?  Sing  the  vowel  "  scale." 


STKP   V.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  47 

STEP  V. 

DIPHTHONGS  : 

(93)  Definition.      The    diphthong   is   a   double 
vowel.     There  are  four  diphthongs,  namely  :  — 

AI,        OI,        EU        (EW)        and        OU        (OW) 

(94)  Diphthongs    have    two    positions  —  AI  and 
OI    first,    and    EU    and    OU    third  ;     and    they  are 
generally    placed  to    the    consonant    stroke    like  the 
vowel  signs,  through  occasionally  attached. 

EXAMPLES: 
AI  OI  EU  OU       hive  ahoy    pew     vow      poise     bough 


JOINED  DIPHTHONGS: 
few       iron         idea    height       Hyson      cue     eyes     bow 


1      1      ^     -,    *   \ 


DIPHTHONG    WORD-SIGNS  : 
I  ayeorhi«li          new       how  now 

V 

>-/  A        -....V*i 


(95)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

Toys  pews  aisle  file  vices  noises  ally 
(ul-luh)  spice  sky  avoid  dew  rouse  ounce 
Idaho  lieu  Ohio  mew  accuses  Hugh 
amuses  China  voice  houses  eying  highness 
high  sliced  shyster  ivy  desire  voyage  vouch 
review  couch  nephew  widely  chew  annoy 
moist  ahoy  hew  hoister  juices  argue  Depew 
rescue  feud  hourly  bureau  writhe 


48  1XSTKI.XTION    IX  [SHOT    V. 

(96)      READING  EXERCISE: 


V 

\ 


\    ^  i       T 

I  ...  P  _  -Oi     I. 


r 

(97)      THE  TICKS: 

Definition.  The  tick  is  the  shortest  linear  charac- 
ter in  shorthand  writing,  being  in  length  less  than 
half  a  stroke.  Signs  so  small  demand  certainty  of 
direction  and  nicety  of  attachment  when  joined. 

(98)  The  ticks  are  introduced  to     stand  for  fre- 
quently* recurring  words,   and  their  quality  of  being 
joined  saves  pen  lifting. 

(99)  The    or    he    is    denoted    by    a    light    tick- 
executed  in  the  direction  of   chub,  or    puh ;    that    is, 
obliquely  with  reference  to  the  line,   not  to  the  stroke 
to  which  it  is  attached,  as 

the-dog          the-cat       he-will      he-may        lic-luis       as-he 

f  < 


L 


the-subject    the-match          the-same       he-would          the-hat 


*  C.  C.  Beale  reports  that  in  180,000  words,  covering  all 
kinds  of  matter,  counted  and  classified,  the  and  he  occurred 
9,'JGO  times,  and  a  and  and  7,598  times.  By  comparison,  a 
few  other  words  approaching  them  in  frequency  were  :  for, 
3,3!)4;  have,  2,304;  to,  4,920;  we,  4,050;  you,  7,530. 


STEP    V.]  riiACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  41) 

(100)  A,  an  and  and  are  denoted  by  a  tick 
written  in  the  direction  of  tub  or  kuh  ;  that  is, 
upright  or  horizontal  with  reference  to  the  line. 

a-dog  a-cat       ami-will       and-may       an-axe       an-atom 


I  - 


and-this      and-»o       and-a         and-the  a-hat       a-rate 


(101)  As  the  examples  indicate,  these  ticks  are 
joined,*   and  really   make   a   phrase  form,   with  the 
word  denoted  by  the  tick  as  the  first  member.     Al- 
ways write  the  tick  first,  and  read  it  first.     Standing 
for    actually  another  word,  the  tick  takes  precedence 
(in  reading)  of  even  the  circle-S.     The  use  of  S-tuh 
initially,    instead    of  stuh,    favors    the    joining   of    a 
tick. 

(102)  Another  feature  of  the  tick    (see   101)    is 
that  it  can  be  joined,  if  need  be,  to  the  preceding  out- 
line,   thereby    becoming  the    second    member   of   the. 
phrase  so  formed.     Whether  the  tick  shall  be  joined 
to  the  preceding  or  following  outline  is  governed  by 
convenience.     The  single  stroke  word-signs  are  com- 
monly followed  by  the  tick,  as 

in-thc        for-the      have-the         by-thc        which-he 


(, 


*  111  rare  cases,  where  a  fluent  junction  would  be  im- 
possible, a  tick-word  hcy'uininy  a  sentence  may  be  denoted 
by  a  tick  disjoined. 


50  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP  V. 

(103)  The  two  directions  of  the  ticks  are  granted 
to    secure    good   angles   at  the  point  of   attachment, 
which  gives  rise  to  the  following  remark  :  — 

(104)  Angles  in  shorthand.     It  is  well  to  ap- 
preciate,  even  at  this  step,   the   importance  of  good 
angles  at  the  junction  of  strokes.     There  is  this  dis- 
tinction of  angles,  —  the  acute  is  good,  the  obtuse  is 
bad,  the  right  angle  is  indifferent.     The  acute  angle 
is  termed  good,  because  speedy  writing  has  no  effect 
upon    its    character.      The   obtuse    is  less   desirable, 
because  it  is  likely  to  degenerate  into  a  curve  when 
rapidly  written.     The  angle  as  a  "  study"  in  shorthand 
writing  is  of  exceeding  interest  ;    it  lias  the  most  to  do 
with  the  difference  between  theoretical  and  practical 
shorthand. 

(105)  The   ticks  make   urgent  demand  for  good 
angles  ;    therefore  two  considerations  are  paramount 
when  the  tick  is   to  be  joined,  —  1st,   the  best  angle 
when  a  choice  is  had  of  two  directions;   2d,  a  forward 
direction  of  pen  movement.     If  both  cannot  be  secured, 
the  quick  (acute)  angle  is  the  more  to  be  desired. 

(106)     TICK  JOININGS  : 
Quick  angles      /~v...V>  .....  |  __  \  ........  /  _____  ^/      <         /.... 


Slow  angles 


J      \_^_  ^—      /  —-^  ^ 


(107)     TICK  WORD-SIGNS: 

who 
all       already    ought         of    or     on  to     but  should     whom 

\  I  /  \        I        / 


STKP    V.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  51 

The  tick  word- signs  are  not  commonly  joined  to 
long  outlines,  though  occasionally  to  the  single  stroke 
word-signs  when  the  form  will  not  ch.sh  with  the 
other  signification  of  the  tick,  i.e.,  he,  the,  and,  etc. 

of-such         of-this          on-this       of-them       to-him 


I. t 


to-\vhoin       too-many    to-which       shoulcl-be      it-sh'd-be 


(108)     TlCK  PHRASES: 

Of-the,  to-the,  and-a,  and-the,  etc.,  which  are 
purely  tick  phrases,  are  better  joined  together  than 
to  the  preceding  or  following  stroke,  in  order  that 
these  minute  characters  may  be  given  a  workable  size. 
Therefore,  always  phrase  the  ticks  when  possible, 
and  at  quick  angles. 

of-the      to  the          on-the       he-should     and-a        and-the 


On  and  should  are  written  upward ;  forward  direc- 
tion and  phrasing  demand  this. 

In  the  mental  picture  of  what  is  to  be  written  the 
tick  forms  an  integral  part  of  the  whole  outline.  If 
the  writer  misses  attaching  one  where  it  was  intended 
to  go,  let  him  not  go  back  and  "  touch  up,"  but  apply 
to  the  following  stroke. 

(109)     POSITION: 

Two  notions  of  position  prevail  in  -shorthand. 
( )ne  has  already  been  noted,  namely,  the  place  or 
position  of  the  vowel  sign  beside  the  consonant  stroke. 


52 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


This  is  vowel  position,  and  has  sole  reference  to  the 
outline.  Another  view  is  that  of  strokes  and  outlines 
with  respect  to  the  line  written  upon.  This  is  outline 
position.  The  two  ideas  blend  into  one  when  vowels 
are  discarded.  Until  then  the  word-signs  only  will 
illustrate  outline  position. 

(110)  For  the  easier  mastery  of  the  word-signs 
they  will  be  often  represented  in  groups  ;  that  is, 
the  same  sign  in  three  positions  (1)  above  (2) 
upon,  and  (3)  across  (or  below)  the  line. 

GROUP   WORD-SIGNS  —  List  I.  : 


\2 

be, 

object 

1 

3 

to-be 

1 

1 

time 

2 

it 

3 

at, 

mt 

.// 

1 
/..    2 

each 

which 

/        / 

'       3 

much 

M 

1 

if 

V 

(       2 

for, 

fact 

V.    3 

half 

)> 

^    1 

here 

•_  , 

.^\    2 

her 

'   3 

our 

/"          2    \vill 

.' /TT....    3    whole,  allow 


1  ever 

'2  have 

3  however 

1  these 

2  tliis 

3  those,  thus 

1  we-are 

2  where 

3  a  ware 


wish,  she 

shall 

issue 


It  will  be  noted  that  the  most  common  word  rests 
upon  the  line,  which  is  the  natural  attitude  for  writing. 
The  positions  of  the  others  will  have  to  be  considered 
more  or  less  arbitrary  until  that  matter  can  be  viewed 
from  a  more  rational  standpoint.  For  the  time  behi"; 
memorize  the  group  word-signs,  seeking  to  know  each 
by  its  place  as  much  as  by  its  form,  and  employ  them 
carefully  in  the  writing  exercises  which  follow  the  re- 
spective lists. 

READ  BLACKBOARD  SENTENCES  No.  3. 


STEP    V.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND  53 

(111)  FURTHER  COMMON  WORD-SIGNS— III.  : 


I 


...  because 


0       .  c 

is  or  his  we  or  with 


..V ....  happy  -what 

^— s  \j 

when  ye  or  year 

~7~...  common  beyond 

shall-be  this-is  this-is-to-be 


(112)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

This  choice  must  first  be  taken.  You  will  have 
no  home  next  year.  Avoid  foul-mouthed  youth,  but 
may  thy  choice  be  nice  boys.  Who  abused  him  so 
foully?  New  spice  is  necessary  for  the  best  pies.  At 
what  time  should  I  come?  Be  up  and  awake  while 
the  day  is  young.  I  will  ride  whenever  and  wherever 
you  desire.  Avoid  resigning  yourself  to  his  power. 
Your  wine  would  be  well  enough  if  you  were  willing 
to  do  what  was  right  with  it.  A  reward  will  be  paid 
for  all  work  well  done.  Where  we  are  aware  of  a 
mistake  your  words  won't  be  worth  much.  Too  many 
are  annoyed  by  this  noise.  A  moist  season  makes  the 
rye  look  well.  Soon  he  will  come  witli  them  or  with 
you.  If  you  wish  you  may  come  now.  I  will  do 
whatever  (what  -j-  ever)  you  advise  me  to  do. 


54  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP  V. 

*  You  must  wake  early  and  leave  for  Watson, 
where  your  son  awaits  you.  The  Swede  swore  he 
would  switch  the  boy  who  stole  his  money.  As  he 
was  walking  on  the  beach  a  big  wave  wet  his  shoes. 

SUGGESTION  AND  COMMENT: 

The  student  should  read  shorthand  aloud  as  a  daily 
exercise.  The  reading  of  English  in  the  common 
schools  is  a  matter  of  regular  practice,  in  order  tluit 
facility  may  be  gained  in  the  management  of  pro- 
nunciation, inflection,  and  all  that  pertains  to  good 
elocution. 

Not  less  should  shorthand  be  read,  but  for  the  dif- 
ferent purpose  of  training  the  eye  to  a  quick  recogni- 
tion of  the  forms.  If  such  reading  is  aloud,  the 
critical  student  will  not  be  satisfied  with  a  halting, 
garbled  version  of  his  notes,  but  strive  for  a  fluent 
and  accurate  rendering,  and  so  acquire  perfect  fa- 
miliarity with  the  characters. 

There  is  no  reason  why  shorthand  slowly  written 
should  not  be  as  legible  as  print;  and  it  will  be  if  thr 
writer  executes  proper  outlines,  and  learns  to  know 
them  at  sight. 

The  zigzag  mark  thus  far  employed  for  the  under- 
score may  be  considered  the  m-dash  of  stenography. 
It  may  usurp  the  office  of  the  dash  (or  hyphen)  when 
written  between  characters,  or  it  may  serve  for  the 
parentheses  when  made  to  enclose  phrases.  Placed 
beneath  an  outline,  it  may  indicate  a  desire  for  em- 
phasis or  call  particular  attention  to  a  new  or 'technical 
word  in  unfamiliar  matter. 

*The  starred  sentences  are  quoted,  Avith  permission, 
from  ANDREW'S  GUADED  SENTENCE  BOOK,  published  by  H..L. 
Andrews,  Pittsburg,  Pa.;  and  while  acknowledging  the  obli- 
gation, we  warmly  recommend  the  student  of  shorthand  to 
procure  the  book  for  study  auxiliary  to  any  system. 


STEP   V.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  55 

(113)      READING  EXERCISE: 

(After  reading  the  follow  ing  sentences  enough  to  become 
thoroughly  familiar  with  every  character,  copy  the  outlines 
at  least  Jive  times  for  practice  in  shorthand  penmanship. 
See  Step  VI.  for  the  new  stroke  which  begins  the  second 
sentence.) 


^ 


L 


J 


_L    i  i  i  c 


) 


c  r  ^  0 


?..... A. ...V <^> LTT-. 


\  (  r  ILL 


I  (  >  ^  .  J 


REVIEW  QUESTION— STEP  V.: 
What  is  a  diphthong?  How  many  are  there?  What  posi- 
tions do  they  take?  Which  are  first  position?  Which  third? 
Is  there  a  diphthong  sound  in  the  words  ml  turf.  >nitnn\ 
lin-ratnre.S  Are  diphthongs  ever  joined  to  strokes?  Name 
the  diphthong  word-signs.  Do  the  appendages  of  recic  and 
now  appear  to  be  parts  of  the  diphthong  signs? 

What  is  a  tick?  How  long  is  a  tick?  Are  ticks  ever 
shaded?  Is  the  direction  of  the  ticks  for  he,  the,  a,  an  and 
and  important?  Is  it  convenient  to  attach  a  tick  to  a  stroke 
beginning  with  the  St-loop?  Is  the  tick  joined  always  to 
the  following  outline?  What  governs  this?  Name  a  tick 
word-sign.  Is  the  tick  word-sign  ever  shaded?  Name  the 
shaded  ones.  Why  are  some  placed  above  the  line?  How 
can  the  same  tick  stand  for  both  he  and  thi'S  An  and  mxl? 
Are  outlines  of  different  parts  of  speech  likely  to  conflict? 
(They  are  not.)  Mention  a  few  such  cases  already  pre- 
sented. (You  and  your,  him  and  am,  ye  and  year.)  What 
direction  does  the  the-tick  take  with  reference  to  the  line? 
Does  the  direction  of  a  stem  influence  the  direction  of  the 
tick?  What  is  the  direction  of  the  and- tick?  Why  is 
an  option  given  of  two  directions?  Do  angles  have  any 
bearing?  Are  angles  important  in  shorthand?  Why  is 
legibility  enhanced  by  proper  angles?  Which  is  the  best 
angle?  Which  the  worst?  Are  forward  strokes  desirable? 
Which  the  better,  a  quick  angle  or  a  forward  stroke? 
Illustrate,  a  bad  angle.  What  direction  are  on  and  should 
written?  Of,  to,  but,  who,  ought?  Why  are  who  and  umjht 
written  downward?  Name  a  few  tick  phrases. 

What  is  position?  How  many  notions  of  position  pre- 
vail in  shorthand?  What  is  the  first  notion  of  it?  What  the 
second?  Are  they  allied?  What  illustrates  the  first  idea? 
What  the  second? 

What  is  a  group  word-sign?  Give  an  example.  How 
many  in  a  group?  Which  word  takes  the  position  on  the 
line  generally?  What  is  third  position?  Do  the  vowels 
fix  the  position  of  all  these  word-signs?  What  are  the  signs 
and  positions  of  the  words  issue,  a//""',  liftlf.'  Are  the  word- 
signs  more  readily  learned  in  groups? 


STO1>   VI.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  57 

STEP  VI. 

(114)     ADDITIONAL  CONSONANTS: 


Sound 
Sign.          Name. 

Conventional 
Name.                 Power  and  Use 

^            ^ 
fe          /           Sub 

Es            S  in  Es-py   Pi-ous 

£ 
\ 

/....       Znb 

Zc           Z  "  Zc-ro    Ra-7ee 

P 

3         ..7...      Wuh 

Way       W  "  Way,    Sway, 

West 

ja 

•c     f- 

^   V...         Yuh 

Yav         Y  "  Yea.      Yost. 

Y  ab  or 

These  strokes  are  rarely  used  except  initially  and 
finally. 

(115)  Syllables.     The  appearance  of  the  vowel 
leads  to  the  first  notion  of  syllabic  representation  in 
shorthand   writing,   because   a  vowel  is   the    simplest 
form  of  the  syllable.     A  single  consonant  cannot  be  a 
syllable,  and  the  more  common  syllables  consist  of  a 
vowel  and  a  consonant. 

(116)  Syllabic    treatment    of    word    outlines    is 
greatly  conductive  to  legibility.     One  reason  for  this 
is  that  the  habit  is  early  formed  to" look  upon  words  as 
combinations  of  syllables ;    and  if  the  shorthand  out- 
line can  be  made  to  imitate  this  structural  feature,  the 
eye  comprehends  the  meaning  of  the  form  thus  graphi- 
cally pictured. 

(117)  GENERAL     RULE.       "When     con- 
sidering the  outline  for  a  word,  write  a.  stroke 
for  a  syllable,  as  far  as  may  be  possible.     This 
is  the  principle  underlying  the  word  forms  and 
writing  procedure  of  this  manual. 


58  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STK1>    VI. 

(118)  The  need  of  a  stroke  form  for  S,  Z,  wuh 
and  yuh  is  incidental  to  syllabic  outline  formation, 
and  its  use  produces  the  variety  of  outline  needed  to 
prevent  conflict  of  words. 

(119)     RULE  FOR  STROKE-S: 

Employ  the  stroke-S,  i.  e.)>  when  S  is  the 
only  consonant  sound  in  an  initial  or  final 
syllable.  Stroke-S  might  appropriately  be  termed 
Syllabic-S. 

es-sence    sense       sci-on       sign          ra-cy     race      Cy-rus     sire* 

<^     L  <^ 


(120)  The  circle-S  (°)  is  used  in  all  other  situa- 
tions.    It  is  seldom  found  necessary  to  employ  the 
stroke-S  medially ;  and,  besides,  the  circle  is  the  more 
fluent  hinge  (so  to  speak)  at  the  junction  of  strokes. 

(121)  The  above  rule  is  of  almost  universal  appli- 
cation.     The  rare  occasions  for  a   slightly  different 
application  of  it  are     (1)    when  another  S  occurs  in 
the  same   syllable    (because    the  appendage  ses  does 
not  furnish  the  vowel  implication  needed),   and   (2) 
a  few  cases  where  a  distinguishable  outline  is  needed. 
For  example :  — 

cease    assess  (whispers)  size    sizes  (voice)  ask         sack      asp    sap 

J    .}      1  0      1. 


Hereafter  circle-S  will  be  termed  S  simply,  and  the 
alternate  form  stroke-S. 


STKP   VI.]  PUACTICAI,    SHORTHAND  ,-)!) 

(122)     RULE  FOR  STROKE-Z  : 

The  stroke  form  is  always  used  when  Z  is 
the  first  sound  in  a  word;  in  all  other  cases  it 
follows  the  rule  of  Section  ng. 

zeal       Zanzibar    zone    zest         zero       rosy        mazy    asthma 

b  ) 


(123)    RULE  FOR  STROKES  WUH  AND  YIJH  : 

The  stroke  forms  are  employed  when  wuh 
or  yuh  is  the  only*  consonant  sound  in  a  syl- 
lable, except  that  S  and  its  loop  modifications 
may  be  included  in  the  same  syllabic  stroke. 

way      yea      wary  payee  ways     sway        yeast  west    "Wooster 

>    f   V\-    Tr  °\  _£_!_>_ 


(124)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

Waste  ceases  Essex  society  over  Stacy 
science  Siam  secede  seance  zig-zag  Sophia 
assist  seditious  Swazey  noisy  Zerah  assister 
Swansea  hazy  osage  serene  fussy  Worcester 
saurian  serious  pussy  posy  Assyrian  (es-ruh-n) 
sofa  Sepoy  sedate  estimate  escape  espouse 
Savoy  estate  esteem  series  esquire  sorrows 
pursue  ensue  Yerxa  saucy  Wiswell  Pickwick 
Orwell  see-saw  solo  Xenia 

READ  BLACKBOARD  SENTENCES  No.  4. 

*  It  is  interesting  to  note  the  similarity  of  treatment  of 
the  two  forms  of  S  and  the  two  forms  of  wuh  and  ynh. 


GO  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   VI. 

(125)     READING  EXP:RC1SE: 


Plurals  of  words  ending  with    stroke-  S    generally 
finish  with  the  circle-S,  as  policies,  f<(U<i<-ifx. 


(126)     THE  ASPIRATE—  HUH: 

It  has  been  remarked  that  huh  could  be  omitted 
from  words  like  ^cheel,  whim,  whiff,  without  mate- 
rially affecting  legibility.  The  syllabic  use  of  wuh 
suggests  other  words  of  the  same  class,  the  outlines 
of  which  need  not  contain  huh,  though  there  may  be 
strong  aspiration.  We  refer  to  words  like 

why       whiz      whey     whoa        whisk          whist       whistle 

^     V 


It  may  not  be  commonly  noted  that 

<//,  etc.,  if  spelled  by  sound,  appear  as  hwcn,  lin-(>r<>. 
and  the  theoretic  rendering  furnished  for  this 
situation  is  an  H-tick  prefixed  to  «•»,  wr  and  »•//// 
respectively. 

This  is  well  enough,  so  far  as  theory  goes,  but  in 
this  method  we  have  ample  use  for  the  tick  in  another 
direction  ;  therefore  treatment  like  that  presented  in 
the  next  section  is  made  to  prevail. 


STK1'    VI.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  Gl 

(127)      HUH  GENERALLY  OMITTED: 

Though  frequent  in  spelling,  H  is  obscure  in 
sound,  and  may  often  be  omitted  without  danger  to 
legibility.  When  necessary  use  the  stroke- H,  con- 
sidering it  merely  in  the  light  of  a  word  identifier  in 
special  cases ;  as,  for  instance, 


is  hat,  because                     ___]____ would  be  at 
is  hitch,  because  would  be  each 


hate,  because  |        would  be  it 

hood,  because  I        would  be  hud 


(128)  But  stroke-H  does  not  join  favorably  to 
muh  and  ur,  so  an  oblique  tick  is  recommended  for 
this  situation ;  jjs 

hem  hammer          horse      mohair    humane    Hammond 


At  the  same  time  proficient  writers  stand  in  no  urgent 
need  of  this  device,  and  receive  ample  assistance  from 
position   or   the    context   to    freely  read  unaspirated . 
outlines. 

(129)  When  huh  is  preceded  by  another  character, 
oftentimes  its  hooked  beginning  is  imperfectly  formed. 
This  is  no  blemish  ;  merely  the  result  of  fluent  writing. 
Note  the  following  :  — 


62  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP   VI. 

(130)     Stroke-H  may  be  omitted  from  the  outlines 
of  the  following  words  :  — 

Write :  Here  home  happy  hope  her  horse 
harm  help  white  height  health  had 
half  homely  history  halve  harmony 
humanity  hand  hamper  happen  harp 
whiskey  heart  whisper  whew  wheez<es 
heard  whence  whirl  whine  whimper 
whisker  whop  whale  whack  mishap 
whole  hour  adhere 

(131)     READING  EXERCISE: 


(132)     WORD-SIGNS— IV.  : 

./...     especial  r thank,     youth,    thousand 

L 


L 


ask 

essential  ....?—*..  together 

into  influence 

.unto  * suggestion 


Sll'.l'    VI.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  63 

It  is  a  wise  plan  to  have  a  sort  of  ' '  knowledge 
book,"  wherein  to  copy  word-signs  and  all  valuable 
hints  received  regarding  shorthand.  Have  the  book 
small  enough  to  be  easily  carried  in  the  pocket,  and 
refer  to  it  at  odd  moments. 


(133)     FURTHER  PHRASES: 

I                                                        J     V 

...(1....V..   vou-wlll-have     ...                nr  ,,„ 

V....  we-have 

c 

p       .  would-have              \?         to  us 

WC-Wlll 

with-rnc                   vo        for  us 

)                c 

-*/         we-sliall 

TT>...   with-him             in-his 

-t                   I 

..\>..  iii-this                       \           we-thinl 

Note  how  ws  and  7«'s  are  represented  above. 
Write  only  the  phrases  given,  and  positively  no  other. 
rhrasing  is  often  desirable,  although  not  absolutely 
essential.  Many  good  writers  do  not  phrase  at  all. 
It  is  a  development  of  the  subject  which  may  or  may 
not  be  followed. 

(134)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

When  writing,  always  reason  out  the  full  outline  before 
putting  pen  to  paper ;  but  having  decided  what  the  strokes 
are  to  be,  then  write  them  without  a  pause.  A  tick  prefixed 
or  affixed  is  a  part  of  the  full  form ;  do  not  go  back  to 
"  touch  up  "  characters,  or  to  attach  ticks. 

We  will  give  thanks  unto  Him.  Cease  this  un- 
necessary waste.  Society  has  this  season  for  exercise. 


64  INSTRUCTION   IN  '  [STEP   VI. 

Hei:  essay  showed  special  thought  and  was  essentially 
wise.  Life  to  us  is  especially  rich  in  hope.  Celina 
was  "  scienced  "  in  the  choicest  ideas  of  stenography. 
The  Sepoy  was  accused  because  he  was  first  in  the 
uprising.  The  astute  owl  allows  no  mouse  to  escape. 
We  are  happy  because  we  know  how  many  will  come 
from  Essex.  We  shall  use  Worcester  sauce  next 
season.  He  says  "  Ahem  !  "  when  he  has  the  asthma. 
Lucy  lies  in  a  hammock  on  the  piazza.  He  hitched 
his  horse  beside  the  hedge  and  headed  for  home.  Be- 
cause of  seditious  schemes  his  influence  was  wasted. 
Salome,  the  physicist,  knew  how  to  make  essences  out 
of  herbs.  We  must  have  silence  in  the  game  of  Whist. 
We  shall  be  especially  influenced  by  your  advice.  The 
deceased  is  said  to  have  caught  the  disease  in  New 
Zealand.  If  you  will  espouse  this  cause  now  I  shall  be 
especially  happy.  The  sausages  were  sizzling  in  a 
saucer  on  the  stove. 

(135)     READING  EXERCISE: 

L^VlLJ 


ii 


t 


STEP   VI.]  .  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  65 


(136)     REMARKS: 

The  sentences  herein  given  are  not  remarkable  for 
their  coherency  or  wisdom.  They  are  presented  simply 
to  illustrate  certain  phases  of  word  structure  —  certain 
pronounced  sound  situations  —  and  intended  to  im- 
press the  rules  and  principles  so  strongly  that  the  stu- 
dent will  be  led  to  ever  after  recognize  the  situations, 
and  be  able  to  apply  the  right  procedure. 

To  the  shorthand  writer  words  are  the  compounds 
of  syllables,  and  syllables  expressive  of  situations  for 
which  stenographic  principles  are  devised  ;  and  whether 
it  be  this  or  that  of  the  principles  which  have  been,  or 
are  to  be,  introduced,  it  is  for  the  student  to  appre- 
ciate the  situation,  know  that  there  is  certain  treatment 
to  appertain,  apply  the  same  quickly  —  and  the  deed 
is  done ! 

(NoTB  — As  allied  to  the  study  of  Syllabic-S,  See  Vowel 
Implication,  p.  2G9). 


66-  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP    VI. 


>    REVIEW  QUESTIONS,   STEP  VI.: 

How  many  new  signs  appear  in  this  step?  What  are 
they?  When  used?  Why  not  introduced  before?  (Because 
they  have  such  limited  and  special  use.)  Do  these  complete 
the  exhibit  of  primary  shorthand  material?  (They  do.; 
Could  these  strokes  be  called  syllabic:  .s,  z,  ni  or  >j'f  (Yes.) 
What  is  the  syllable  in  word  structure?  What  is  the  rule 
for  dividing  a  word  into  syllables?  How  does  a  dictionary 
indicate  the  syllables?  "What  is  the  general  rule  for  syllabic 
shorthand  writing?  What  is  the  advantage  of  syllabic 
treatment? 

When  is  stroke-S  used?  Is  it  used  for  medial  syllables? 
Name  three  words  for  which  it  is  proper  to  use  stroke-S  or 
Z.  What  would  these  outlines  stand  for  if  S  was  used? 
Does  the  rule  apply  when  another  sound  of  S  is  included  in 
the  same  syllabic  stroke?  Give  a  few  instances.  (See  Sect. 
121.)  What  is  the  rule  for  stroke-W  or  Y?  Do  they  essen- 
tially follow  the  same  rule  as  stroke-S?  Then  the  two  forms 
for  W,  Y  and  S  are  practically  for  the  same  reason? 

Would  you  employ  the  stroke-S  for  the  termination  -ism* 
How  would  that  syllable  be  represented?  How  would  ccdac 
and  ceased  be  written?  And  by  analogy  what  would  be  a 
way  to  write  the  syllable  cist?  Yet  how  would  resist  and 
possessed  be  written?  Why  this  variation? 

Why  is  ask  a  word-sign?  Why  into  and  nnt»>  Is  it  not 
because  they  are  departures  from  suggestions  already  given? 
Should  beginners  phrase?  How  much?  Do  all  writers 
phrase?  To  what  extent  is  it  safe? 

When  can  huh  be  omitted?  Name  two  wuh-words  that 
have  a  sound  of  huh  not  indicated.  How  are  home,  /m/v'.v- 
her  and  the  like  written?  What  is  stroke-H  ever  used  for? 
When  is  Z  always  employed?  In  other  situations  what  rule 
is  followed?  How  is  H  represented  before  muh  and  ur? 
Why  is  this?  What  are  stenographic  principles  apparently 
devised  for?  What  should,  be  the  endeavor  of  the  student  in 
shorthand  study? 


STK11    VII. J  PRACTICAL    SIIOUTHAM).  67 

STEP  VII. 

UPWARD  AND  DOWNWARD  RANDL: 

(137)  Reference  to  the  scheme  of  consonant  signs 
will  show  two  strokes  for  each  R  and  L.     These  have 
important  application  in  syllabic  writing,  because  their 
direction    is    dependent    upon    the    adjacent    vowel. 
They  also  present  an  early  step  in   the  discarding  of 
vowels ;   although  at  this  stage  the  student  need  only 
take  cognizance  of   the  syllabic   tendency  of  the  two 
forms  for  R  and  L,   and  endeavor  to  understand  and 
apply  them  before  proceeding  further. 

(138)  Rule :  Upward-R  (Rtth)    ..&.....      is    used 
for  the  sound  of   R  when  it  is  followed  by  a  vowel 
sound  in  the  same  syllable ;   and  always  after  M. 

<V 

Downward-R  (uR)    /..-    is  used  for  the  sound  of 

R  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  vowel  sound  ;   and  always 
before  M. 

(139)  Rule  :  IIpward-L  (Luh)    *..L .'.....      is    used 
for  the  sound  of  L  when  it  is  followed  by    a   vowel 
sound,  and   in  monosyllabic  words   after  S,  as  sa/e, 
Stud. 

,•-/- 
Downward-L  (uL)    M ,...     is  used  for  the    sound 

of  L  when   it  is  jnweded  by  a  vowel  sound ;   but  it 
is  never  written  alone. 


See  also  positives  and  negatives  contrasted  in  Step  XVI. 


68  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   VII. 

(140)     EXAMPLES: 

wreck    ark  rear       array  limb         elm         chair  chary 


lasso       also  fall     follow  Lowell     ally         lower    early 

i 


l  (X  Cr     f\  V 


Cl 


error         Rarus       fear      fury          rain          earn          pill   pillow 


4^-^ 


Cicero  Caesar        jewel  July         leeway  alway       failure    follower 


°\     1.  1-     try  \     i 

o 


(141)     EXCEPTIONS: 

The  foregoing  is  a  clear  rendering  of  a  syllabic 
situation  for  the  advantage  of  beginners*  in  writing 
and  reading  legible  shorthand.  The  following  excep- 
tions in  favor  of  a  mechanical  facility  of  execution  are 
for  all  practical  writing  :  — 

Always  write  upward-R  before          Always  write  upward-L  before 

I  <     !.,(  __  i\_ 


"This  distinction  between  upward  and  downward  L  and 
R  should  be  justified,  in  the  estimation  of  the  student,,  if  it 
did  nothing  more  than  distinguish  the  frequent  final  syllables 
-ry  and  -ly  from-er,  -or  and  -al. 


STEP   VII.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  G9 

POOK  ANGLE 
earth    arch    urge          room  summer       elves       help     health 


7  7  7 


GOOD  ANGLE 


X   ^J  /I  V.  <r>^.__,(\^\j7_ 

(142)  in  words  like  mellow,  valley,  Rollo,  the 
student  is  sometimes  in  doubt  whether  to  write  down- 
ward or  upward  L,  or  both.  The  practice  is  to  make 
the  strokes  correspond  to  the  number  of  syllables,  and 
select  the  L  which  will  best  show  this  without  vowel 
assistance,  namely,  the  upward. 

follow      swallow  gulley  hallow       Shelley     bellow 

°V 


(143)  In  shorthand  writing  double  letters  are 
commonly  considered  as  having  but  one  sound ;  but 
for  some  words  a  syllabic  structure  must  be  given  to 
the  outline  to  distinguish  them  from  words  containing 
the  same  sounds,  but  fewer  syllables.  This  treatment 
greatly  assists  legibility  when  vowels  are  discarded. 

annoy      Emma  abbey   allay      innocence     essay  Effle   arrow 

JA 

(144)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

Bear  ball  pair  fall  ring  rake  ark  rug 
argue  coal  halo  elbow  Lora  Aurora  narrow 
orb  veal  shawl  lily  reveal  layer  Alma  lazy 


70 


INSTRUCTION  IN' 


[STEP  VH. 


loathe     reach    lazily    arch     purity    apology  foliage 

arrester      melody      raised      sorrow      oars  sources 

Cicily       outlaw       wry       Howell        scissors  Silas 
beware      Rowena       yellow       bewail       Cyrus       rely 

chill     ullage     lesson    hurl    Russell    alchemy  alumni 

barrier*       superior      career      Laura      dual  fellow 

royal     oral     wearily     avail  '  layer      polish  whitish 

Allegheny     sherry      Ellery     ivory      Illinois  dahlia 
Ophelia     colossal     parallel     usury 

(145)     READING   EXERCISE: 


>-<  CV   "w- W^vxC<  V  \^- ? 

^  ^  7.  .-.^    ^_ 


-C\ 


*  In  advanced  writing  words  which  theoretically  end  in 
ruh-ur  appear  as  follows,  because  a  more  fluent  rendering :  — 


barrier       rare  inferior 


carrier          interior 


STEP   VII.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  71 

(14G)     CON,  COM   and  COG: 

These  common  prefixes  are  denoted  by  a  dot  applied 
like  a  vowel  sign,  only  at  the  very  beginning  of  the 
outline.  This  pretix-dot  is  applied  after  the  consonant 
ptirt  of  the  outline  has  been  written.  This  in  imita- 
tion of  the  vowel,  because  it  may  be  likewise  dis- 
carded ;  iii  fact,  proficient  writers  often  omit  the  dot 
for  con,  com  or  cog,  or  denote  in  some  other  way. 

commit     connect     cognate     commence    communicate  cog-wheel  (?) 

•j  —  '—\  <v_x|  V-S^7~1  /^~ 

_  L.  __  I  *   I  'sip  |  .6 

(147)  A  common  error  in  writing  words  like  com- 
municate, commend,  connect,  is  to  consider  the  double 
letters  (mm  mi)  as  two  sounds.  The  better  way  is 
to  divide  the  words  comm-unicate,  comm-ence,  conn-ect, 
employing  the  prefix-dot  for  the  comm,  or  conn. 

(14<S)  Con,  com  or  cog  within  a  word  is  denoted 
by  disjoining,  as 

re-cog-nize    ac-com-pany    dis-comm-ode    re-con-cile     ac-commo-date 

t     .4- 


is  makes  convenient  disposition  of  the  com- 
pound prefix  syllables  decom,  discon,  incon,  incog, 
irwoH,  mixron,  noncon,  recon,  recom,  recog,  uncom, 
inrecon,  unrecog,  etc. 

(149)  Tlie  iillix  ing  is  denoted  by  a  dot  at  the  end 
of  the  outline,  if  the  stroke  ing  will  not  make  a  good 
angular  joining,  as 

do-ing  hop-  ing  be-ing  think-ing      eating 

I          _\  .......  A_.      ....(.     JL 


72  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP  VII. 

(150)  The  plural  ings  is  denoted  by  a  disjoined 
circle-S  at  the  end  of  an  outline,  when  the  stroke  ings 
is  not  convenient,  as 

doings     beings          etchings    pickings    leavings 

____  I         \          /       V_ 

o  ~—  0—  —       --  0  - 

(151)  The  phrases  wg-the  and  ing-and  are  indi- 
cated by  the  disjoined  *  tick,  as 

having-the    making-the    fixing-the  looking-and  taking-a     doing-a 


(152)     WRITINGS-   EXERCISE: 

Compel  conceal  consist  conciliate  congeal 
conjugate  concensus  convene  convivial  convulse 
discontent  decompose  convey  inconsistent  com- 
pile irreconciled  incognito  misconceive  noncom- 
mittal recognize  unconscious 

Confess  lacings  convey  console  committee 
conduce  confused  conceit  commiserate  con  jury 
casings  consume  musings 

Jerry  was  eating  and  talking  and  looking,  all  at 
the  same  time.  Having  a  good  influence.  A  con- 
cealer of  stolen  goods.  The  composer  of  "  lolanthe." 
He  was  fixing  the  arm  of  the  chair..  A  sealer  of 
weights  and  measures. 

The  conjuror  confessed  his  power  to  be  of  no  effect. 
Choosing  the  right  is  always  making  the  best  choice. 
We  knew  the  commodore  had  reached  the  vessel. 


*  By  analogy  the  phrase  forms  the-con,  Jic-c»ii,  mid-con, 
a-com  might,  with  discretion,  be  indicated  as  follows  :  — 

the -committee       and-concede      a-company  he-commenced 

t        r       v 


STEP  VII. ]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  73 

(153)     READING   EXERCISE: 

t  T  L  (<>  -^  .c  s< 


i  ^_.  ^  ,  ^  V. 


(154)     HALF-LENGTH  WORD-SIGNS 

(halving  adds  T  or  D) : 
not  that  could  get 

1      ~  (  ^  _ 

READ  BLACKBOARD  EXHIBIT  NO.  5  : 

As  soon  as  the  student  can  write  sentences  with 
some  readiness  upon  the  typewriter,  it  is  a  pleasant 
task  to  prepare  alternate  lines  of  typewriting  and  short- 
hand, using  the  sentences  already  given  for  practice. 
Make  a  line  for  the  shorthand  with  the  hyphen  of  the 
writing  machine,  only  striking  it  very  lightly  lest  it 
puncture  and  rend  the  ribbon.  Submit  all  such  work 
to  the  teacher  for  correction,  adding  thereto  the  date 
and  the  name  of  the  writer. 


74  1NST1UVTION   IN  [STKP   VII.' 

(155)     GROUP    WORD-SIGNS— LIST  II.: 

•    >C>  own  J  ourself 

s    •"         me,  my  . — v 

^-^      him,  am  *         r'yself, 

'"  home  ....r^.^b  .    ln.ns.-lf 

^~b  homes 

thy  ^  ^ 

them,  they  >^  ^      thing 

though  ....T^r..^.  language 

^"^    long,  along 

ease-y  / 

was  If    advantage 

«se(v>  V'    large 

/  ^\        see,  saw 

/..Y  so,  say 

/    us,  use  (n) 

A  few  of  the  above  are  not  strictly  word-signs,  but 
they  complete  the  groups  of  three,  and  help  the 
memorizing  of  the  word-signs  proper. 

(156)     COMPOUND    FORMS : 
anywhere  .dTS—^.  something 

.Sn-v<^.  nowhere  \,.  anyway 

x  Q^ 4  « 

c/.V-..  wherever  \_.    whenever 

somewhere  ../S. forever 

anyone  S^,.  never 

no-one  ,..T^!-..  whensoever 

someone  .^^S-..  wheresoever 


anything  A. whosoever 

nothing  (no-thing)          ...</\..... whereby 


STKI'   VII.]  1'KACTICAL   SIIOHTHAND.  75 

(157)     WRITING    EXERCISE: 

Cicero  and  Ca'sar  had  special  fame.  Errors  of 
thought  justify  mistakes  of  judgment.  Allie  cast  his 
arrow  at  the  mark.  Eflie  and  Ella  never  hoped  for 
his  arrival.  Cyrus  asked  several  times  for  that  reward 
of  merit,  but  could  never  get  it.  Swear  not  at  all. 
Several  of  the  company's  sources  of  income  will  soon 
fail.  Whatever  is  worth  doing  at  all  is  worth  doing 
well.  These  things  are  so  common  we  do  not  notice 
them.  When  you  went  out  where  did  (half-length) 
you  go?  It  is  not  necessary  for  us  all  to  think  alike 
on  the  same  subject.  Anyway,  I  desire  you  to  come 
home  with  me  soon.  To  know  yourself,  is  commonly 
of  much  advantage.  Ayer's  Sarsaparilla  will  help  his 
health  if  used  in  small  doses. 

*  Will  you  resume  your  studies  in  this  room?  Saul 
became  the  Apostle  Paul.  The  poor  peasants  of 
Russia  fear  the  absolute  power  of  the  Czar.  The  two 
large  rear  oflices  in  City  Hall  are  occupied  by  Samuel 
Tlinyer,  the  miserly  mayor  of  Nowhere.  Tomorrow 
will  be  the  wedding  day  of  Mary  Murray,  who  is 
going  to  marry  Harry  Barrow.  .  Miss  Walsh  wore  a 
yellowish  shawl  to  the  social.  Elisha,  Elijah,  Elias 
and  Elihu  are  names  which  are  seldom  met  with  now. 

(158)     REABING   EXERCISE: 

V   '    ~  '    '  i__ 

i 


*  See  foot  note,  page  54. 


76 


INSTRUCTION   IN 
/•>                                                        \3 

S\                    c     n        S          s~tr 

[STEl'    VII. 

-  c  r 

&^  • 

v: 

^P 

S^OL-P       / o-x( <_ I 

' 


REVIEW   QUESTIONS,  STEP   VII.: 

Do  two  different  strokes  for  R  and  L  appear  to  be  neces- 
sary? Why?  Do  It  and  L  differ  from  the  majority  of 
consonant  sounds?  To  what  sreneric  group  of  sounds  do 
the}7  belong?  (Liquids.)  Is  their  treatment  in  Step  VII.  a 


STKP   VII.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  77 

syllabic  matter?  Would  one  R  or  one  L  indicate  the  syllables 
as  clearly?  Have  you  ever  tested  the  matter?  If  not,  try 
writing  the  words  in  Section  140,  using  one  form  of  K  or  L. 
Do  two  strokes  for  11  and  L  assist  legibility?  Do  they  imply 
the  vowel  if  it  happens  to  be  omitted?  Then  it  is  not  difficult 
to  read  such  outlines  without  the  vowel  signs?  Then,  too, 
it  can  be  made  a  step  toward  dropping  the  vowels  altogether? 
What  is  the  rule  for  upward-R?  Are  there  any  exceptions 
to  this  rule?  (See  Sect.  141.)  Do.  shorthand  rules  generally 
have  exceptions?  What  is  the  rule  for  downward-R?  For 
upward-L.  Did  you  note  any  exceptions  to  this?  Are  they 
"mechanical"  or  otherwise?  What  does  the  word  "me- 
chanical" stand  for  in  this  connection?  Give  the  rule  for 
downward-L.  Why  is  downward-R  always  Avritten  before 
//;></;?  And  upward-R  after?  Does  s-rnnh  generally  come 
under  the  same  limitation?  (Yes.)  How  would  warm  be 
written?  And  Quorum?  (Exceptions.) 

Why  is  upward-R  always  required  before  thuh,  dthuh, 
(•huh  and/wA?  Is  this  an  arbitrary  matter?  Then  it  must 
be  remembered?  Are  good  angles  important  enough  to 
demand  this?  Which  is  better,  a  bookish  rule  or  facile 
execution?  How  is  lith  written  when  alone?  How  after  S 
in  words  of  one  syllable? 

How  are  double  letters  indicated  in  shorthand?  Are  two 
strokes  sometimes  employed  in  such  a  case?  When  is  it 
necessary?  Give  three  words  requiring  upward-R.  Three 
for  downward-R.  Three  for  upward-L.  Three  for  down- 
ward-L. Is  there  much  need  of  indicating  the  vowels  in 
such  a  word? 

What  are  con,  com  and  cog?  How  are  they  denoted? 
What  is  a  common  error  in  this  connection?  How  denoted 
when  within  a  word?  Does  not  this  practically  cover  all 
compound  prefixes?  How  may  the,  a  and  and  be  denoted 
before  these  simple  prefixes?  Are  coy-wheel,  concomitant, 
fair  examples  for  the  use  of  the  prefix-dot? 

How  is  ing  represented?  The  plural  of  it?  Is  this  a 
logical  arrangement?  When  is  it  proper  to  use  stroke-ing 
for  the  affix?  How  are  iny-the,  ing-and,  etc.,  represented? 
How  are  outlines  treated  which  theoretically  end  in  rnlt-ur.J 

What  are  compound  outlines?  What  does  reducing  a 
stroke  to  half  length  mean?  What  does  it  add  besides  the 
sound  of  tuttS  Name  a  few  group  word-signs  from  List  II. 
Do  you  remember  all  the  word-signs  thus  far  presented? 
How  many  have  been  given?  What  has  Step  VII.  discussed? 


78  IXSTKUCTlO.N    IN  [STKI1    VIII. 


STEP  VIII. 

SIMPLE    STROKE    WORD-SIGNS: 

(159)  The  word-signs  thus  far  given  have  Iteen 
for  the  most  part  those  which  stand  for  the  common 
and  petty  words  of  language.  Before  leaving  Part  I., 
it  is  proper  to  introduce  another  list  of  acknowledged 
value,  and  thereby  widen  the  scope  of  our  writing. 
This  subject  is  given  considerable  prominence  in  this 
manual,  because  word-signs  are  of  such  importance 
in  practical  shorthand  writing.  The  need  for  abbre- 
viation permeates  the  full  scope  of  the  Pit  manic 
systems  of  shorthand,  simply  because  phonography 
in  its  theoretic  breadth  is  not  adapted  to  verbatim 
reporting.  The  word-sign  is  the  most  extraordinary 
example  of  abbreviation ;  and,  lest  the  intent  and 
meaning  be  obscured  in  the  abbreviating  process,  we 
counsel  the  learner  to  give  special  study  to  this  branch 
of  practical  shorthand  writing. 

The  lists  of  word-signs  which  follow  may  be  re- 
garded as  quite  long,  and  somewhat  dillicult  to  manage  ; 
but  such  is  not  entirely  the  case.  In  Part  III.  a  much 
fuller  list  will  be  presented,  and  one  wherein  the  signs 
exhibit  all  the  modifications  the  stroke  is  susceptible 
of  carrying.  So  far  as  learning  the  word-signs  is  con- 
cerned, that  is  somewhat  a  matter  of  practice.  To 
conquer  a  few  is  to  lay  a  foundation;  the  next  in- 
stallment becomes  more  easily  the  property  of  the 
student;  and  by  following  the  plan  herein  outlined,  of 
actually  using  the  signs  in  sentences,  and  absorbing  a 
few  at  a  time,  a  great  many  may  be  appropriated 
without  undue  effort. 


STK11    VIII.]  rilAGTICAL   SHORTHAND.  79 

(1GO)     MISCELLANEOUS   WORD-SIGNS: 

accept  <~>~—  ._  magnitude 


acknowledge 


almost 


although 


Massacliusetts 


mathematics 


nevertheless 


.....  L—    architect-ure 
<~~          t 


aristocrat-ic 


.^TT>..  .    assembl-e-y 
./ change 


.../.. charge 

~ commomveallh 


The  adjacent  lists  represent  word-signs  formed  of 
the  simple  stems,  with  but  very  little  modification. 
They  are  introduced,  not  to  display  the  scope  of  word- 
sign  manufacture,  but  to  encourage  a  mastery  of 
valuable  material.  Quick  writing  demands  a  more 
abbreviated  style  than  ordinarily  obtains,  and  the 
word-signs  are  abridged  forms  devised  to  more  easily 
accomplish  that  purpose.  Therefore  we  cannot  too 
strongly  urge  upon  the  student  the  importance  of 
familiarity  with  as  many  word-signs  as  it  may  be 
possible  to  acquire. 

READ  BLACKBOARD   EXHIBIT  NO.   6. 


80  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STK1»    \  III. 


L 


\ 




..  dignity  — ^         regular 

.  disadvantage  _<__A.___  represent-ed 

.  efficient  ^    V republ-ic-ish 

.  expect  ....<     \          reepect-ive-f  ul 


familiar                      — ^^=: —  San  Francisco 
February  P- satisfac-tion-tory 

V 

honest speak-er 

V.  ..infer  .>—£_ sufficient 

irregular  k-  ;.  testify 

...../....  knowledge  ••-»- United  States 

(1G1)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

God  save  the  Commonwealth  of  Massachusetts ! 
Whatever  way  you  go  you  are  commonly  influenced 
by  an  advantage.  The  judge's  charge  was  not  just  as 
represented.  In  all  thy  ways  acknowledge  Him, 
testifying  to  His  goodness.  He  will  allow  you  to 
come  if  you  will  be  subject  to  him.  It  is  necessary  to 
have  special  knowledge  of  some  things.  She  is  some- 
what changed,  and  getting  peculiar  in  her  ways.  We 
must  acknowledge  that  this  man  has  a  large  store  of 
knowledge  on  the  subject.  I  wish  you  could  speak 
the  language  satisfactorily.  You  wrill  be  always  wel- 
come at  my  home  in  San  Francisco.  Reasons  and 
causes,  whys  and  wherefores  are  in  all  things.  When 


STEP   VIII.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  81 

you  have  made  a  beginning  of  mathematics  that  is  not 
half  of  it.  We  will  go  to  New  York  to  see  him  if  he 
expects  us  to.  He  is  popular  because  he  is  honest. 
I  shall  speak  this  language  in  whatever  assembly  I 
may  be,  because  I  have  no  sufficient  knowledge  of 
anything  else.  I  infer  that  each  one  was  satisfied  he 
had  an  advantage.  In  the  February  tests  he  had 
architecture  for  his  special  subject.  It  was  the  last 
mistake  of  any  magnitude  he  ever  made.  He  was  too 
aristocratic  to  acknowledge  that  it  was  irregular.  It 
was  a  peculiar  subject  for  a  speaker  of  his  dignity  to 
select.  He  represented  the  United  States  with  dignity 
and  efficiency. 

(162)     READING   EXERCISE: 


££±... 


, ^        V  "  <-/  (  \  K  .  \  . 

vJ2 '  "A  ^  C 

^ ^=_LJL 

^^L±ZLr_JU 
-*  *  \_ 


82 


INSTRUCTION    IX 


[STEl1    VIII. 

r 


—    ~\      — —     — • • 


1 


0 


>  c    n.  L^...^...J <^    \  -x 


(163)     PRACTICE   MATERIAL: 

The  following  letter  should  be  written  at  the  nite 
of  sixty  words  (at  least)  a  minute  before  the  student 
enters  upon  the  study  of  Part  II. 
CYRUS  WILLIAMS. 

San  Francisco. 

Sir:  I  follow  your  suggestion  to  write  you  in  stenog- 
raphy, because  you  think  it  will  be  to  my  advantage  to 
become  especially  familiar  with  it.  I  acknowledge  that 


STKP    VIII.]  PRACTICAL    SIIORT1I  AM).  83 

writing  the  common  things  of  the  study  many  times  must 
be  highly  advantageous  to  anyone,  but,  nevertheless,  I  am 
well  aware  of  the  peculiarities  of  the  subject. 

•I  represented  this  to  the  youth  you  sent  me  in  February, 
and  while  accepting  him  I  saw  that  his  references  were  not 
to  his  advantage,  but  hoped  he  would  change  in  lapse  of 
time,  and  in  my  first  speech  with  him  charged  him  with 
much  advice  essential  to  his  success. 

Do  you  think  it  necessary  to  have  him  here  with  me  the 
whale  season?  I  was  almost  in  hopes  that  he  and  Thaddeus 
would  ^ct  on  well  together,  but  if  they  will  not,  I  shall  have 
one  of  them  go  with  the  representative  to  the  assembly  ; 
which  will  be  best  anyway,  because  if  they  are  not  in 
company  they  will  do  nothing  wrong.  The  representative 
referred  to  comes  from  one  of  the  most  aristocratic  com- 
monwealths of  the  Republic,  and  all  testify  to  his  dignity 
and  popularity  as  a  public  speaker;  so  his  influence  will  be 
satisfactory,  and  of  no  disadvantage  to  the  boy. 

I  acknowledge  that  the  young  fellow  does  his  work 
elliciently,  and  think  he  will  possess  sufficient  knowledge 
when  he  becomes  familiar  with  our  customs.  Although  he 
is  peculiar  in  some  respects,  he  is  thoroughly  honest,  and  I 
infer  that  he  will  now  do  right  wherever  he  goes.  When- 
ever I  refer  to  his  past  irregularity  he  acknowledges  the 
error,  and  says  he  is  sorry  for  it;  but  as  it  was  his  first 
mistake  I  have  excused  it,  and  Avill  use  my  best  influence  to 
make  him  regular  in  his  ways  and  especially  in  his  language 
for  all  time  to  come. 

As  I  am  going  away  soon,  I  shall  be  happy  to  acknowledge 
anything  you  may  do  for  him  in  my  absence;  and  if  he 
should  leave  while  I  am  away,  however,  whenever  and 
wherever  he  goes  he  will  have  my  best  wishes. 

Thanking  you  for  your  offices  in  his  behalf, 'I  am 
Yours  respectfully, 

(164)  SYLLABIC  SHORTHAND: 
Correct  syllabic  division  of  words  lies  near  the  root 
of  pronunciation.  It  is  the  strong  feature  of  the  dic- 
tionary to  the  learner  of  language ;  it  is  an  essential 
quality  of  word  utterance.  Shorthand  is  most  truly  a 
representation  of  spoken  language,  and,  therefore,  the 
syllabic  idea  plays  an  important  part  in  the  structure 
of  stenographic  forms. 


84  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKl1    \  111. 

Throughout  this  work  constant  reference  will  be 
made  to  the  syllable  as  the  unit  of  word  analysis,  and 
the  influence  the  syllables  have  upon  the  shorthand 
outline ;  and  in  order  to  become  well  grounded  in 
correct  procedure,  it  will  be  wise  for  the  learner  to 
make  earnest  effort  to  execute  syllabic  outlines. 

The  simple  rule  to  write  a  stroke  for  a  syllable  is 
not  difficult  to  follow,  after  a  clear  notion  is  had  of 
what  a  stroke  consists.  The  position  of  the  syllable 
should  likewise  be  understood  (see  Syllabic  Division 
of  Words,  Part  III,  or  a  standard  dictionary).  The 
linear  consonant  sign  and  its  appendages  constitute  the 
stroke^  and  it  can  commonly  be  made  to  contain  and 
picture  all  the  sounds  of  a  syllable.  There  are  occa- 
sional syllables,  the  sounds  of  which  cannot  be  con- 
densed into  one  stroke,  but  the  operation  of  the  rule 
is  so  general,  and  its  results  so  conducive  to  legibility, 
that  it  stands  out  strongly  as  the  prime  and  redeem- 
ing feature  of  practical  shorthand,  making  it  more 
nearly  a  graphic  representation  of  language. 

(165)     ANGLES: 

When  the  obtuse  angle  is  described  by  a  rapid  move- 
ment of,  the  pen,  it  is  likely  to  degenerate  into  a  curve. 
though  the  acute  angle  remains  unchanged  whel lid- 
written  slowly  or  fast.  Hence  it  is  that  in  shorthand 
writing  obtuse  angles  are  to  be  avoided  as  much  as 
possible,  and  right  angles  are  less  desirable  than  acute. 
The  latter  is  the  quick  angle  par  excellence ! 

When  an  option  is  granted  in  the  junction  of  strokes, 
the  quick  angle  should  be  selected  because  it  is  more 
conducive  to  legibility  even  when  shorthand  is  carelessly 
written.  We  would  admonish  the  learner  to  be  ex- 
ceedingly careful  in  this  matter,  and  having  in  mind 
the  value  of  good  angles,  exercise  judgment  in  all 


STEP    VIII.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  85 

joinings  of  strokes,  ticks,  or  any  shorthand  material. 
The  judgment  soon  becomes  trained  to  discern  the  pos- 
sibilities of  a  situation,  and  the  best  selection  will  be 
(jiiickly  made  of  many  available  angles  or  directions 
of  strokes.  Skill  in  this  comes  from  experience  and 
painstaking  from  the  .beginning  leads  to  that  profi- 
ciency wherein  the  wisest  procedure  is  almost  an  uncon- 
scious act. 

(106)     CONVENIENCE : 

Convenience  is  a  ruling  motive  in  shorthand  writ- 
ing. It  means  the  subjection  of  every  awkward  move- 
ment, and  every  untoward  circumstance.  Therefore 
the  student  must  not  be  surprised  if  occasional 
reference  be  made  to  convenience  as  an  explanation 
of  some  departure  from  rule  or  expectation.  The  pre- 
cepts of  theory  may  be  sometimes  ignored  and  its 
rules  violated,  if  fluent  form  and  ease  of  writing  can 
be  attained  by  other  procedure. 

Fluency  of  outline  depends  upon  these  favoring 
features :  a  cursive  direction  of  strokes,  and  good 
angles  at  points  of  junction.  Inasmuch  as  fast  writing 
is  best  fostered  by  these  qualities,  it  will  be  readily 
understood  that  almost  everything  which  relates  to  out- 
line formation  must  be  made  amenable  to  their  de- 
mands. Speed  of  writing  must  be  secured  at  any 
ha/ard,  and  it  can  only  be  insured  by  convenience 
or  fluency  of  movement.  On  the  other  hand,  legibility 
will  be  better  secured  if  syllabic  structure  is  main- 
tained concurrently  with  good  angles  and  forward 
strokes. 

The  student  should  pay  due  heed  to  the  established 
rules  of  his  shorthand  system,  and  have  proper  respect 
for,  and  confidence  in,  their  teachings ;  but  at  the 
same  time  he  should  remember  that  convenience  quite 
often  asserts  itself  superior  to  rules,  and  more  fluent 
shorthand  is  the  result. 


80  .     INSTRUCTION    IX  [STK1>    VIII. 

(1(!7)     CONCLUSION  OF  PART  I.: 

Part  II.,  which  follows,  will  be  characterized  by  the 
almost  entire  absence  of  vowel  signs.  This  will  be 
the  most  important  step  thus  far  to  be  taken,  but  it  is 
warranted  by  the  circumstances.  This  book  is  piv- 
eminently  a  practical  shorthand  teacher, — jinir/ /<•«/, 
in  the  sense  that  it  presents  a  style  of  shorthand  that 
can  be  written  rapidly,  and  shorthand  cannot  be  rapidly 
written  which  contains  disconnected  vowel  signs.  The 
latter  have  always  been  associated  with  the  so-called 
"  corresponding  style,"  which  has  no  style  or  place  in 
the  business  of  shorthand  writing.  On  the  otlu  r 
hand,  practical  is  the  adjective  applied  to  shorthai.d 
that  is  adapted  to  verbatim  reporting,  and  to  all  the 
requirements  of  such  writing  as  a  bread-winning  pro- 
fession. 

At  the  same  time  it  must  be  admitted  that  the  vowel 
is  the  great  word  identifier.  If  the  consonant  strokes 
properly  constitute  the  skeleton  of  a  word,  then  arc 
vowels  unmistakably  the  flesh  and  blood.  Therefore , 
it  would  be  impossible  to  leave  them  entirely  out  of 
consideration  ;  they  must  be  implied  in  some  way,  and 
vowel  implication  is  one  of  the  most  ingenious  and  in- 
teresting features  of  Pitmanic  shorthand. 

We  almost  hear  the  query:  Why  ever  learn  vowels, 
when  they  are  to  be  so  soon  discarded?  The  quick 
reply  is  :  They  must  be  learned  in  order  that  the  pro- 
gression to  vowel  implication  may  be  logically  made. 
Besides  which,  the  rare  insertion  of  the  vowel  sign 
may  be  demanded,  and  it  must  be  known  where  they 
should  be  even  if  they  are  not  seen. 


PART  II.  — Business   Shorthand. 


CLASS   WORK. 


88  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP  IX. 

(168)     PREFATORY    REMARKS : 

.  Shorthand  is  a  dry  subject  at  its  best;  and  the 
earlier  it  can  be  invested  with  agreeable  features,  the 
better  for  the  student.  The  aim  thus  far  has  been  to 
introduce  a  variety  of  work,  in  order  to  awaken  and 
maintain  interest — and  originality  is  claimed  for  this 
arrangement. 

In  a  "Plan  of  Instruction  in  Shorthand,"  published 
seven  years  ago,  the  idea  was  advanced  that  >'•/•/'//>/// 
and  reading  shorthand  in  sentences  and  paragraphs, 
suited  to  the  successive  stages  of  study,  should  take 
place  from  the  very  beginning.  The  value  of  this  was 
amply  demonstrated  in  actual  teaching ;  and  the  favor 
with  which  the  idea  was  received  is  best  illustrated  by 
the  eagerness  with  which  teachers  adopted  it,  and  by 
the  fact  that  the  more  recent  text-books  present  that 
plan  of  procedure. 

In  most  of  the  early  manuals  the  tedium  of  principle 
and  precept  is  hardly  relieved  in  the  primary  steps  by 
anything  more  exciting  than  the  writing  of  long  pro- 
cessions of  words,  words,  words.  This  cannot  fail  to 
be  dull  labor,  even  for  the  most  ambitious  inquirer, 
and  enthusiasm  soon  weakens  under  such  heroic  treat- 
ment. Therefore  we  cannot  help  believing  that  the 
difficulty  of  shorthand  has  not  been  so  much  a  bar  to 
its  progress  as  the  unmanageable  text-book.  The  live 
young  person  is  not  so  much  deterred  by  obstacles 
when  they  appear  in  reasonable  guise,  as  he  is  crushed 
by  difficulty  when  it  is  a  veritable  weight  of  woe. 

The  so-called  corresponding  style  (i.e.,  writing 
with  all  the  vowels)  has  gone  by.  The  transfer  of 
shorthand  writing  from  the  boudoir  to  the  business 
office  has  given  it  a  quietus.  The  extraordinary' 


STEP  IX.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  89 

demand  for  stenography  in  commercial  affairs  calls 
for  a  more  expeditious  way  —  and  Business  Shorthand 
is  the  response. 

The  sub-title  Class  Work  has  special  reference  to 
the  use  of  this  book  in  schools.*  Desk  work,  even 
with  most  persuasive  helps,  cannot  surpass  in  interest 
and  value  the  exercises  of  the  classroom,  with  their 
lectures  and  suggestions  by  the  teacher,  the  drawing 
forth  of  knowledge,  and  the  incentive  which  comes 
from  association  with  other  learners. 

As  this  work  progresses,  the  student  should  pay 
due  heed  to  the  many  details  which  compose  these 
Steps.  Let  him  be  common-sense  in  investigation, 
diligent  in  practice,  and  tangible  results  will  surely 
follow. 


*  We  are  of  the  opinion  that  the  best  results  from  short- 
hand study  can  be  gained  in  a  well-conducted  school.  Self- 
instruction  is  a  legend  which  beckons  to  devious  ways  and 
success  deferred. 

The  very  day  this  book  was  conceived  an  editorial  in  a 
leading  Boston  daily  said  :  "  It  is  a  notable  advance  in  in- 
dustrial education  to  have  shorthand  taught  in  all  the  pub- 
lic schools  of  Boston  from  this  time  onward  ....  It  will 
be  found  to  be  one  of  the  most  effective  methods  by  which 
the  accuracy  and  completeness  of  an  English  education  may 
be  tested  ....  Boston  is  simply  following  in  the  wake  of 
other  cities,  where  these  studies  (shorthand  and  typewriting) 
have  been  introduced  ;  and  nothing  could  have  been  added  to 
our  school  system  which  is  more  likely  to  be  popular  and 
to  make  less  encroachment  upon  valuable  time." 

Taking  the  cue  from  this  strong  expression  of  opinion, 
we  have  arranged  the  substance  of  this  manual  for  "  all 
schools  "  —  public  and  general,  as  well  as  commercial. 


90  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   IX. 

STEP   IX. 

INITIAL   HOOKS. 

(169)     COALKSCENT   L   AND    R: 

Certain  consonant  sounds  coalesce  (blend)  more  or 
less  freely,  and  become  the  expression  of  almost  a 
single  vocal  impulse.  Such  coalescents  already  noted 
have  been  st,  s/,  sw,  and  other  blendings  of  the 
appendage  S  (°)  with  other  consonants;  and  the  man- 
ner of  representing  the  same  has  been  illustrated. 

(170)  A  more  common  coalescence  is  that  of  L 
or  R  with  a  preceding  consonant.  L  and  R  are  called 
liquids  because  they  unite  so  readily  with  other  sounds  ; 
and  in  shorthand  this  blending  is  pictured  by  small 
initial  hooks. 

(171)     THE    L-HOOK: 

A  small  initial  hook  turned  on  the  right  side  of 
upright  strokes,  and  upon  the  upper  side  of  horizon- 
tals, stands  primarily  for  a  coalescent  sound  of  L,  :is 

PI  Bl  Kl  Gl  Fl 

K  \  C-  y_  g. 

in  plow,  blow,  clue.,  glue,  /fo/r  ;  though  for  the  sake  of 
securing  a  brief  outline  the  hook  is  made,  secondari'I;/, 
to  stand  for  sounds  not  coalescent,  as 

Tl        Dl      CHI      Jl       VI    THl    DTII1   SHI    ZSH1      Ml         XI         Rl 

r  r  A/'IC  Ccjo'^ 


in   words   like    tell,  c///7/,  j<nl,   rule,   shell,  k»ell,  etc. 


STK1>    IX.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  91 

The  foregoing  comprise  all  the    consonant    stems    to 
which  the  L-hook  may  be  attached. 

(17'2)  The  L-hook  is  an  appendage,  and  should  be 
read  next  after  its  stroke.  Although  written  first, 
when  a  stroke  is  executed  that  is  to  picture  a  word  or 
syllable,  the  order  of  reading  will  be  :  1st,  the  princi- 
pal stem,  '2d,  the  L  denoted  by  the  hook. 

(173)  The  L-hook  upon  TH  and  DTH  is  of  rare 
occurrence.  SII  and  ZSH  receive  the  L-hook  upon 
the  lower  end,  and  are  written  upward.  This  to  dis- 
tinguish from  final  N-hook,  which  will  be  described 
farther  on. 

facial  visual          racial  initial        bushel          casual 

I;     ^>    ^J     ^J    V  -J 


(174)  The  L-hook  upon  M,  N  and  R  is  written 
large,  to  distinguish  it  from  the  wuh  appendage,  simi- 
larly prefixed,  as 

camel          canal  barrel          knoll        final  ferule 


(175)  The  steins  S,  Z,  L,  ING,  W  and  Y  per- 
mit no  L-hook  attachment. 

(176)     THE   R-HOOK: 

A  small  initial  hook  turned  on  the  left  side  of 
uprights,  and  on  the  under  side  of  horizontals,  stands 
l>rini(i  ril;i  for  a  coalescent  R,  as 

Tr  Dr  Pr  Br  Kr         Or  Fr         THr 

1        1        *\      -\       -   —     ^      *) 

as  in  trtii/,  <lr<nr,  y»v///,  bmir,  <-rt»r,  <jr»n',  fray,  throw; 


92  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP  IX. 

though,  secondarily,  it  is  made  to  stand  for  uucoalescent : 

CHr         Jr  Vr         DTHr       SHr       ZSHr         Mr  Nr 

77     ^     ")    J     J    ^    <^ 

in  words  like  cheer,  jar,  over,  other,  sure,  azure,  humor, 
honor.  The  foregoing  comprise  all  the  stems  to  which 
the  R-hook  can  properly  be  attached. 

(177)  Inverted  Forms.      The  outlines  for  Fr, 
Vr,  THr  and  DTHr,  as  above,  will  attract  attention 
because  of  their  exceptional  form.     It  is  obvious  that 
to  turn  the  hook  upon  the  convex  side  of  the  curve 
would  be  impracticable  ;  therefore,  while  the  stems  last 
named  exhibit  the  L-hook  regularly,  they  have  to  be 
reversed  to  show  a  hook  at  the  left,  namely,  the  R- 
hook.     Only  F,  V,  TH  and  DTH  are  subject  to  this 
apparent  irregularity,  and  the  seeming  anomaly  occa- 
sions no  hardship  when  it  is  clearly  understood  that 
neither  uR,  Wuh,  S  or  Z,  which  the  inverted  F,  V, 
TH  and  DTH  resemble,  are  ever  modified  by  a  hook. 

Fr  Vr  THr  DTHr 

">  *>  0  1 

as  in  free,  very,  through,  there. 

(178)  M  and  N  are  shaded  when  modified  by  the 
R-hook,  to   distinguish   it   from   the  wuh   appendage 
similarly  applied,  as 

more  near  marshal      nourish         rumor          pioneer 

V- 


SIK1'    IX.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  93 

(179)     The  stems  S,  Z,  L,  R,  W,  Y,  H  and  ING 

have  no  H-hook  appendage. 

(180)     UNCOALESCENT    L    AND    R^ 

As  previously  stated,  the  L  and  R  hooks  primarily 
represent  sounds  that  unite  in  utterance  ;  but  in  practi- 
cal writing  the  scope  of  the  hook  may  be  widened  so 
as  to  embrace  words,  wherein  a  vowel  sound  obtrudes 
between,  the  consonant  and  the  L  or  R  denoted  by  the 
hook.  Such  outline  formation  is  allowable  when  no 
conflicts  can  occur,  it  being  a  resort  to  secure  fluent 
form.  Examples  :  — 

tell  full  term  sure         church         chill         chair 

r     Q.    u    j?     ;     r    ? 


(181)  In  cases  of  this  kind  where  there  might  be 
some  obscurity,  the  presence  of  the  vowel  may  be 
implied  by  cutting  a  tick  across  the  stroke  near  the 
hook.  It  is  not  often  necessary  to  indicate  the  exact 
vowel,  but  simply  that  some  vowel  is  strong  between 
the  consonant  and  the  L  or  R  sound  denoted  by  the 
hook,  as 

column  course        bill        terse     fulfill  bark  salty 

c^-s        ^        \         I        \         V_         fl" 

This  use  of  the  tick  may  be  adopted  to  show  any 
uncoalescent  sequence  of  sounds,  as  illustrated  by  the 
last  example  above  ;  but  the  need  for  it  will  be  rare. 

(l.s-2)  The  hook  is  not  necessarily  employed  at 
the  beginning  of  a  word,  but  has  equal  application  at 
the  beginning  of  syllables.  This  situation  sometimes 


94  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKI'    IX. 

gives  rise  to  a  faulty  junction  of  strokes,  or  it  is 
likely  to  in  rapid  writing.  A  symmetrical  hook  can- 
not always  be  executed  between  strokes,  because  such 
painstaking  would  be  a  clog  to  fluent  procedure.  In 
this  event  the  hook  can  be  only  partially  formed,  and 
what  is  termed  the  imperfect  hook  must  ensue.  The 
following  outlines  illustrate  the  improper  and  the 
proper  way  to  write  the  words  reply,  baker,  rewal, 
admire,  cable :  — 


Unnatural    and 

unallowable  hooks  : 


V-  ^-  U  ~\ 


Imperfect,  but  */\      \ 

:t  1 1<  i  u  M  I  il <•  hunks  •  \          * 


(183)     HOOKS    NOT   ALWAYS   USED: 

It  should  be  understood  that  the  hook  is  to  be  used 
with  judgment.  The  situations  of  word  structure 
have  to  be  expressed  in  shorthand,  and  the  various 
abbreviating  expedients  may  be  employed.  The  hook 
may  or  may  not  apply.  Nevertheless,  it  is  a  valuable 
auxiliary  in  the  representation  of  syllabic  outlines  ;  for 
it  is  apparent  that  such  appendages  make  possible  the 
carrying  out  of  the  rule,  a  stroke  for  a  syllable  ! 

But  the  hook  is  not  invariably  employed.  To 
illustrate  the  point,  two  examples  of  outline  formation 
will  be  given.  First,  the  stroke  is  used  in  words  like 
fail,  fall,  false,  pale,  fool,  deal,  tool  and  goal,  to  dis- 
tinguish them  from  the  hooked  forms  flay,  flaw,  flaws, 
play,fleic,  idle,  until,  glow.  Second,  in  order  to  indicate 
the  strong  sound  (trill)  of  r,  which  so  many  ignore 
in  pronunciation,  the  stroke  is  used  in  words  like  fur, 
fur,  fore,  farm,  firm,  etc. 

This  peculiar  situation  is  really  brought  about  l>y 
the  way  the  r  in  far  and  fur  modifies  the  sound  of  the 
preceding  vowel,  and  it  is  proper  to  refer  to  this  in 


STKI'    IX. J  1'KACTICAI.    SHORTHAND.  95 

tliis  Stt-p  (wherein  vowels  begin  to  be  discarded), 
because  by  expressing  the  r  strongly  *  the  adjacent 
vowel  is  implied,  and  vowel  implication  should  generally 
take  place  when  vowel  indication  ceases. 

(1.S4)  Note  particularly  that  the  L  and  R  hooks 
arc  always  initial ;  that  they  are  written  first, 
though  read  next  after  the  stem  to  which  they  are 
attached;  that  the  L-hook  on  M,  N  and  R  is  made 
large;  that  M  and  N  must  be  unmistakably  shaded 
to  admit  the  R-hook ;  that  SH  and  ZSH  have  the 
L-hook  at  the  lower  end,  and  are  invariably  written 
upward;  and  that  the  hook  is  an  appendage, 
having  no  vowel  position  or  implication. 

(is;,)     WRITING    EXERCISE: 

(.Omit  vowels,  and  write  every  word  on  the  line.) 

Take  make  shake  ache  sake  hake  How 
bless  joke  fray  grasses  pray  claim  cloak 
glow  frame  clay  press  flesh  railroad  Blake 
relic  peck  trace  coke  crush  owes  racial  haze 
baker  fuzz  able  sways  fakir  rope  inutile 
tusk  poker  casual  lake  local  thumb  nullify 
nervous  prose  oval  blaze  place  cluster  ochre 
u'laze  dress  maime  gloaming  nun  grace  shame 
trust  maize  wail  braces  save  gunwale  hate 
brazier  yoke  gray  hut  maker  swore  choker 
dozed  Heck  broker  well  sundry  glazier  basis 

(186)      READING    EXERCISE: 

These  words  all  have  second-place  vowels  in  the  accented 
syllable,  and  arc  therefore  written  upon  the  line,  accord  ills' 

*"  Strongly,"  because  the  stroke  obviously  expresses  a 
consonant  more  powerfully  than  an  appendage. 


96  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   IX. 

to  the  rule  for  Position  given  in  this  step.  The  order  of 
reading  is  —  first,  the  implied  vowel  (if  any)  before  the  con- 
sonant expressed  by  the  stem  ;  second,  the  consonant  ; 
third,  initial  hook,  if  any;  fourth,  vowel  after  consonant; 
fifth,  final  S,  if  any.  This  order  of  reading  applies  to 
single  syllables. 


(187)    OMISSION  OF  VOWELS  —  POSITION  : 

The  vowel  signs  should  be  made  to  disappear  at 
this  Step,  and  only  vowel  implication  remain.  This 
is  accomplished  by  position. 

(188)  Definition.     Word    position   is   the    term 
applied  to  the  attitude  of  an  outline  with  'respect  to 
the  line  of  writing  —  the  ruling  of  the  paper. 

(189)  There  are  three  positions  :  (1st)  above, 
(2d)  upon  and  (3d)  across  the  line.     The  third  posi- 
tion of  horizontal  strokes  is  just  beneath  the  line. 

(190)  A  word  outline  earns  its  position  by  reason 
of  its  accented  vowel,  which  explains  sufficiently  why 
vowel  indication  may  end  when  position  begins. 

(191)  Definition.       The    accented   vowel    is 
the  one  in  a  word  which  receives  the  greatest 


STK1'    IX.]  I'KAC'TICAI,    S1IOKTIIAND.  'J7 

stress  of  voice  in  pronunciation.  The  accented 
syllable  is  the  one  which  contains  such  a 
vowel. 

(192)  Rule.  An  outline  is  first,  second  or 
third  position,  according  as  its  accented  vowel 
is  first,  second  or  third  place,  as  previously, 
understood. 

(11)3)  With  the  vowels  fully  indicated,  an  outline 
is  readable  wherever  written  ;  but  the  moment  they  are 
discarded  the  word  will  incline  to  illegibility,  unless  it 
is  given  the  position  of  the  most  accented  vowel 
omitted.  Even  then  three  vowels  (or  possibly  a 
diphthong)  are  implied,  and  the  true  meaning  must  be 
in  a  measure  conjectured  from  a  knowledge  of  the 
context.  The  right  conclusion  will,  however,  be 
easily  reached  with  practice  in  reading. 

(194)     SHORTHAND    POSITION 
ILLUSTRATED : 

make          meek  make  mark  take  talk       take      took 


(195)      Rule.     The    three    positions    of    a    single 
vertical  stroke  are  :  — 

1.  The  entire  stroke  lifted  about  one-half  of 
its  height  above  the  line. 

2.  The  stroke  resting  upon  the  line. 

3.  The  stroke  "  cut  "  across  the  line. 

1st  Position  2d  Position  3d  Position 

i      O        r\       . 


98  INSTIIUCTION    IN  [STKl1    IX. 

(196)  The  three  positions  of  a  double-  stroke  out- 
line, if  one  part  vertical,  are  denoted  by  the  position 
of  the  vertical  stroke,  which  follows  the  above  rule. 
If  both  strokes  are  vertical,  the  first  takes  position. 

1st  Position  2d  Position  3d  Position 


(197)  The  three  positions  of  a  single  or  double- 
stroke  horizontal  outline  are  above,  upon  or  just 
beneath  the  line. 

1st  Position  2d  Position  3d  1'osition 


(198)  The  position  of  an  outline  containing  more 
than  two  strokes  is  no  more  or  less  than  the  position 
of  the  first  vertical  stroke,  the  accented  syllable  of 
the  word  deciding  what  position  that  stroke  shall 
occupy. 

1st  Position  2d  Position  3d  Position 


(Position  to  be  continued.) 

At  the  same  time  Step  VII.  should  not  be  forgotten, 
wherein  it  is  shown  that  the  vowel  can  be  implied  by 
the  direction  of  certain  consonant  strokes. 


n,\KER 

£R 
.TEXAS 

STKP    IX.]  PRACTICAL    SIIOllTIIAN'l).  99 

(l'J9)      ENLARGED  L  AND  R  HOOK: 

The  sound  of  R  can  be  added  to  an  L-hook  stroke 
by  enlarging  the  hook*;  and  the  sound  of  L  to  an 
R-hook  character  similarly.  The  first  is  called  ler, 
and  the  second  rel. 

blur     April     corporal        liberal         control     clergy          nostrils 

^     <\    -A      A      1      °7      ^l 

(-200)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

(I'lace  all  words  in  position.) 

Prize  fly  glue  please  blue  agree  bluster 
clew  analogy  author  rule  hither  oppress  grist 
1'io.st  precise  crisis  bloom  crack  bleach  flywheel 
broom  problem  brewery  drear  Greek  throng 
frozen  pupil  ripple  feeble  rumor  reel  former 
Ilallelt  tunnel  colonel  funnel  nickel  battle 
Helena  youthful  initial  solstitial  laughter  banner 
euamor  dinner  shark  paralyze  figure  lover 
qualify  procure  disclaim  marvelous  require  evil 
Mitchell  inquire  legal  heel  title  teacher  ladder 
oillcial  lodger  Thalberg  neuralgia  feathery  oblige 
swagger  philosophy  tremble  reclaim  depress 
worker  propose  flavor  overflow  orchestra  literal 
Buffalo  scholar  dabbler  portray  clapper  clearer 
astral  illiberal  blamcr  girl  thrush  gruel  tolerable 
trip  prime  settler  vulgar  pastoral  trial  liquor 
copper  orchestral  hallelujah  idler  sprawl 

*  The  enlsir«rin.n  of  the  hook  of  the  H-stroke  (suggested 
by  D.  L.  Scott-Brown)  to  add  L  in  the  same  syllable  with 
II,  seems  to  be  quite  in  analogy  with  the  above,  as 


100  INSTRUCTION    IN 

hill  eyebrow  muscular  cars  honor  sincerely 
thoroughly  contralto  chiefly  hydraulic  personally 
briefly 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS,  STEP  IX.: 

What  radical  departure  marks  the  beginning  of  Tart  II.? 
(The  omission  of  vowel  signs.)  What  is  the  "correspond- 
ing style"?  What  is  here  termed  business  shorthand?  II<>\v 
should  the  student  investigate  shorthand  principles?  Is 
diligent  practice  always  essential? 

What  are  coalescent  sounds?  Name  a  few.  Why  arc  I, 
and  11  called  Liquids?  How  is  the  blending  of  sound 
pictured  in  shorthand?  What  is  the  L-hook?  Is  it  an  initial 
or  final  hook?  What  does  it  stand  for  primarily?  What  is 
its  secondary  use?  Give  an  example  of  a  coalescent  sound 
of  L.  An  uncoalesceut.  Is  the  hook  read  before  or  after 
its  stem?  Why  is  this?  What  is  peculiar  about  the,  L-hook 
on  SH  and  ZSH?  How  is  this  hook  applied  to  M,  N  and  It? 
What  stems  permit  of  no  L-hook  attachment? 

What  is  the  It-hook?  Has  it  likewise  a  primary  and  sec- 
ondary application?  Name  a  few  words  illustrating  both 
phases.  What  stems  are  inverted  to  admit  the  It-hook?  Is 
this  productive  of  difficulty?  Would  it  not  be  really  more 
difficult  to  apply  the  hook  upon  the  outside  of  the  curve? 
What  law  would  such  a  shape  ottend?  Why  are  M  and  N 
shaded  to  take  the  R-hook?  What  stems  do  not  admit  the 
R-hook? 

Which  is  the  more  difficult  to  read,  a  coalescent  sound  in- 
dicated by  the  hook,  or  an  uncoalescent?  How  can  the  ex- 
istence of  the  vowel  be  denoted  in  an  uncoalescent  L  or 
R-hook  outline?  Is  the  hook  always  employed  wherever  L 
or  R  occurs?  Does  syllabic  division  have  anything  to  do 
with  it?  Do  the  hooks  assist  in  the  promotion  of  syllabic 
writing? 

What  is  an  imperfect  hook?  Is  the  less  labored  outline 
commonly  the  best?  What  is  position?  What  is  it  for? 
How  many  positions?  What  governs  position?  What  is 
the  accented  vowel?  The  accented  syllable?  Is  position  a 
perfect  substitute  for  vowels?  When  it  fails  of  its  intent 
what  must  be  done  to  decipher  the  outline?  What  are  the 
three  positions  of  the  single  vertical  stroke?  Of  the  double 
stroke  Avhen  partly  vertical?  Of  the  horizontal?  Of  the 
extended  outline?  What  is  signified  by  an  enlarged  R-hook? 
By  an  enlarged  L-hook?  What  are  they  called/ 


sri:r  x.]  PRACTICAL  snoirniANn.  101 


STEP  X. 

It  will  be  noticed  that  the  title  Step  docs  not  always 
mark  the  presentation  of  a  single  shorthand  principle, 
but  is  more  particularly  a  division  of  a  variety  of 
mail-rial  into  convenient  allotments  of  study  and  re- 
vim.  Instead  of  being  a  linger-post  to  show  a  cer- 
tain and  single  direction  to  go,  it  is  rather  a  stopping- 
place  after  a  fair  day's  journey,  where  one  can  pause 
for  a  time,  and  look  back  to  see  what  has  been  accom- 
plished. Therefore  a  principle  may  or  may  not  be 
exhausted  in  one  step ;  if  it  be  of  far-reaching  im- 
portance it  may  recur,  the  aim  being  to  make  the  ex- 
hibit interesting  as  well  as  logical  and  progressive. 

(201)     CIRCLE-S  PREFIXED  TO  HOOKS: 

S  prefixed  to  a  hook  requires  special  attention,  not 
only  on  account  of  the  care  necessary,  but  because  of 
the  abundant  meaning  conveyed. 

(202)     CIRCLE-S  AND  L-HOOK  : 

S  prefixed  to  an  L-hook  is  written  entirely  within 
tin1  hook,  to  distinguish  from  S  as  attached  to  an  un- 
modified stem,  as 

sp          spl  st          stl  sb         shl  sk 

suji        sujiplo          set        settle          sob       sable          sake 


LJ 


(203)  The  order  of  reading  is — first,  always  the 
fircle-S;  second,  the  vowel  before  the  stroke;  third, 
the  principal  stroke  ;  fourth,  the  hook  ;  fifth,  the  vowel 
aflcr  the  stroke. 


102  IXSTUUCT10X    IN  [STKP   X. 

(204)      S   prefixed    to   the    L-hook    between    some 
strokes  must  needs  be  imperfectly  formed,  like 

explode  feasible          gospel          peaceful  taxable 


(20r>)     CIRCLE-S  AND  R-IIOOK: 

S  applied  closely  (and  initially)  to  the  R-hook  side 
of  a  stem  implies  the  R  and  the  outline  is  read  —  first, 
circle-S  ;  second,  the  principal  stroke  ;  third,  the  R 
implied  by  the  position  of  S,  as 

spr-ay         str-ay  scr-nll        str-etchcr        str-iker  spr-ij; 

\     i     T     I 

~~ 


(20(5)     Between   strokes  circle-S    before    an    R    is 
shown  clearly  within  the  hook,  as 

extra      posture         rostrum    bow-string    disappear     dishonor 


L 


(207)  In  a  few  words,  S  before  R  follows  the  pro- 
cedure recommended  in  Sect.  48,  Step  III.,  being  exe- 
cuted outside  the  angle  at  the  junction  of  strokes  for 
the  sake  of  fluency  of  writing.  In  rapid  work  a  correct 
motion  is  important,  and  in  this  case  the  reading  will 
not  suffer  materially.  For  example  :  — 

discourse    proscribe      disgrace        ja  per   subscribe       manuscript 


V-v 


STK1'    X.]  PRACTICAL    SIIOUT1IAM).  103 

(20.S)      Two  sounds  of  S  before  the  R-hook  can  be 
denoted  by  prefixing  Ses  on  the  R-side,  as  in  the  words 
i-,  exasperate. 


(209)  A  limited  (and  uncoalescent)  use  of  S  on 
the  R-side  of  a  stem  is  illustrated  by  the  following  out- 
lines, which  prove  fluent  and  sufficiently  suggestive  :  — 

supper    saber         cycle  cedar      sooner        seeker          sneer 

\     \      *-        1       ^       °~       ^ 


(210)  TN,  UN  OR  EN  BEFORE  CIRCLE-S : 

///,  ?//*,  or  en  before  unsyllabic  S  are  denoted 
by  a  small  "curl"  formed  outside  the  stern,  opposite 
the  circle.  This  is  specially  convenient  before  str,  spr 
and  like  combinations,  where  the  S  is  turned  by  in- 
volute motion,  and  the  N-stroke  does  not  readily 
attach.  For  example  :  — 

instructor    insuperable       unscrew               insulate        unscrupulous 
I       n A Q       <O    I 

Where  the  N-stroke  joins  easily,  as  in  unsuitable, 
I'IIMIHC,  tnixuid,  it  is  unnecessary  to  employ  the  back- 
curl  for  >'//,  uu  or  en. 

(211)  In  words  like  uninstructed,  uninspired,  tin- 
inftcribed ,  there  seems  to  be  no  alternative  but  to  re- 
peat  the  curl  to  express   the  double   prefix,  although 


104  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STK11    X. 

this  almost  trespasses  upon  the  province  of  the  In-hook 
of  the  Burns  system,  which  the  following  words 
illustrate :  — 

endorsed  insure          entry          entrust  endear         untrue 

1         D        "\         1          "1        1 

Although  doubling  a  hook  is  condemned  by  some 
and  classed  with  impracticable  expedients,  certainly 
for  the  above  words  it  obviates  an  awkward  joining  of 
the  N-stroke  to  the  R-hook,  the  dynamics  of  it  appear 
to  be  good,  and  it  is  quite  in  analogy  with  the  double 
Dual  hook  for  V-shun,  which  appears  as  a  part  of  this 
system  in  Step  XII". 

(212)     WRITING  EXERCISK: 

(Employ  position  instead  of  vowels.) 

Unsaleable  explore  subtile  saddle  distress 
noticeable  scream  enslave  sidereal  unswayable 
insecure  suppress  stress  disable  scrap  striker 
saber  bicycle  strapper  sinner  physical  summer 
unsocial  blissful  cider  descry  cigar  disagree 
gastric  setter  texture  sucker  steeple  dishonor 
stable  stifle  secrecy  honor  prisoner  beseecher 
streamer  sipper  suffer  listener  atmosphere 
disastrous  eccentric  nostrum  smear  personally 
graceful  mistress  stager  classical  remorseless 
massacre  depositor  outstretch  traceable  discourage 
sobriety  unseemly  tricycle  secular  inspire 
unsettle  speller  suburb  insuperable  supreme 
soprano  unswathe  inter  incisor  distrust  crucible 
gossamer  engross  as-per  (phr. )  solder. 


STKP   X.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  105 


(213)    GROUP  WORD-SIGNS- 

'        1     r\      either 
/        \  ^tli-fire  eir                                      1 

-LIST  III.  : 

Dr.  (doctor) 
,-dear,  direct 
during 

bring,  liberty 
..remember.membe' 
number 

appear,  proper 

o^              /      other 

'  r\   _        over 

*   ^V....^very  very 

V 

^5 

1 

1    1 

c-v               '      favor 

1        ^\         form 
/  from 

^-"*"-^             mere,  remark-able 
-__  _£_„..  ^_.    ....in  ore 
n          c^      humor 

V        C           fl".  awful 

V-         .fiill.y 

practic-e-al 

internal 
tru-e-th 

1 

utter 

equal 
_dillicult 
calculate 

real 
,.rela-tive-tion 
rule 

\     C        belong 

\    \  ab'«,  b«low 

^l/ 

^      to-be-able 

^^ 

(-214)     MISCELLANEOUS    WORD-SIGNS  —  VI.  : 

1 


people  I .strong 

J .strength 

-describe 

inscribe 


^r 


-secure 

-insecure 

.instruct 

-value 

.pleasure 


106  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   X. 

c=z_character  __l___measure 


consider 


influential 


These  and  all  word-signs  should  be  -written  over 
and  over  again  until  the  outlines  become  as  familiar 
as  the  words  they  picture. 

(215)     L   AND    R-HOOK   PHRASES: 

o 


-in-all 
Jn-her 


in-onr 


J_ which-are 

P__at-all 


.  as-it-wore 
of-all 


(21 G)  N-stroke  followed  by  upward  L  or  R 
occasions  an  awkward  junction,  and  the  need  for  a 
quick  angle  suggests  a  clever  use  of  the  initial  hooks. 
At  the  same  time  it  illustrates  when  the  pressing 
need  for  a  fluent  outline  overcomes  a  strictly  syllabic 
rendering.  We  refer  to  the  phrase  form  in-re  as 
employed  in  cases  like  the  following  :  — 


in-respect      in-reference        in-rcply 


in-writing          in-rrcei])t 


!-! 


STKP   X.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  107 

(217)  The  same  is  not  only  advantageous  in 
phrases,  but  likewise  in  words  beginning  with  en  or  un 
preceding  r,  as 

enrich  unreliable        unregenerate     unrecognized        enrage 


Y 
-\ 


(•218)     Words  beginning  unl   (or  enl)  are  similarly 
treated,  as 

unload        unlikely     unlawful    unhealthy  unwholesome      unlucky 


The  word  forms  exhibited  in  Sects.  21G,  217  and 
218  show  how  spoken  language  sometimes  differs 
from  written.  In  voluble  speech  words  are  "run 
together";  and  here  are  shorthand  outlines  similarly 
treated.  They  are  illustrations  also  of  the  proper 
phrase.  The  nearness  to  coalescence  of  the  sounds 
gives  warrant  for  close  junction  of  the  signs  ;  and 
where  phrases  so  result,  they  may  be  considered  natu- 
ral and  allowable. 

(219)  A  shaded  M  can  be  made  to  stand  for  the 
double  consonants  MP  or  MB,  as  in  the  words 

embarrass     empire       trump          embezzle      imposed       amply 

j>          /     1 

*-**/       *~+^          \~^ 


The  conventional  names  are  Emp  and  Emb. 
(220)     MP   WORD-SIGNS: 

import-ant-ance         improve-ment      ImpOflBlb-le-lllty   may-be  (phr.11 


108  INSTRUCTION  IN 


(221)     WRITING    EXERCISE: 

Employ  in  this  writing  all  the  word-signs  and  principles 
thus  far  presented,  and  after  the  shorthand  rendering  has 
been  corrected,  use  it  for  reading  practice.  Proper  phrases 
are  marked  by  the  hyphen. 

When  you  have  conversed  with-him  you-will  come 
away  with  considerable  knowledge.  The-orator  de- 
livered-a  stump  speech  from-the  rostrum  with  special 
vigor.  There-is-nothing  for  children  to  do  here  unless 
they  play  "  I  spy."  Messrs.  Field  &  Flood,  real 
estate  people,  have  much  available  property  which-is 
very  valuable.  In-her  reply  to-our  inquiry  she  ex- 
pressed just  the-proper  view  of-the  difficulty.  The- 
deer  in-the  park  frolic  from  one  side  to-the-other  of- 
the  enclosure.  Influence  is  valuable  to-have  once  in 
awhile ;  the  influential  usually  occupy  high  places  in 
a-community.  Truth  forms  the-basis  of-all  real 
knowledge.  Phrase  and-fable  were  fully  described 
in-the  three  volumes  of  prose.  She  truly  manifested 
marvellous  nerve  for-a  person  paralyzed.  It-will-be 
wise  to  consider  analogy  in-the  study  of-the  subject 
discussed  in-this-work. 

*In-our  day  all  honor  is  given  to-the  Greek  poet 
Homer.  It-is-a  noticeable  fact  that-the  visible  sup- 
ply of  wheat  is  far  in  excess  of-all  possible  necessi- 
ties. The  migratory  fowl  will  fly  fast,  and-not  stop 
until  they  reach  a  warmer  clime.  The  enamel  was 
only  on-the  outside  of-the  small  silver  barrel.  All 
real  authors  are  allowed  free  access  to-the  classical 
library  over  in  Allegheny.  The  prisoner  seems  to 
think  nothing  of-his  dishonor.  The-trial  of  Charles 
Blair,  the-guilty  teller,  will  occur  in  April. 

*  See  foot  note,  page  54. 


X.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 

(-2-2-2)     READING    EXERCISE  : 


109 


In  this  and  subsequent  exercises  vowels  will  appear 
only  in  the  outlines  for  proper  nouns,  which  generally 
require  special  identification.  Other  words  must  be  read 
with  reference  to  position,  except  the  word-signs,  which, 
in  addition  to  position,  have  contracted  forms  for  the  most 
part.  Some  halving  appears  ;  see  Sect.  223. 

Copy  the  shorthand  of  this  exercise  many  times  for 
writing  practice,  and  acquire  the  ability  to  read  at  sight  :  — 


\ 


L 


P     Co  * 


'.X. 


c.  v^ . 


1 


\ 


.1  S, 


\ 


110  .    INSTUUCT10N    IN  [SIKT    X. 

i       i  .  —  -  ^  ^  ~  > 

*)  °  ^       •)  ~  \>  "N.         3 
i    °  \ 


r 


)  (  ^i  ^  r  ^      S    v 

' 


(223)     THE   HALVING    PRINCIPLE  — I.  : 

Shortening  is  an  important  principle,  and  the 
irregularity  of  its  application  causes  so  much  dilliculty, 
it  is  proposed  to  present  the  subject  in  installments. 

(224)  Rule.  A  consonant  stroke  represent- 
ing a  word  or  syllable  may  be  shortened  to  one- 


1'KACTICAI.    SIIOIJTHAXI). 


Ill 


half  its  ordinary  length  to  add  the  sound  of  T 
or  D,  us 


.me,  meet, 


fay,  fate 


6 


-about 
.doubt 
..saved 
.slight 
-called 


C .old 

f*        sold 
.cr. cared 


(•22">)  No  special  distinction  need  be  made  for  T 
or  1),  leaving  it  generally  for  the  context  to  decide ; 
though  L,  M,  N,  R  (dovvnward-R)  are  shaded  to  add 
I),  except  when  modified  by  a  linal  hook  (see  Sect. 
313),  as 


mate    made 


neat     need 


heart    hard 


eent    send 


(22G)  The  full  strokes  Wuh,  Yuli,  Kmp  and  Ing 
need  never  be  halved,  and  Huh  and  Huh  are  never 
halved  when  standing  alone. 


11^  INSTUUCT10N    IX  [STK1*    X. 

(227)  The  position  of  a  shortened  outline  follows 
the  rules  for  full-lengths. 

(228)  The  power  of  the  halving  is  always  read 
last,  except  where  final  S  occurs,  when  it  is  next 
to  last,  as 

sends  needs  doubts  words  goods         ni^lit.- 

1i>  c-P  — O 


(229)  IdpThc  legibility  of  the  shortened  stroke 
is  better  maintained  if  its  length  is  made  a  trine  less 
than  n  half,  though  it  should  exceed  the  length  of  the 
tick. 

It  it  a  common  and  serious  fault  of  beginners  to 
lose  sight  of  the  relative  size  of  strokes.  Establish  a 
certain  length  for  the  full  stroke,  and  make  the  short- 
ened characters  certainly  no  more  than  half.  This  is 
as  important  as  proper  stroke  direction  and  careful 
angular  junction. 

(230)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

Pit  bet  cheat  caught  jet  feet  void  taught 
meet  cat  apt  get  let  met  vote  fat  east  fed 
net  eased  went  wilt  thought  got  wound 

Plot  bright  great  glad  ironed  sound  gold 
hired  sent  sword  killed  consent  remit  orbit 
repeat  vivid  cottage  modify  hatched  favored 
plead  rapid  haggard  agreed  honored  rhymed 
qualified  hammered  required  loosened  watched 
replied  afraid  broad  threat  roots  feats  rebate 
renewed  fitly  invert  caught  ward  sealed  lived 
codify  retreat  ratify  carried 

(Halving  to  be  continued.) 


STi:r    X.]  PRACTICAL    SIIOHTHA.M).  113 

(231)      DICTATION: 

De  i  tr  Sir : 

I  received  your  letter,  and  it  was  a  surprise  to  hear  that  the 
(15)  package  has  not  reached  you.     It  enclosed  some  valuable 
books  to  assist  you  in  your  (30)  studies.    There  were  several 
especially  good  for  reference,  as  they  represent  the  views 
of  the  (45)  ablest  writers,  and  one  could  get  considerable 
knowledge  from  them. 

II  seems  peculiar,  since  the  (60)  necessary  postage  (PsJ) 
was  prepaid,  that  they  should  be  so  long  on  the  way.    How- 
ever, it  (15)  may  be  all  right,  and  possibly  you  will  receive 
them  by  tomorrow.     If  you  do  (30)  not,  please  advise  me 
by  very  early  mail. 

Yours  truly  (10), 
(100  words.) 

REVIEW   QUESTIONS  — STEP  X.: 

How  is  S  prefixed  to  the  L-hook?  Why  in  this  manner? 
When  does  the  circle-S  applied  to  the  L-hook  look  more 
like  a  loop?  How  are  the  trigraphs  str,  »pr,  -sAr,  etc.,  denoted? 
I  low  is  the  S  'applied?  Is  the  R  sufficiently  implied?  How 
does  S  appear  in  the  words  extra  and  poxtnre?  How  in  the 
words  </t.sr/(.sx  and  disgrace?  How  are  super,  soaker  and 
sin »<' r  written? 

When  do  in,  un  or  en  before  S  have  to  be  represented  by 
the  back-curl?  When  otherwise?  What  position  do  the 
following  words  occupy :  honor,  yracefnl,  crucible,  setter, 
(llt'iiilf.  sutler.  What  do  the  hyphens  stand  for  among 
the  group  word-signs?  What  is  the  best  way  to  memorize 
word-signs? 

Name  a  phrase  in  which  Nr  saves  making  an  awkward 
stroke.  Name  a  Avord  outline  made  fluent  by  the  same 
agency.  What  does  shaded  M  stand  for? 

What  is  halving?  What  is  the  rule  for  halving?  What 
stems  are  shaded  to  add  D?  When  is  such  shading  waived? 
What  strokes  are  never  halved?  When  can  Huh  and  Huh 
be  shortened?  What  positions  can  a  halved  stroke  take? 
When  is  the  power  of  the  halving  read? 

Have  you  memorized  all  the  Avorcl-signs  thus  far  pre- 
sented? Have  you  written  and  read  all  the  sentences  of 
Step  X.?  Have  you  had  the  letter  dictated  to  you?  How 
many  times?  Can  you  now  write  it  correctly  and  readily? 


114  INSTRUCTION   IX  [STEP   XI. 

STEP  XI. 

FINAL  HOOKS  — F,  V  AND  N: 

(232)  A  small  final  hook  on  the  right  (or  circle-S) 
side  of  a  straight  stroke,  or  the  upper  side  of  a  hori- 
zontal, adds  the  sound  of  F  or  V  in  the  same  syllable. 

pave  buff  tough  dove  chafe 

\o         V  I.  L          / 

Jove  cuff  gave  ravo  hoof 


(233)       A  similar  hook    upon    the   opposite    side 

stands  for  N  ;  as 

been  ten  done  John  can 

\  J  J        A 


chin  gone  hen  run 

J        -» 


(234)  The  foregoing  applies  only  to  straight 
strokes.  A  small  final  hook  applied  to  the  concave 
side  of  a  curve  stands  generally  for  the  sound  of  N. 


STEP   XI.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  115 

There  is  no  F  or  V  hook  for  curves :  the  strokes  must 
be  used. 

often  even  (wi)thin  ocean  alone 

^       ^       t      j      c 


leave  move 


3c 


(235)  Reading  the  final  hook.     In  any  syllable 
the  power  of  the  final  hook  is  read  last,  except  when  S 
is  added,  which  is  always  read  last. 

(236)  S  joined  to   an  F  or  V-hook,  or  to  an   N- 
hook  on  a  curve,  is  written  within  the  hook,  so  as  not 
to  conflict  with  simple  final  S  ;    as 

paves  doves  achieves         fines  loans 

\      I       i     ^     r    • 

but  S,  Ses,  Stuh  or  Ster,  written  upon  the  N-hook 
side  of  a  straight  stroke,  simply  adds  those  sounds  to 
the  N  which  is  implied  ;  as 

chance  reigns  chances         bounced        punster 

•        J 


(237)  The  application  of  the  final  hooks  is  syllab- 
ic, and  therefore  the  term  "stroke"  is  employed 
above  with  judgment.  If  more  than  one  syllable  is 


[  STK1'    XI. 


considered,  each  is  treated  on  its  merits.      Obviously, 
words  like  the  following  do  not  require  the  final  hook  :  — 


many 


tiny 


funny 


rainy 


(288)  It  will  generally  be  found  desirable  to  con- 
dense all  the  sounds  of  a  syllable  into  one 
stroke ;  and  the  abundance  of  initial  and  final  hooks, 
as  well  as  other  abbreviating  material  now  provided, 
combine  to  make  this  procedure  more  and  more 
reasonable  and  wise. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  introduction  of  the  V-hook 
gives  also  an  illustration  of  how  the  need  for  a 
"quick"  angle  overrules  the  intent  to  write  syllabi- 
cally.  We  refer  to  the  un-angular  junction  of  T 
and  V,  T  and  F,  P  and  V,  and  the  consequent  ne- 
cessity of  writing  the  following  words  thus :  — 

devote          profane  provoke  denied  define 


defense 

U 


provincial       typhoon          superfine 


outfit 


L, 


Other  examples  of  unfavorable  junctions,  and  the 
alternative  procedure,  will  be  given  further  on  under 
the  head  of  Angles  and  Direction  of  Strokes. 

(239)  The  use  of  the  final  hook  also  obviate! 
writing  the  awkward  stroke  iNG  as  occurring  in  words 
like :  — 


bank 


Frank 


lank 


rank 


crank 


STF,1>    XI. J  1'KACTIOAL    SHORTHAND. 


117 


(240)      WRITING  EXERCISE: 


Staff  cabinet  skiff  cough  shave  mantels 
enough  serve  cover  woolens  behave  tariff 
endeavor  rough  shingles  chairman  economy 
hotel  piquancy  condensed  shellac  Quincy 
swollen  messenger  (Ms-Jr)  vacancy  tenth  throne 
convenience  panic  cancer  hank  foreign  punish 
Spencer  dances  veneer  wagon  perhaps  adjourn 
serenely  stanza  kangaroo  replevin  Lancaster 
penury  remain  endorsed  instances  German 
lancers  behoof  champion  Kansas  believe  tracer 


(241)     READING  EXERCISE: 

u 


118 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


[STEP  xi. 


(242)     GROUP  WORD-SIGNS  —  LIST  IV.: 


</ 


religion 
.^.  general 
imagin-e-ation 


u  ciivini 

Jl I....  differ 

I,     advai 


divine 

'en-t-cc 
ance 

opinion 
none,  known 
union 


I 


(.    thine,  within 
/    then 

v  than 


men 
man 
human 

denomination 


(243)     MISCELLANEOUS  —  VII.  : 


.  *\ 


V 


-punctual-ity 


.proficient 


happen 


8TKP   XI.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 

(244)     PHRASES: 


110 


/<~^^_p 

p              as-fnr-fls 

c 

P             as-fast-as 

f 

o         Bach-as 

qy 

—  a           can-be 

j 

\ 

\>          to-have 

r 

at-length 

c  —  ^        care-of 

J 

inore-tlitin 

careful 
ray-own 

/Mir-own 

.  L  set-forth 
b          but-if-Chave) 

j 

0 

(245) 
.  wherein 

COMPOUNDS  : 

fe^j          whereas 

/ 

wliir.h  fiver 

t^^^          whereof 

1 

truthful 

cheerful 

I 

watchful 

c/         therein 

"} 

herein 

\         hereinbefore 
I          at-once 

t 

whoever 

120  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP  XI. 

POSITION—  Continual  : 

(246)  The  importance  of  Position  should  not  be 
over-estimated.     Although  presented  in  the  theory  of 
phonography  as  a  substitute  for  vowels,  it  is  obviously 
not  a  perfect  substitute  —  nor  is  it  vitally  necessary 
that  it  should  be. 

Immediately  upon  discarding  vowels,  when  the 
learner  is  extremely  in  want  of  a  word  identifier,  the 
theory  of  position  serves  to  inadequately  bridge  the 
gap ;  but  in  later  and  more  practical  writing  a  very 
small  proportion  of  the  vast  number  of  words  in 
common  use  require  position  for  their  identification. 

(247)  In  advanced  shorthand  the  need  for  a  special 
position  is  principally  in  the  following  situations  :  — 

(1)  For  the  single  or  simple    stroke   word- 
signs  which  have  a  multiplied  meaning.      (See 
group  word-signs  generally.) 

(2)  For  the  outlines  which  stand   for  more 
than  one  word  of  the- same*  part  of  speech,  and 
containing  the  same  consonant  sounds  ;  as 

prominent     pre-eminent      permit    promote        expect         accept 

•w    v  y    -A 

(3)  For  special  distinction  in  the  case  of  a 
few  outlines  to  assist  legibility ;  as 

women      woman  appear     practice  gentlemen     gentleman 


*  Different  parts  of  speech  can   have   the  same   outline 
without  much  clanger  of  conflict. 


STF.P   XI.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAXD.  121 

tril)ute      attribute  wait        await  today*    tonight 


I 

(4)  As  a  special   feature  of  word-signs  in 
general.     Always  identify  the  word-sign   very 
much  by  its  position. 

(5)  Long  outlines   can    usually   be    written 
upon   the   line,  as  their  full  rendering  makes 
them  sufficiently  legible. 

(24<S)     The  position  of  the  derivative  should  not 
commonly  depart  from  that  of  the  primitive  ;  as 

sensi-ble  noti-fy  success-ful  question-able 


(249)     WRITING  EXP^RCISE : 

His  fall  into-the  cistern  was  considered-a  serious 
disaster.  I-saw-the  publisher,  ami-he  promised 
earnestly  to-be  punctual  with-the  work.  Truth  never 
fears  to-be  examined.  How  much  we  measure-the 
character  of  others  by-our-own.  Must  I  tell  you 
Rgam-and-again  to-be  watchful.  When  you-have 
made  a-beginning,  that-is-not-all  there  is  to-an  en- 
deavor. Different  people  have  different  views ;  but 
what-is  your  opinion  of-the  government?  It-was-a  pe- 
culiar circumstance,  you-will  readily  admit.  A-Will 
generally  begins,  —  "  Know  all-men  by  these  presents." 
Hopes  and-cares,  angers  and-fears,  divide  our  lives. 
He-was  never  known  to  change  his  opinion  on-any  sub- 
ject. Poverty  is-a  great  disadvantage  unless  one  is 
industrious.  Though  a-trifle  prejudiced,  I-have-a  clear 

*  Below  the  line  —  4th  position,  so  called  —  implies  to. 


122  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP    XI. 

remembrance  of-the  circumstance.  Zeal  —  nerving 
a-Vernet  when  in-a  fierce  tempest  to  sketch  the-waste 
of  waters.  Dr.  Burchard  said:  "Rum,  Romanism 
and  Rebellion."  In-her  reply  to- the  inquiry  she  ac- 
quired just  the-right  tone  of  voice  required. 

*  Stopping  free  coinage  caused  a-pauic  which  re- 
duced-the  people  to  penury.  The-serene  syren  gave-the 
seaman  Simon  seven  saline  salmon  for-his  dinner. 
The-thinness,  fineness  and-evenness  of-the  table 
covering  was  remarkable.  Lenora  Lenox  will-have 
to  remain  in-a  lonely  nunnery  as-long-as  she-is  a-minor. 
Assyrians,  Italians,  Romans,  Africans  aud-Arabians 
may-be  found  in  Paris. 

(250)  NUMBERS : 

It  will  be  realized  sooner  or  later  in  the  business  of 
shorthand  writing  that  the  Arabic  figures  cannot  always 
be  written  rapidly  enough  to  satisfy  every  exigency ; 
and  while  the  cardinal  numbers  one,  two,  three,  and 
the  ordinals,  first,  second  and  third,  are  sufficiently 
facile  when  represented  by  the  customary  shorthand 
material,  that  other  figures  often  demand  a  quicker 
presentation. 

The  system  of  writing  numbers  here  introduced  was 
invented  by  RUEL  SMITH,  Esq.,  who  has  been  for  over 
twenty  years  official  stenographer  of  the  Maine  Su- 
preme Judicial  Court.  Mr.  Smith  permits  the  use  of 
his  method  in  these  pages,  and  has  kindly  supervised 
the  exhibit. 

(251)  LESSON  I.  : 

The  digits,  ten,  eleven  and  twelve  are  written  as 
follows :  — 

123450  789  10        11        12 

CD  \  /^  ^  i  -    v   i  ^   J    r  [_ 

*See  foot  note,  page  54. 


STKI'   XI.]  PUACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  123 

These  characters  are  distinguished  mainly  by  form 
and  direction,  and  their  phonetic  quality  renders  them 
easy  to  memorize.  Short  forms  for  figures  are  prefer- 
able to  long,  if  the  hand  of  the  writer  can  be  trained 
to  that  nicety  of  procedure.  The  wuh-sign  for  one 
turns  to  the  left  or  right  as  usual.  The  sign  for 
figure  two  is  made  short  in  analogy  with  the  tick  for  to. 

(252)  The   direction  for   writing    these    number- 
signs  is  for  the  most  part  identical  with  their  shorthand 
counterpart.      The  strokes  for  figures  three  and  seven 
have  two  directions  and  two  or  more  angles  of  incli- 
nation for  the  sake  of  convenience. 

(253)  Figure   outlines   are  sharply  distinguished 
from  other  stenographic  characters  by  a  curved  line 
drawn  beneath,  with  the  concave  side  toward  the  figure. 


(254)     EXAMPLES  OF  TEN-GROUPS: 

Numbers  between  20  and  100  are  denoted  by  join- 
ing the  signs  given  for  the  digits. 

23          24  25  2G  28  31  32          33  37          38 

>  *> 


\> 


39    41     43     45     42     46    47     48     49    56 


59     CO      05    69     75    77     78    87 


124  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STK1>   XI. 

83  85  58         27  8T>  CS  92  55          4-1 


We  are  aware  of  the  prejudice  that  has  existed 
against  writing  figures  in  stenography  ;  but  having 
been  in  situations  where  the  Arabic  numerals  were 
painfully  inadequate,  were  prompted  to  learn  the 
Smith  system,  and  from  experience  believe  it  to  be  as 
good  as  (if  not  better  than)  any  yet  devised. 

(Numbers  to  be  continued.) 

(255)     DICTATION: 

My  Dear  Sir  : 

We  have  your  favor  of  the  1st,  and  wish  to  say  in  reply 
that  we  fail  to  (20)  see  why  there  should  be  anything  missing 
from  the  goods  sent  you  a  week  ago.  We  will,  however,  go 
over  (40)  our  check-list,  and  see  if  we  have  made  any  mis- 
take; and  if  we  have,  will  at  once  notify  you  (60). 

We  are  always  ready  to  make  good  such  losses,  and  if  this 
is  our  error,  will  correct  it  right  away  (80).  Will  bring 
this  special  case  to  the  notice  of  our  principal,  and  if  it  be- 
longs to  us  to  act,  he  (20)  will  direct  us  to  do  so. 

It  is  our  invariable  practice  to  calculate  fully  the  items 
of  a  consignment  (con-sN-Nt)  previous  (40)  to  shipment; 
and  if  we  did  In  this  case,  it  will  appear  by  marks  on  the 
box.  If  you  remember  (60)  the  number  (we  think  it  was  S7) 
and  will  describe  the  stencil,  we  shall  be  able  to  adjust  the 
difficulty  (80). 

Awaiting  your  early  advices,  we  are 

Yours  sincerely  (8), 
(168  words.) 

See  Shorthand  Penmanship,  Sect.  309. 

REVIEW    QUESTIONS  —  STEP    XI.: 

What  does  the  small  final  hook  stand  for?  When  does 
it  denote  /or  v?  When  does  it  denote  n?  Do  these  hooks 
apply  to  any  stroke?  What  is  the  limitation?  What  final 


8TKI'    XI.]  I'KACTICAL    SIIO15TII.V  XI).  125 

hook  has  a  curved  stroke?  How  is  S  joined  to  the  /  or 
t'-hook?  How  to  the  u-hook  on  a  straight  stroke?  How  to 
the  M-hook  on  a  curve?  How  would  you  write  ri)wd, 


Should  the  application  of  the  final  hook  be  syllabic?  In 
what  sense?  (Jive  an  example  where  the  v-hook  -would  not 
be  used  for  the  final  consonant.  The  >i-hook.  How  is  it 
possible  to  condense  all  the  sounds  of  the  syllable  into  one 
stroke? 

What  consonants  have  been  mentioned  that  make  a  poor 
junction  with  one  another?  Do  you  know  of  any  others? 
What  must  be  done  in  such  a  case?  How  would  you  write 
/)////.-,  drink,  hi  ink,  wink  with  a  hook?  Is  this  strictly 
phonetic?  What  would  be  the  phonetic  way?  Are  the  junc- 
tions as  good? 

(The  teacher  should  ask  questions  on  the  word-signs, 
phrases  and  compound  forms  of  this  step.  For  instance: 
ask  what  the  outline  is  for  dcrdop,  as-wrtl-as,  whichever,  etc.  ; 
or,  for  another  test,  write  the  correct  shorthand  outline 
upon  the  blackboard,  and  call  for  its  interpretation.) 

Is  position  a  perfect  substitute  for  the  vowels?  When 
is  position  most  needed?  Does  it  become  less  and  less  im- 
portant as  the  student  progresses  in  practical  shorthand? 
Name  a  situation  where  position  is  indispensable.  Another. 
Another.  What  relation  has  the  position  of  the  derivative 
word  to  that  of  the  primitive? 

Can  numbers  be  written  in  stenography?  Is  it  advisable 
to  do  this?  What,  ones  are  best  Avritten  in  full,  or  by  Avord- 
sign  forms?  (The  cardinals  and  ordinals.)  What  is  the 
form  for  tirnt,  third,  three.?  What  system  of  figure  writing 
is  here  presented?  According  to  the  Smith  system,  how 
Avould  you  Avrite  2,  7,  11,  12.  etc.?  Why  do  1,  3  and  7 
have  two  directions? 

Can  the  figure  characters  be  joined?  Is  the  ten-f/roup, 
so  called,  an  illustration  of  this?  Why  are  tAvo  figures 
called  a  tcn-tfrnxft/  (In  distinction  from  a  group  of  three 
figures,  to  be  termed  later  on  the  hundred-group.}  Are  not 
the  joined  strokes  of  the  ii'>i-t/rnit/>x  very  much  like  placing 
the  Arabic  numerals  side  by  side  to  constitute  the  same 
numbers?  How  would  j'cu'  write  33,  7  it,  47,  91,  44,  27, 
31,  32,  87.  ' 


126  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEr   XII. 

STEP  XII. 

FURTHER  FINAL  HOOKS : 

(256)  An  enlarged  final  hook  upon  the  S-side  of 
straight  strokes,  and  upon  the  inside  of  curves,  stands 
for  the  syllable  "shun,"  variously  spelled  -lion,  -*/'<///, 
-c«JM,  -ci'ow,  etc. 

action        fasljion  notion      education      magician    objection 

_j>     <o     o      LJ    7.     v 

ambition         session  oblation       vision          Hessian     cautionary 

~>        J          V?      *o      ^      -^ 

(257)  A  similar  hook  upon  the  opposite  side   of 
straight  strokes  denotes  the  syllable  -tice,  as 

consecutive       subjective  figurative  operative     effective- 


(-258)  Curves  necessarily  cannot  have  the  large 
hook  for  -tive,  and  for  the  few  words  that  occur  the 
stroke  form  Tf  *  is  employed  ;  as 

native          votive  motive  ablative         palliative 

-i.     i      n.     vi NO. 

u 

*  Although  in  a  fevf  cases,  in  order  to  preserve  analogy, 
the  following  are  not  impossible  forms  :  — 

active      derivative       native    comparative  votive      accumulative 


8TKP    XII.]  ritACTlCAI,    SIIOHTHANL).  127 

(259)  S  is  added  regularly  to  the  enlarged  final 
books,  though  -shun  after  an  S  is  denoted  by  con- 
tinuing the  pen  movement  to  a  small  "back-curl." 
This  is  called  the  "  Eshon  "  (S-slmn)  hook. 

po-s-ition  physician         decision  sensation         conversation 

V         I        * 


Mark  the  special  forte  of  the  cxlion  curl,  namely : 
to  express  tthmi  only  after  the  sound  of  S. 

(2(10)  This  same  signification  can  follow  S  on  the 
N-hook  side ;  as 

compensation         condensation          transition             organization 
y ch <r> 

(201)  After  the  analogy  of  Eshou,  the  syllable 
-*///'/>  after  a  small  final  hook  may  be  denoted  as 
follo'vs :  — 

division        inclination     tension    abbreviation  derivation  convention 


..I    .V 


This,  though  regarded  by  some  as  of  doubtful 
stenographic  propriety  (see  also  Sect.  211),  has  too 
limited  an  application  to  deserve  much  criticism. 

(21)2)  It  has  commonly  been  regarded  an  offence 
in  shorthand  to  join  a  hook  to  a  hook  ;  but  in  the  pur- 
suit of  facile  forms  there  seems  to  be  no  serious 


128  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKl1    XII. 

mechanical  obstacle  to  writing  a  few  words  us  illus- 
trated below  :  — 

expenditure  monitor       Braintree       pantry         manager        plunger 


—  although  in  a  few  like  xtnnujcr  and  dtimjcr  the  N- 
hook  is  omitted  altogether,  as  will  be  shown  under  the 
head  of.  Omissions,  Step  XVI. 

(263)     WHITING  EXERCISE: 

Portion  junction  affairs  advised  location 
various  repair  subjection  illustration  losers 
mohair  veal  imitation  detention  Mohammedan 
occasion  factory  compunction  Smyrna  intimation 
gradation  Hardy  criticisms  operation  competition 
occupation  utility  beauty  allegation  commemoration 
dynamo  conversation  hesitation  Putnam  apparatus 
discussion  sanction  execution  negative  Newcastle 
admission  valuation  lessees  wardrobe  succession 
property  animation  activity  missionary  invective 
minister  administration  propriety  provocative  in- 
relation  cautionary  preparatory  excelsior  detri- 
ment colossal  exhibition  inexperienced  blunder 
hindrance  Ogdeuburg  attentively  tomorrow  to- 
you  reversionary  Breckenbridge  country  penetrate 

(264)     GROUP  WORD-SIGNS  —  LIST  V.: 


opposition 
position 

possession,  apposition 

surprise 
express 
suppress 


STEI'    XII.] 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


129 


(•2Gr>)      MISCELLANEOUS  — VIII.  : 


O. 


I 


information 

}x     .  representation 

c 

mention 
—  revelation 

organization 

<? 

jurisdiction 

i 

association 

/ 

justification 

1 

...direction 

T 

—  y       -instruction 

1 

-id    ,    .consideration 

consumption 

5 

formation 

Word  signs  and  figures,  because  not  generally 
of  frequent  leiMirrence,  should  he  practiced  a  great 
deal  daily,  in  order  to  make  them  _/o inf/iar  material. 


(•260)     PHRASES  AND  CONTRACTIONS: 

>"' 
<Q 


_less-thaii 

.of-his-own 

.iii-his-own 


-uot-less-than 


.of -Its-own 


130  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP   XII. 

-iii-siich  7^ "»as«>™» 

.in-consideration  <g^JD     .in-soine-cases 

/  i 

-4L-  -Johnson 

(207)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

The-capable  doctor  is  careful  in-his  prescriptions. 
There-was  one  onerous  condition  we-have-uot  men- 
tioned. I-have  given  Charles  my  honest  opinion. 
Charity  (CHrt)  is-the  perfection  of  every  virtue  (Vrt). 
His  information  finished  the-coinmunication.  How 
much  fear  those  evils  occasion  which  never  happen. 
He-was  commonly  styled  the -"General."  We  relished 
his  representation  of-the  situation.  A£-a  consequence 
each  profession  desires  to-be  examined  first.  They 
lengthen  it  out,  but-have  to-make  a  reduction  of-the 
strength.  We-are-all  beneath  Divine  jurisdiction. 
His  generalization  was  perfect  as-he  described  the- 
organization  of-the  association.  There- was-a  mighty 
revolution  iu-the  United  States  over  a-century  ago. 
Do-not  allow  your  expectations  to-be  those  of  pre- 
sumption. The-delegation  to-the  general  association 
enjoyed  the-sensatiou. 

*  There- was  no  occasion  for  getting  into-a  passion 
about  the-conditiou  of-the    Hessian    army.       The-at- 
tractive    appearance    of-the    outside    was    very    de- 
ceptive,   ami-only    served    to    hide    the-putrefactive, 
corruptive    and-infective    conditions   existing  within. 
The-skillful    physician    made-the    necessary    incision 
with   precision   while  engaged  in   conversation   with- 
the  sick  woman. 

*  See  foot  note,  page  54. 


STE1'    XII.  J  TUACTICAL   SIIOKTIIAXU. 


131 


(268)     READING  EXERCISE 


V 


t  T 


U 


-^    r 

1 


V 

"" 


V^ 

~    u 


J. 


7  ? 

\         % — P 


T,   ) 


c  I 


»-  -v- 


132  INSTKUCTION    IN  [STEP   XII. 

(269)    THE    HALVING   PRINCIPLE  — II.  : 

The  order  of  reading  a  shortened  outline  is  really 
the  most  troublesome  feature  of  halving.  Take,  for 
instance,  the  words  xiii><'r!i<l<'i«lci<t  (sPrnt)  and  *»/•- 
round  a  (sRnds)  in  the  last  sentence  of  Sect.  LT..S. 
Noting  the  composition  of  these  outlines,  which  are 
illustrative  of  a  stem  modified  by  8,  the  Hooks  and 
Halving,  the  student  will  have  for  consideration  this 
order  of  events :  — 

1st.  Circle-S  or  Loop.  2d.  Vowel  before  consonant 
stem.  3d.  Consonant  stern,  with  or  without  initial  hook. 
4th.  Vowel  after  consonant.  5th.  Final  hook,  if  any. 
6th.  Tower  of  the  Halving  (r  or  L>).  7th.  Final  S. 

(270)      READING    EXERCISE: 

(Syllabic  halving.) 


S    < 

3  

a           ^      •             6~                                     U    9 

V 

V  ^  ^-  -^  (5  L  ,  V    ^ 

V  S 

r 

\Q^       '<i_^         ^.           <^^        ^                   J>      '^      "\     J" 

/ 


^^ 


\ 


j X 


^  ^  ^  r  ,  \ 

V^     cK^^-^^^^V 


>> 


STK.r    XII.]  I'UACTICAI.    SHORTHAND.  133 

(271)  Incidental  to  the  halving  principle,  particular 
attention  should  be  directed  to  a  logical  representation 
of  the  syllable  -EJ3.  -El)  is  the  termination  regularly 
denoting  past  tense ;  and  although  the  past  tense  sel- 
dom needs  to  be  indicated  in  practical  shorthand,  yet 
when  it  is  demanded  the  rendering  should  not  depart 
from  syllabic  consistency.  Stroke-I)  is  the  proper 
sign  for  the  syllable  -El),  and  none  the  less  after  a 
half-length  primitive.  For  example  :  — 

not-ed      (not  no-tcil)      vot-ed  act-ed    crowd-ed        fltt-ed 

•**- 


(272)      For  the  sake  of  legibility  the   D  sometimes 
h:is  to  l)c  disjoined;    as 

trcat-cd  decd-cd        mcditat-ed       freight-ed         doubt-cd 


(273)      Although   when   the  final   sound    is  T    the 
thuil   stroke  may  lie  halved. 

dropped  (dropt)        tracked  tripped  cropped  crushed 

1 I          1 


J 513. 


(II.alvin.ir  to  lie  continued.) 


(274)      NUMBERS  —  LESSON  II.  : 

This  figure  system  exhibits  two  valuable  character- 
istics, viz.  :  In  the  grouping  of  the  signs  the  arrange- 
ment of  the  Arabic  numerals  is  imitated  to  advantage. 


134  IXSTKUCTION    IN  [STKP    XII. 

For  instance :  2  beside  7  is  27  ;  3  beside  3  is  33 ; 
8  beside  6  is  86 ;  and  the  quality  of  being  joined 
makes  the  forms  fluent. 

The  second  feature  is,  that  the  signs  denoting  the 
degrees  of  increase  in  the  numbers  take  their  shape 
from  the  words  of  language  expressing  the  increase, 
making  the  system  easily  a  rescript  of  the  N/W.v// 
figures,  and  therefore  valuable  for  purposes  of  dicta- 
tion. Lesson  II.  illustrates  this. 

(275)  Numbers  in  "teens"  are  denoted  by  adding 
the  N-hook  to  the  sign  of  the  digit ;  as 

13  14  15  16  17  18  19  20 

^t'},^,-^,     J,      I       ^>J     \. 


The  character  for  18  is  lengthened  to  prevent  con- 
flict with  10,  and  the  n-hook  is  often  joined  to  the 
sign  for  2  —  two-teen  (?)  —  in  combinations,  for  con- 
venience of  junction ;  as 

22  25  27  29  20,000    20,000,000,000 

(276)  Numbers  having  the  "  ft/  "  ending  are  de- 
noted by  adding  S  to  the  sign  of  the  digit ;  as 

20  30  40  50  CO  70  80  90 

~S     Q-OX by      ^ 


(277)  A  convenient  way  to  indicate  a  number 
(used  as  an  adjective),  and  so  dispense  with  the 
curved  underscore,  is  to  write  the  first  stroke  of  the 


Slid'    XIi.J  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  135 

modified  word  across  the  sign  for  the  figure,  or    <-i<-i> 
;  as 

30-days  40-milcs  2(VInchCfl  /0-hours         IS-acres 


(27H)  Although  multiples  of  ten  (the  "tys")  are 
denoted  as  above,  other  ten-groups  are  written  as 
slio\vn  in  Section  254,  the  S  being  omitted,  and  the 
whole  outline  imitating  the  juxtaposition  of  figures 
observed  in  the  Arabic  notation.  A  hundred-group 
made  up  of  digits  from  2  upward  may  be  written  in 
the  same  manner,  the  digit  signs  being  simply  joined 
one  to  another  ;  as 


All  other  "hundred"  combinations  will  be  explained 
in  Figure  Lesson  III. 

(Numbers  to  be  continued.) 

(270)     DICTATION. 

The  student  of  piano  playing  is  given  a  lesson  once 
:i  \\H-ck,  perhaps;  and  it  is  expected  that  several  hours 
a  day  shall  be  devoted  to  the  practice  of  that  single 
task.  Such  a  plan  faithfully  carried  out  results  in  the 
mental  discipline  which  leads  to  quick  reading  of  music 
and  that  training  of  the  lingers  which  conquers  the 
dilliculties  of  keyboard  manipulation. 

The  same  practice  should  obtain  in  shorthand  study. 
"Set  a  copy,"  and  work  upon  it  with  diligence.  Im- 


13(5  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STF.P    XII. 

pose  a  stint,  and  practice  on  that  one  thing  until  head 
and  hand  operate  so  harmoniously  that  the  writing  is 
done  quickly  and  well.  This  advice  applies  particularly 
to  the  letters  herein  given,  which  arc  for  a  practical 
demonstration  of  the  knowledge  derived  from  other 
pages  of  the  manual. 

Di-ar  Sir : 

Yours  of  the  first  instant  received,  and  in  reply  will  say 
I  am  greatly  obliged  for  your  kind  favor  in  (22)  desiring 
me  to  prepare  specifications  on  your  proposed  residence. 
But,  under  the  circumstances,  don't  you  think  it  would  be 
better  for  you  to  (45)  secure  some  one  in  your  association 
to  estimate  on  it;  as  you  are  occupying  a  public  oflice.  and 
by  going  out  of  (07)  town  it  might  occasion  a  feeling  among 
your  constituents? 

Nevertheless,  I  shall  be  pleased  to  make  you  some  figures, 
and  only  mention  this  (00)  in  the  way  of  a  suggestion  which 
the  situation  may  or  may  not  warrant. 

Will  call  to  see  you  in  a  few  (22)  days;  and  if  there  arc 
any  points  I  can  give  you  in  regard  to  building,  shall  be 
most  happy  to  do  so. 

I  (45)  am,  sir, 

Your  obedient  servant  (50). 
(140  words) 

M;i  Dear  Sir : 

We  are  in  receipt  of  your  letter  of  the  2sth  instant, 
asking  for  an  extension  of  time  on  your  account  (22)  which 
is  now  overdue. 

In  reply  would  state,  that  while  we  are  in  much  need  of 
money  at  this  time,  having  several  heavy  (45)  bills  coining 
due  and  payable  next  week  ;  still,  from  our  past  transactions 
and  experience  with  your  firm,  which  have  been  of  a  ((!") 
most  satisfactory  character,  we  cannot  do  otherwise  than 
comply  with  your  request. 

We  therefore  extend  the  time  of  credit  thirty  days  from 
this  date  (HO),  at  which  time  we  shall  draw  on  you  at  sight 
for  account  in  full,  and  trust  you  will  honor  draft,  and  so 
(22)  accommodate 

Yours  very  truly  (4), 
(116  words.) 


3TK1'    XII.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  ]'.\7 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  — STEP  XII.: 

How  is  the  syllable  -tinn  denoted?  Does  the  varied  spell- 
ing of  this  termination  have  any  weight?  What  is  the 
live-hook?'  To  what  stems  is  it  applied?  Why  cannot 
curves  admit  this  hook?  What  phase  of  the,  -tion  situation 
docs  the  Eshon-hook  mark?  How  is  slum  denoted  after 
Ns? 

How  is  -tii-i-  expressed  after  curves?  Is  this  the  in- 
variable practice?  When  may  exception  be  made?  How 
may  ii'i/in-,  nc/ii-c.  rot  in-  he  written?  How  would  you  write 
n<'t.  iti-tfil,  iti-lnul,  etc.?  What  root  form  is  preserved?  Is 
a  like  analogy  followed  in  the  other  words  given? 

How  is  shun  represented  after  a  final  hook?  Is  this  the 
best  of  stenographic  material?  Why  not  (see  Sect.  202)  ?  Is 
it  generally  proper  to  join  a  hook  to  a  hook?  When  may 
the  objection  be  waived?  Is  not  this  the  reason  for  writing 
((irisioti,  ti'itsiiiii,,  etc.,  as  in  Sect.  2*11:' 

\Vh:it  is  a  clever  way  to  write  Jvsx-tlmn,  Benson,  Mununn? 
In  these  words  what  sound  is  the  shun  in  analogy  with?  (N.) 
Is  this  more  unreasonable  than  some  of  the  approved  out- 
lines for  word-signs? 

What  is  a  difficult  feature  of  halving?  Give  the  order  of 
reading  in  the  words  xfr<u'»<'<I,  supplant,  considered.  What 
does  the  syllable  -<•<!  stand  for  in  language?  How  denoted 
in  shorthand?  Why  is  it  seldom  necessary  to  denote  the 
past  tensc-f?  Is  1)  so  used  regularly  joined  or  disjoined? 
When  disjoined?  (See  Syllabication  in  Shorthand,  I'art 
III.) 

What  features  of  the  figure  system  are  noteworthy? 
Why?  How  are  numbers  in  teen* expressed?  What  is  the 
sign  for  15,  14?  How  is  a  number  ending  with  the  syllable 
-///written?  What  are  the  signs  for  16,  19,40,80?'  Why 
is  the  character  for  18  double-length?  When  is  20  con- 
sidered as  two-teen  (  ?  )  What  other  way  of  calling  attention 
to  a  ligure  besides  the  underscore?  What  is  a  ten-group? 
A  hundred-group?  What  kind  of  hundred-group  can  be 
represented  by  the  material  thus  far  given? 


138  INSTRUCTION  IN  [STEP  XIII. 

STEP  XIII. 

THE  BUSINESS  LETTER: 

(280)  The  simplest  use  of  a  not  profound  knowl- 
edge of  shorthand  is  in  the  business  office  for  the  ex- 
pedition of  commercial  correspondence.  Stenographers 
of  all  degrees  of  proficiency  are  available  for  this,  be- 
cause such  dictations  range  from  the  slowest  speed 
upon  a  familiar  subject  up  to  reasonably  sw4ft  writing 
upon  more  exacting  matter. 

But  for  the  most  part  business  correspondence  is  a 
primary  development  of  practical  shorthand  :  for  the 
reason  that  the  writer  becomes  well  acquainted  with 
the  technicalities  of  a  single  business  after  a  short 
period  of  service,  and  the  work  is  likely  to  run  much 
in  the  same  channel.  Writing  letters,  then,  is  an  ap- 
propriate occupation  for  the  beginner  in  stenograph}', 
and  from  that  he  can  progress  to  more  ambitious  effort. 

(281)     SOME  BUSINESS  WORD-SIGNS: 

1 advance  ' interest 

L  appreciate  ^manufacture 

O 

average  1 merchandise 

1 


3  — 


-balance 
bankrupt.  —       ~7  —  mortgagee 


\ 

.negotiate 


STKP  XIII.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  139 

,  — "-^  i     commercial  -5_ 


"X 


-consignee  ^ _  principal 

% 
-customer  . — -profit 


\r       deficiency  U_ 


.deficiency  — , U quotation 

-dollar  5= — —secretary 


.exchange  ! signature 


n1  L 

I , — guarantee  — *"~ 


-instant  P transfer 


(282)     BUSINESS  PHRASES: 
.bill-lading 

.account-current    C?.       ...account-sales 

— 1>       .. 


\          _  balance-account      V   "  bills-receivable 

V^ 


bill- (of; -sale 

bank-stock  _^\ Board-(of  )-Tradc 

r 

dear-sir  fea. _...in-settlement 

yours-trulj7'  ..flC™\ _yours-respectfully 

by-express  .....A ..charter-party 


140  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKl'    XIII. 

(283)  WRITING  EXERCISE: 
Acceptance  accommodation  annuity  assets 
assignment  (S-N-Nt)  brokerage  capital  clearance 
commission  contraband  correspondent  currency 
debenture  deficit  discount  dissolution  dividend 
draft  duplicate  entry  finance  failure  firm 
foreclosure  forward  shortage  funds  import 
reimburse  installment  insurance  inventory  investment 
(N-Vst-Nt)  invoice  license  lien  manifest  market 
minimum  panic  partner  payee  policy  protest 
ultimo  proximo  sub-agent  financial  surety  rebate 
remittance  renewal  revenue  schedule  solvent 
traffic  tracer  tariff  trustee  voucher  wire  transit 

(284)   COMMON  PHRASES  OF  THE  BUSINESS 
LETTER : 

Yon-will-notice  enclose-herewith  we-enclose  bills- 
payable  discount-day  invoice-book  in-settlement 
in-answer  per-annum  per-cent  power- (of ) -attorney 
duly-received  sight-draft  esteemed-favor  lot-us- 
know  forward-at-once  await-your-reply  we-eu- 
close-check  we-shall-be-pleased  at-the-same-price 
we-enclose-copy  be-kind-enough  kindly-examine 
without-protest  proof-of-loss  in-reply  pleasc-re- 
ceipt  we-decline  we-will-be-pleased  at-present  in- 
relation-to-the-mattcr  in-receipt-of  in-every- respect 
you- will-notice  in-this-matter  early-as-possible  has- 
been-received  this-figure  we- may- receive  course- 
of-bnsiness  in-this-mail  on-the-way  by-special- 
delivery  express-paid  according- (to) -agreement  on- 
account-of  under-  (the) -circumstances  National-bank 

(285)  Note  the  simplicity  of  all  the  phrases  presented. 
Certain  word  groups  arc  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  are 
ofte»i  uttered  rapidly.  The  stenographer  should  be  able  to 
write  them  quickly.  Judicious  phrasing  of  such  expressions 
is  admissible;  but  do  not  labor  to  phrase.  The  most  useful 
composite  outline  is  that  which  takes  shape  almost  of  itself. 
Do  not  force  the  process ;  simply  yield  to  a  natural  impulse. 
See  Phrasing,  Part  III. 


STEP   XIII.]  PRACTICAL   SHOHTHAND.  141 

(iso)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

The  following  sentences  should  be  written  many,  many 
times.  True  progress  in  shorthand  writinjr  does  not  consist 
in  hurrying  over  a  vast  iimonnt  of  matter;  but  more  lasting 
benefit  Avill  result  from  dwelling  a  long  time  upon  one  task. 
Kverv  |>ieee  of  writ ing  sliould  be  read.  This  is  an  indis- 
pensable re<|iiisile  of  proper  procedure.  Writing  trains  the 
hand  ;  reading,  the  mind  :  both  must  be  educated  in  this 
study  :  — 

The-business  man's  first  wish  was-to  please  every 
customer.  The-principal  of-the  firm  considered  it  for- 
his  interest  to  perform  his  duties  well.  To-be  capable 
in  business  one-must  have  a-general  knowledge  of  com- 
mereial  affairs.  The-balance  (or  difference)  is  correct, 
and-when  you  average  it  properly  no  deficiency  exists. 
The-guariinty  iu-tlie  charter  required  the-managers 
of- the  corporation  to  divide  the-stock  into  equal  shares. 
The-president  recommends  the-secretary  to  make  a- 
ca refill  investigation  of-the  irregularity  in-the  accounts. 
The-lioanl-of-Trade  directs  all  business  transactions 
according  to  practical  rules.  Thirty  years  ago  a-civil 
war  agitated  this  country,  and-the  finances  of-the 
nation  were  disturbed  by-the  unequal  distribution  of 
exper.ses.  The  rate-of  interest  to-be  obtained  in  Eng- 
land at  that  time  was  only  three  per  cent,  while  in-the 
United  States  it-was  eight  or  ten.  The-striugency 
of-the  stock  market  is  beyond  belief,  and-prices  on-all 
securities  rule  high.  The-$50,000.0p  (;>()  -f  thuh)  of 
borrowed  capital  was  covered  principally  by  collateral 
(Kit-Ill)  trust  bonds  and-preferred  stock.  Wall  Street 
is-tlie  feverish  center  of  speculation  (sP-Klshn)  and- 
finance.  The-Bank  of  England  h^s  reduced  its  rate-of 
discount  from  three  to  two  per  cent.  If  bank  clear- 
ances may-be  considered  an-indication  of  general 
trade,  then  the-year  1<S!)2  (l<S-f'J2)  inust-have-l)eeu 
a- fairly  favorable  one.  The  consignee  was-a  good 


142  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEI1    XIII. 

customer,  and-believed  he-could  realize  a-satisfactory 
profit  if  quotations  could-be  given  by  telegraph. 
Pres.  Ingalls  said:  "Last  year  only  4,000  miles 
of  railroad  were  constructed  in-this  country,  aud-there 
should-have-been  10,000."  Since-the  passage  of-the 
Sherman  Act  of  1890  the-belief  has  grown  that-the 
United  States  is  moving  iu-the  direction  of-a  silver 
basis  country.  The-manufacturer  directed  his  ste- 
nographer to  telegraph  the  secretary  of  the  Co.  to 
negotiate  for-a  stock-of  supplies  ;  but  learning  that-the 
price  of  exchange  had  advanced,  that  sales  of  mer- 
chandise were  slow,  and-an  average  consumption 
could-not-be  guaranteed,  he-refused  to  affix  his  signa- 
ture to-the  despatch.  The-transfer  of-the  bankrupt 
stock-of  merchandise  was  accomplished  on-the  18th 
instant.  The-mortgagee  questioned  the-terms  of -t lie 
mortgage  much  the-same  as  would  a-lessee  the-pro- 
visions  of-a  lease. 


NUMBERS  —  LESSON  III.: 

(287)  Three  ways  »f  speaking  numbers  contain- 
ing the  word  hundred  are  heard.     For  example:    (1) 
Hunclred-and-five ;     (2)    Five-hundred-and-five ;     (3) 
Five-hundred.     The  position,  initial,  medial  or  final. 
which  the  word  hundred  occupies  in  the  nmm-ncal 
sentence,  governs  the  manner  of  indicating  the  short- 
hand outline. 

(288)  The  peculiar  application  of  this  idea  may 
be  expressed  as  follows :   Initial  hundred  is  denoted 
by  the  circle-S  prefixed.     Medial    hundred    is  de- 
noted by  the  S  executed  medially.     Final  hundred 
is   denoted    by   a  pendant   loop.  —  All  of  which  are 
amply  illustrated  on  the  next  page. 


sricr  xiii.] 

I'KACTK'AI. 

SHOUTHAXI>. 

ua 

105             .-.  'i.-.          500 

V.7          706 

600          700 

no 

150        155 

t,  *±.  v< 

"3y    «X. 

/        fy       i?; 

L 

P                       P 

V^y      ^i 

5-            ^       fx 

•^ 

}^ 

110            Hi;          406 

460        114 

•215           61!) 

•200 

3(K1          NCI 

P        °N           ~^_ 

J  ^         l  —  /     <=*—.  /• 

'        L_0y    ^ 

t     \^y     —  ^ 

/       V, 

'  -*/    k 

1!H)                 3500 

4(K)0 

1100            1200 

1400 

1500        I'.KX) 

2_0^         -^\>  > 

X,, 

^y      b/ 

"5/ 

^y  ^ 

Note  the  forms  for  1100  and  1200.  That  for  the 
latter  is  prrfcnible  to  the  regular  way,  which  might  be 
taken  for  o:500  or  8300. 


The  hooks  of  curved  figures  in  teens  are 
made  large  to  admit  the  loop  for  final  hundred,  as 
illustrated  by  the  last  three  examples  above. 


In  a  hundred-group  of  figures,  made  up 
of  digits  from  two  upward,  the  medial-S  is  usually 
omitted,  as  stated  in  Fig.  Lesson  II.  ;  but  it  may  be 
inserted  at  pleasure  if  convenience  of  junction  de- 
mands. The  observant  writer  will  see  upon  the  in- 
stant the  "slow"  angle  that  can  be  quickened  by 
the  insertion  of  the  S. 

2-21        -270          2!!l          567          217  5114  sss        117  666 


(-;'!)  Thousands,  millions,  billions,  etc.,  are 
denoted  by  joining  the  regular  character  for  such 
numbers. 

Large  numbers  are  also  represented  by  disjoining 
for  thousands,  millions,  etc.,  imitating  the  groups  of 
three  figures  of  the  Arabic  notation. 


144 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


[STEP   XIII. 


5,000      10,000        100,000    500,000  S,000,000  14,000,000,000 

k 


•13,750        104,963 


14,002    33,936,015        25,006        190C       1,900 


(2'J2)  Dollars  and  cents  may  be  denoted  by 
drawing  a  straight  line  (like  tin  extended  Rub)  under 
dollars  and  over  cents,  ami  dispensing  with  the 
curved  underscore  ;  as 


!j;3JO 


$40.25         $100      §23.50     $103,000 


o/  >/ 


4 


(293)  Fractions  are  denoted  by  writing  the  sign 
of  the  numerator  over  that  for  the  denominator. 
Fractions  with  1  for  the  numerator  are  denoted  by 
simply  joining  the  sign  for  I  to  the  denominator :  — 


50 


,'„;;: 


± 


A 


,'H 


A 


These  three  lessons  in  the  writing  of  numbers  will 
serve  for  all  ordinary  usage.  Jf  the  student  desires  to 
go  further  he  is  recommended  to  consult  SMITH'S 
SHORTHAND  NUMERALS,*  which  may  be  obtained  of 
any  dealer  in  shorthand  literature. 


*  SMITH'S  SHORTHAND  NCMKUALS,  by  liuel  Smith,  Bau^or, 
Maiiie.     Price,  25  cents. 


vr  ]••.!•  xiii.] 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


145 


(-21)1)     NAMES  OF  PEOPLE  AND  PLACES: 

Employ  the  same  principles  iu  writing  proper  names 
as  1'or  ordinary  words,  only  remember  that  they  are 
less  common,  and  therefore  their  outlines  are  less 
familiar ;  so  it  will  be  wise  to  make  extra  efforts  for 
legibility,  giving  heed  to  syllables,  angles  and  sug- 
estive contour  of  form. 


/             AtvliUmi                                          Providence 

r 

llhode  Island 

7 

Europe 

X 

Santa  Fe 

V-—  >—  «v— 

x  Framini^ham 

M 

Utah 

lYj, 

Hartford 

n 

Wisconsin' 

\ 

Hersey 

j 

Twitchell 

*) 

Kentucky 

2 

Forrest 

r^_ 

^>_ 

-   Haybrook 

9 

Nashua 

7 

r7 

Chandler 

(295)      Names  of   places   of  compound    form  con- 
taining the  word  AV/r  may  be  written  as  follows  :  — 

New  Kng.    Newport    New  Hamp.    Newcastle     Newark     New  Jersey 


14G  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKP    XIII. 

(29G)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

Annapolis  Arkansas  Amherst  Attlcboro  Ayer 
Arizona  Albany  Augusta  Atlantic  Alabama 
Aldrich  Abbott  Bangor  Biddeford  l>re\\ster 
Beverly  Buffalo  Baltimore  Brooklyn  Burlington 
Braintree  Baring  Burton  Belcher  Butterworth 
Bicknell  Blanchard  Clinton  Cottage  City  Cin- 
cinnati Chicago  California  Carolina  Charleston 
Colorado  Cleveland  Columbia  Candler  Carroll 
Couant  Detroit  Delaware  Denver  Dover  Dululh 
Elizabeth  Eastport  Edinburgh  Fredericksburg 
Florida  Eall  River  Francis  Gloucester  Greenfield 
George  Gordon  Hyde  Park  Halifax  Hinghain 
Harrisburg  Helena  Houghton  Herbert  Indianapolis 
Idaho  Illinois  Ipswich  Iowa  Jersey  City 
Kingsley  Louisiana  Lawrence  Loud  Lovell 
Minneapolis  Montpelier  Montreal  Michigan 
Maiden  Middleboro  Manchester  Nantucket 
New  Orleans  Oregon  Newburgh  New  Mexico 
Newcomb  Ohio  Orange  Omaha  Peabody 
Pittslield  Portland  Provincetown  Pennsylvania 
Philadelphia  Partridge  Rockport  Randolph 
Raymond  Savannah  Swampscott  Salem  Steven 
St.  John  Stillman  Seabury  Sanborn  Sheppard 
Taunton  Toronto  Tallahassee  Turner  Teunessce 
Topeka  Tiukham  Vermont  Yosemite  Young 
Washington  Weymouth  Wellesley  Woonso(;ket 
White  Willimantic  Wilson  Wilkins 

(297)     LETTER  WRITING  : 

Further  on  will  be  presented  a  business  letter  in 
shorthand,  arranged  as  it  should  appear  on  the  note- 
book of  the  student.  When  taking  a  letter  from 
dictation  the  following  points  should  have  attention  :  — 


STEP   XIII.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  147 

(2(,)<S)  Begin  the  notes,  and  carry  them  along  to 
the  end,  imitating  the  form  of  letter  presented  in  the 
Suggestions  for  Typewriter  Practice  accompanying 
this  manual.  It  is  presumed  that  the  shorthand 
student,  particularly  if  in  a  commercial  school,  has 
now  reached  that  stage  in  his  typewriting  when  a  let- 
ter can  be  transcribed  upon  the  writing  machine. 

(2',)(J)  Arrange  the  shorthand  notes  of  the  letter 
<nl'lr<'*x  very  much  in  the  same  order  that  the  formali- 
ties of  typewriting  would  demand.  Have  the  "Dear 
Sir"  begin  the  next  line  below,  and  either  write  a 
dash  (the  underscore  character)  or  drop  to  still  another 
line  to  begin  the  botly  of  the  letter.  Indent  for  para- 
graphs, beginning  a  new  line  for  same  as  in  any 
writing.  By  so  doing  the  stenographic  page  will  be 
rendered  legible  quite  as  much  because  of  a  proper 
order  of  action,  and  by  the  "daylight"  let  in  upon  the 
characters,  as  if  the  outlines  were  exquisitely  geo- 
metrical in  form. 

(300)  Leave  a  space  of  about  one  inch  always  for 
the  period,  and  postpone  other  punctuation  for  atten- 
tion when  transcription  takes  place.     The  amanuensis 
must  know  how  to  punctuate  ! 

(301)  Write  proper  names  in  shorthand  if  they  are 
familiar,  and  the  outline  can  be  made  unmistakable. 
Invariably  underscore  such  words.      Unfamiliar  names 
should  be  freely  vowelized  (  ?  ) ,  and  only  as  a  last  re- 
sort should  they  be  written  in  longhand.     The  learner 
should  become  acquainted  with  the  outlines  for  the 
countries,  cities,  rivers  and  mountains  of  the  world, 
as  well  as  for  the  names  of  people. 

(302)  Write  all  initials  in  small  letters  of  long- 
hand   script;    because  such  can    be   joined    in  fluent 
fashion,  and  any   saving  of  pen-lifting  is  important. 


148  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKT    XIII. 

Write    figures   according  to   the  system    explained   in 
these  pages. 

(303)     READING  EXERCISK: 

Also  copy  this  letter*  in  shorthand  many  times, .in  order 
to  acquire  the  style  of  arrangement.  Follow  the  same  plan 
in  writing  from  dictation.  The  date  given  below  should  head 
a  day's  dictation,  but  not  necessarily  appear  over  every  letter. 


C  \ 

styi*/    /? *- 

r       T/  JT 


; 

c 
Hr 


a 


•—  ^  \    (       I 

\      o      \      \     v~  o 


*  Adapted  from   BKALK'S  BTSINKSS    LKIIKKS,   issued  by 
Beale  Publishing  Company,  Boston. 


.STEP   XIII.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  149 


>  ~  I       d       s 


f "  '  I) ' 


\       1       •X-x       C 

^n        ;  1            o   K-* 

1          >-> 
c 

(    (    I    r>    .»    i    -^     v~ 

1                         I 

S'       —  J 

S~Zs  3  c                     c\     \       n       /       ( 
V                            n       i      cJ-                   /        V<v 

\                        • 

2  \   ° 

^  '   4 


V, 


*r 


(304)     DICTATION : 

Messrs.  HOWE  &  HIGH, 

17^  Lisbon  St.,  Auburn,  Me. 
Gentlemen  : 

Replying  to  yours  of  May  2d,  would  say  that  the  Western 
Investment  Co.  does  not  guarantee  the  payment  (20)  of  the 
bonds,  but  simply  the  interest. 

If  the  bonds  are  not  paid  at  maturity,  the  trustees  for 
the  bondholders  (40)  would  make  entry  for  foreclosure, 
unless  the  bondholders  accept  some  new  proposition  from 
the  company  for  extending  the  bonds  with  (CO)  the  guaranty 
of  interest. 

The  chances  are,  however,  that  nothing  of  this  kind  would 
be  required,  for  it  never  has  (80)  been  in  any  of  our  syndi- 
cates. If  the  property  should  not  sell  for  within  fifty  per 
cent  of  its  cost  (20),  the  bondholders  would  have  received 
back  their  money  and  savings  bank  interest  at  four  per  cent. 
If  the  property  sold  (40)  for  fifty  per  cent  less  than  cost, 


150  INSTRUCTION   IN  [SlT.l1    XIII. 

they  would  have  received  their  money  back  with  interest  for 
.five  years;    but  (60)  under  the    terms  of  either  trust,  the 
property  cannot  be  sold  unless  it  realizes  double  its  original 
cost. 

Yours  truly  (80), 
(100  words.) 

Messrs.  HAYES,  HILTON  &  HARRIS, 

I486  Pointdexter  St.,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Gentlemen : 

Your  esteemed  favor  of  the  22d  instant  has  been  duly 
received,  and  contents  carefully  noted. 

We  enclose  herewith  check  to  your  (22)  order  for  twenty- 
five  dollars,  in  payment  of  bill  attached.  Kindly  acknowledge 
receipt,  and  oblige. 

We  wired  you  yesterday  as  per  copy  below,  and  (45)  this 
is  to  confirm  the  same  :  — 

SHIP  BALANCE  HY  KXI'KKSS,   AND  DRAW   ON  US  ACCORDING 
TO    TKRMS    1'RKVIOUSLY    GIVEN. 

Please  pardon  the  (<>7)  error  in  relation  to  former  con- 
signment, referred  to  in  your  advices  of  the  isth.  U'c  ac- 
knowledge the  mistake,  and  will  cheerfully  refund  the  (00) 
over-payment.  We  are  sincerely  sorry  that  such  a  tiling 
should  happen,  and  assure  you  that  the  next  shipment  will 
be  in  (22)  excellent  condition. 

Soliciting  a  continuance  of  your  patronage,  we  are 

Yours  very  truly  (13), 
(125  words.) 

The  figures  in  parenthesis  occurring  at  intervals  in 
these  and  all  the  letters  presented  for  dictation  practice 
are  for  the  convenience  of  the  dictator  in  timing  the 
speed  of  his  reading.  Each  letter  is  divided  into 
quarter  minute  portions  on  a  basis  of  sixty  words 
and  upwards,  according  to  the  stage  of  progress. 

While  it  is  not  desirable  to  dictate  with  watch  in 
hand,  exposed  to  the  sight  of  the  student,  yet  it  is 
equally  unprofitable  to  read  at  random,  ignorant  or 
careless  of  the  rate  of  utterance.  The  reader  should 
have  a  speed  gauge ;  but  let  not  the  writer  be  di- 
verted from  diligent  endeavor  by  thoughts  of  it. 


STF.r    XIII.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  151 

Typewriting  affords  a  pleasant  relief  to  the  tedium 
of  shorthand  study ;  and  the  tasks  of  the  day  should 
be  divided  into  convenient  proportions  of  each.  Ob- 
serve the  make-up  of  the  Business  Letter  as  described 
in  Suggestions  for  Typewriting,  Part  III.  Sufficient 
skill  in  the  management  of  the  machine  should  now 
have  been  attained,  so  that  all  dictations  can  be  tran- 
scribed upon  the  typewriter  in  correct  form  and  with 
some  despatch.  But  make  no  special  effort  for  speed  ; 
strive  rather  for  style  and  accuracy,  and  the  matter  of 
speed  will  take  care  of  itself. 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  — STEP  XIII.: 

What  development  of  shorthand  does  correspondence 
ordinarily  represent?  Is  extraordinary  proficiency  re- 
quired? Then  business  correspondence  provides  ofttimes 
a  good  stepping-stone  to  better  things?  What  kind  of 
phrasing  is  here  recommended?  Mention  a  phrase  of 
common  occurrence. 

Give  the  three  ways  of  speaking  hundreds  in  figure  par- 
lance. What  is  the  rule  for  representing  hundred-groups? 
In  what  direction  is  the  loop  for  final  hundred  written?  Is 
the  medial  S  always  employed?  How  would  you  write 
I, sot!.*  I  tow  are  million,  billion,  etc.,  denoted?  How  are 
dollars  indicated?  Cents?  Does  this  oblique  line  have  a 
use  in  English  money?  What?  What  is  the  general  way 
of  writing  fractions?  The  special  way  for  fractions  with 
1  for  the  numerator? 

What  form  should  the  notes  of  a  dictated  letter  take? 
How  is  the  address  written?  What  is  the  address  of  a 
letter?  Is  it  a  correct  address  if  the  town  or  city  be 
omitted?  Is  it  a  useful  address  if  the  street  of  a  large 
city  be  omitted?  Is  the  rom/ilfti'  address  always  neces- 
sary? What  does  "indent"  mean  in  this  connection, 
:uid"  in  reference  to  typewriting?  What  punctuation  is 
indicated  in  a  shorthand  letter? 

What  is  the  instruction  as  to  proper  names?  What  are 
familiar  names?  Should  not  good  outlines  be  as  ready  for 
them  as  for  any  familiar  matter?  What  treatment  is 
recommended  for  unfamiliar  names?  Then  it  is  important 
to  remember  how  to  manage  the  vowels?  What  outlines 
should  always  be  familiar  to  a.  citi/.en  of  the  United  States? 
How  are  initials  to  be  written?  Why  so? 


152  INSTRUCTION  IN  [.STEP   XIV. 


STEP  XIV. 

FURTHER  DEVELOPMENTS  OF  HALVIN(  J  : 

(305)  The  same  may   be   said  of  halving  as  of 
many  an  abbreviating  principle :   do   not  overdo  it ' 
Halve  with  judgment  and  with  caution.     In  Exercise 
270,  examples  of  halving  in  the  correct  syllabic  division 
of  words  were  shown,  and  that  phase  of  it  could  not 
fail  to  give  satisfaction  ;  but  disciples  of  syllabic  short- 
hand cannot  wholly  felicitate  themselves  when  halving 
is  concerned.     The  principle  is  so  erratic  in  its  ap- 
plication (when  made  conducive  to  fluent  procedure), 
that  the  practical  writer  is  content  to  let  it  take  its 
wayward  course.     This  Step  will  exhibit  a  few  of  its 
vagaries. 

(306)  To  secure  variety  of  form  where   conflict 
might  be  dangerous  to  legibility,  some  outlines  aiv 
shortened,  while  others  which  picture  similar  sounds 
(but  vary  syllabically)  are  not ;   as 

operate          part              separate    support          errand       earned 
V a V  <\  "V>  "3 


(307)  The  above  might  be  credited  absolutely  to 
the  need  for  syllabic  structure,  were  it  not  for  the  fact 
that  the  number  is  great  of  mixi/lla/iii-  forms  which  this 
fickle  principle  of  halving  makes  the  best  possible 


STKP    XIV.] 


1'KACTIC.U.   SHORTHAND. 


153 


material  when  speed  is  considered.     We  refer  to  in- 
stances like  the  following  :  — 


J^Lret-urn 
V      rftt-nil 


\ 


det-ail 

pot-ato 

(w)isd-om 

det-ach 

.prot-ect 

.int-ent 

.ant-icipate 

bett-er 

part-icipate 


.silent 

.verd-ict 

.ind-icate 

int-end 

.warrant 

.bott-om 

.(h)isto-ry 


(308)  In  some  words  where  a  long  vowel  pre- 
cedes T  or  D,  halving  is  waived,  leaving  the  long  form 
to  imply,  as  it  were,  the  long  vowel,  and  so  distinguish 
from  similar  words  containing  short  vowels,  which 
may  be  halved. 


paid       put 


late        let 

n  r 


lead         lot 

n  c 


date    debt 


154  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP    XIV. 

Under  this  head  come  a  few  R  and  L-hook  words 
which  have  a  long  vowel  between  the  stem  and  the  R 
or  L  denoted  by  the  hook  ;  as 

bleed     build         breed   brought       plead      plot  Made    bled 


v 


This  is  not  a  universal  rule,  but  is  ofttimes  a  help 
to  legibility. 

(309)  Do  not  shorten  when  the  finished  outline 
would  not  exhibit  the  fact.  Write  such  forms  iu  full, 
and  carefully  at  that;  as 

looked          affect         navigate         collect        fatigue     moneyed 


V- 

_{__ 


__ 


(310)  After  the  fashion  of  zn,  en  or  un  preceding 
R  (see  Sects.  216,  217),  words  beginning  in<1<>,  iiitli, 
nndfi  can,  by  halving,  be  given  a  convenient  form. 

independent  indiscriminate  undefined    indefeasible      indispensable 


(311)     Phrase    or    compound    forms    having    the 
words  time  or  take  for  the  last  member,  can  be  denoted 
by  halving  as  follows  :  — 
everyt  ime     ovcrt-ake  in-the-ineant-ime   at-(tlie)-saniet-iinc   part-ake 

<JV"~^ 


at-all-times         betake     in- (a) -short-time    some-time    several-times 


8TKP   XIV.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  !.");"> 

(312)  The  precepts  of  Step  VII.  call  for  a  down- 
ward stroke  of  It  in  final  syllables  where  It  is  preceded 
}>y  a  vowel.  This  is  often  waived  in  advanced  writing 
for  the  sake  of  fluency,  and  upward  It  employed 
instead.  Below  is  a  situation  similar  in  point,  includ- 
ing also  a  phase  of  halving  :  — 

veered  marred  lard  fortified  fortunate 


(313)      L,  M,  N  and  It  are  understood  to  be  shaded 
when  halved  to  add  I)  (see  Sect.  22;"))  ;  but  this  is  not 
necessary  when  modified  by  the  final   hook;   as 
meant          mind  lent  lend       renowned     arraigned 


(314)  Do    not   confuse    the    hook    modifier    with 
brief-wuh,   as   in   the    words  ?'v//',   //v//'/,   //v>/v/,   etc., 
which  require   no  shading;    though    the   outlines   for 
tn'c/il  and   i/icld  may  be  thickened  to  distinguish   from 
'in'lf  and  leaned.*    (See  wield  and  yield  in  word-signs, 
Part  III.) 

(315)  It  is  hardly  wise,  in  the  endeavor  for  fluent 
and  legible  writing,  to  shorten  a  stroke  containing  the 
Kel-hook,  Shun-hook  or  Ses,  though  it  is  rarely  done. 
(See  consistent  and  suspend  among  Word-signs,  P:irt 
III.) 

(310)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

Definite  authentic  offend  enlightened  unre- 
pentant in-reporting  accident  moment  excellent 
servant  resilient  document  encounter  cogent 
incident  amusement  solvent  subsequent  oleg.-mt 
surmount  indenture  remainder'  rudiments  blunder 

*  We  prefer  this  rendering  to  associating  them  with 
strokes  W  and  Y,  which  might  as  well  never  be  halved. 


15fi 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


[STKP   XIV. 


herald  standard  manifold  consistent  advocate 
advent  deliberate  impediment  fountain  reluctant 
phantom  insult  insulate  insert  relevant  acquaint 
ultimatum  yesterday  (St-Ruh-D)  moistened 
promptly  maturity  certify  apparent  preparatory 
catalogue  household  fault  blankets  correspond 
random  clapboards  stencilled  bundles  mouldings 
handle  rectify  unavoidable  inevitable  holders 
hardware  ingredients  adulterate  saturate  deterio- 
rate implement  duplicate  innocent  appetite 
polite  lantern  fatal  bait  medium  deduct 
piquant  horrified  on-account-of  iu-regard  shade 
kindle  diseased  figured  muzzled  editorial  terri- 
tory code  whistled  dedication  antique  planted 
associate  acquired  gait  traded  discomfort  bel- 
lowed unreconciled  contribute  command  boat 
recumbent  misconduct  comment  accommodate 
coat  recommend  outstanding  in-respect  read 
unwonted  erect  miscompute  incontinent  unre- 
warded fate  abdominal  examined  showed 

(317)       HALF-LENGTH    WORD-SIGNS  — 
GROUP  VI. : 


accord-ing 

cared 

accurate,  cured 

authority 

third 

throughout 

gentlemen 
gentleman 
agent 


astonish-ment 
c.stabliah-ment 


preliminary 

.parallel 

Parliament 


STKT    XIV  ] 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


157 


Learning  the  word-signs  in  groups  assists  to  a  firm 
recollection  of  them,  both  by  the  contrast  and  the 
association.  It  is  important  for  the  student  to  devote 
a  portion  of  the  time  each  day  to  the  study  of  word- 
signs. 

(:'>18)       MISCELLANEOUS     HALF-LENGTH 
WORD-SIGNS  — IX.  : 


quite 

v     seldom 

-^  —  somewhat  (summat) 

-^—  under,  hand 

^ 

s 

Immediate 

behind 

_k_evident 

J  toward 

private 

virtue 

C 

little 

world 

r     hold,  held 

°~3    fje^ond  ''"ns^iuent 

intellect 

(x'    certain 

notwithstanding 

intelligent 

vj- 

integrity 

—  -V  department 

j^.  —  word 

^     compreliend 

<-^ 

individual 

^     movenifint 

_l_defendant 

_i_  plaintiff 

158 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


[STKT  xiv. 


(319)     HALF-LENGTH    PHRASES: 


.in-order 
-it-would  (-bad) 
•in-it 


Js-it 

_k_nave-not 

. \vhich-wd-be 

.if-it 

coulcl-not-be 


_rrl<lid-not-kiiow 


.[-have-not 
.we-are-not 


of -it 

it-would-be 
•*- — as-it 

o 

if-not 

/ which-would  (-had) 

£ — was-not 

if-it-i.s-not 

would-not-have 


^i 

_v_y  not-only 
_J__it-will-not 


were-uot 


aiul-of-the 


(3-20)     READING  EXERCISE: 

\\  (V  /^l 

\.      <       ^~~$     I      (    VD  /  o 
I                 ^     j       ^. 


Si 


/-f 


STKP    XIV.]  I'UACTICAI,    SHORTHAND. 


159 


V 


v    r   -          Sry  c 


U 


--M 


>, 


V 


v  L  ^   -if 


\ 


160  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKI1    XIV 

\ 


/I 


(321)      SPEED  PRACTICE: 

The  theory  and  practice  of  phonographic  writing  aie 
not  of  themselves  very  complicated ;  but  the  element 
of  speed  required  somewhat  involves  the  process.  In 
the  operations  of  life,  we  do  readily  that  which  we 
know  perfectly  and  have  done  many  times.  The 
speed  of  shorthand  consists  in  performing  with  facility 
what  the  mind  has  been  educated  to  conceive  and 
the  hand  trained  to  execute.  Discipline  is  highly  im- 
portant (and  stern  discipline  at  that)  ;  for  it  does  not 
signify  that  what  can  be  written  slowly  can  likewise 
be  written  fast.  Haste  confuses  the  faculties  :  hence 
it  is  necessary  that  the  intellect  be  cultivated  to  a  tinr 
degree,  and  the  lingers  made  extremely  skillful  before 
rapid  writing  can  ensue. 

As  some  writer  has  said,  speedy  shorthand  writing 
is  simply  executing  rapidly  what  we  know 
how  to  do :  and  that  is  no  doubt  the  truth  of  it. 


STEP    XIV.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  101 

(322)     COMMON  WORDS: 

As  a  preliminary  to  more  varied  speed  practice,  writing 
and  reading  exercise  should  be  had  upon  the  following 
simple  words  until  all  can  be  Avritteu  without  the  least 
hesitation  and  at  a  good  rate  of  speed  :  — 

All  am  an  and  any  are  as  at  be  but 
by  can  did  do  for  get  go  had  has  he 
her  him  his  how  if  in  is  it  may  me  my 
no  nor  not  now  of  on  or  our  out  own 
she  so  the  to  two  us  was  we  who  why 
will  yes  yet  you 

After  been  come  done  down  during  ever 
from  have  here  into  made  make  many  might 
more  most  mine  much  never  often  only  over 
some  same  such  that  them  then  than  this 
thus  they  upon  unto  very  were  with  what 
whom  when  your 

(323)  About     among     already     always     because 
before     behind     beyond     could     every    either    how- 
ever     neither      never     other     ought      shall      should 
since      their      there      these      those      though      where 
which       whose      within       whether       under       unless 
until     without     would     whence 

Begin  care  far  fill  feel  full  God  good 
give  great  Heaven  hope  just  know  kind  life 
like  little  Lord  love  man  near  one  people 
part  quite  right  see  send  tell  thank  thing 
think  told  truth  time  use  usual  way  went 
wish  word  world  work  whole 

(324)  Previous  to  the  introduction  of  halving  fast 
writing  has  been  out  of  the  question,  except  upon  the 
special  matter  designated  ;    but  now  that  most  of  the 


162  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP    \  I V . 

abbreviating  principles  have  been  applied,  more  prac- 
tice for  speed  will  be  appropriate,  though  even  now 
it  would  be  better  to  confine .  it  to  only  the  tasks 
specified. 

The  student  should  receive  dictations  as  a  part  of 
the  daily  duty,  a  portion  of  which  should  be  at  a  rate 
a  little  faster  than  can  be  comfortably  performed. 
After  each  writing  carefully  examine  the  work,  and 
note  where  haste  has  clogged  the  memory,  outstripped 
the  reasoning  faculties,  and  so  impaired  the  legibility ; 
and  repair  the  fault  at  next  writing. 

The  same  matter  written  many  times  will 
produce  better  results  than  to  frequently 
change  to  new. 

The  requirements  of  rapid  writing  develop  such 
latent  strength  as  the  student  may  possess,  and  the 
teacher  can  decide  whether  it  is  wise  to  continue  the 
practice.  The  reading  of  such  notes  discloses  to  the 
writer  every  weakness,  and  the  faithful  in  self-criticism 
will  derive  much  good  from  the  lesson. 

Our  advice  is  to  confine  for  the  present  all  fast 
dictation  to  the  sentences  and  letters  thus  far  presentl-d 
in  the  Steps.  They  contain  the  fundamental  elements 
of  language,  as  well  as  of  shorthand,  and  will  be 
found  adequate. 

Speed  practice  which  is  fast  travelling  in  the  direc- 
tion of  error  is  of  no  particular  value ;  for  faults  of 
execution  cause  illegibility,  and  illegible  writing  has 
no  practical  utility,  the  time  given  to  heedless  scrib- 
bling being  time  worse  than  wasted.  Moderate,  well- 
considered  writing  produces  good  work ;  and  good 
work  persisted  in  leads  naturally  to  a  swift  perform- 
ance. The  idea  of  repetition  is  an  excellent  one,  and 
is  always  prolific  of  better  results  than  the  aimless 
haste  and  frequent  changes  to  new  matter  which  so 
often  characterize  speed  practice. 


STEI'    XVI.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  103 

(325)  COMMONPLACE    MATERIAL     FOR 

SPEED  PRACTICE: 

These  sentences,  being  composed  of  the  common  words 
(which  are  the  scdles  of  typewriting),  furnish  the  best 
possible  practice  upon  the  writing  machine.  Transcribe 
them  from  the  shorthand  notes  for  an  exercise  in  type- 
Avriting :  — 

Where  were  the  other  two?  "What  will  you  have, 
and  what  shall  we  do?  Can  that  be  so?  Come  over 
when  you  can.  They  were  beyond  you.  Before  you 
made  this.  About  every  one  can  come.  Now,  then, 
here  we  are!  How  can  they  do  it?  Some  of  them 
were  mine.  From  whence  do  you  come?  What  will 
you  do  about  it?  Have  you  ever  been  there?  He 
would  not  be  here  without  her.  Would  you  make  two 
more  for  me?  She  has  always  been  behind  you.  It 
might  have  been  well.  Can  you  do  this  for  me? 
What  can  he  do  about  it  unless  they  all  come?  That 
was  made  here  while  you  were  out.  They  were  there, 
yet  we  did  not  see  them. 

(326)  It  will  do  no  good   because  always  in  the 
way.     It  is  not  mine  to  give.     You  will  never  know 
until  the  time  comes.     Think  a  little  before  you  begin. 
Do  great  good  in  such  way  as  you  can,  for  you  have  a 
work  none  other  can  do.     Tell  me  when  you  send  it 
to  her.     You  begin,  and  the  others  will  do  the  same. 
Wli:it  can  we  do  for  the  Lord?     They  went  out  of  the 
usual  way.     Make  good  use  of  your  time.     We  will 
see  what  can  be  done  about  it.     She  will  give  you  as 
much  as  you  ought  to  have.      All  the  people  came 
from  there.     They  tell  what  they  can  do,  but  never  do 
it.     They  did  ilot  think  of  it  in  time  to  do  any  good. 
Why  do  you  always  send  the  goods  that  way?     This 
is  the  last  time  I  shall  have  you  do  it.      How  much  can 
be  done  in  the  time  that  is  given  you?     Why  did  you 
not  send  it  out  to  me?     Life  is  what  we  make  it. 


164  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKT    XIV. 

(.">27)  How  do  you  feel  about  doing  the  work? 
We  will  always  thank  (lod  for  the  work  they  have 
done.  Were  you  there,  aud  did  you  see  me?  They 
sent  far  and  near  for  them.  Life  is  full  of  hope,  so 
work  with  a  will.  God  is  near  unto  them  that  love 
Him.  She  did  not  know  whether  to  go  or  not.  We 
thank  you  very  much  for  the  good  time  we  had. 
Neither  of  them  told  the  truth.  They  feel  as  if  they 
did  not  care  to  go.  To  whom  did  he  give  his  word? 
They  think  they  know  the  whole  truth  about  it.  He 
did  the  most  of  anyone.  It  was  a  good  thing  to  begin 
that  way.  Do  the  same  as  you  did  before.  I  shall 
not  send  it  unless  it  is  good.  Who  told  you  that  it 
was  so?  It  will  soon  be  time  to  begin  your  work. 
I  have  not  seen  you  since  that  time.  Ought  they  to 
begin  the  thing  that  way?  Send  me  wofd  when  you 
can  come.  When  you  see  this  you  will  think  of  me. 
There  is  much  beyond  this  world.  It  shall  always 
be  a  part  of  this  life.  It  is  time  to  go  now.  Do  unto 
others  as  you  would  that  they  should  do  to  you. 

1  shall  go  up  and  see  him  some  time  when  I  am 
well.  We  should  always  do  as  good  work  as  we  can. 
Is  there  anything  I  can  do  for  you?  I  have  already 
done  what  you  wished  me  to  do.  Think  you  can  do 
it,  and  it  is  done.  Of  course  we  did  not  see  him,  for 
he  was  not  there.  If  he  does  not  go,  I  do  not  know 
what  we  will  do.  If  I  could  get  one  more,  it  would 
be  enough.  We  cannot  tell  all  the  good  we  might  do 
here  in  this  world. 

(328)     DICTATION  LETTER: 

Dear  Sir : 

There  is  but  one  thing  for  me  to  say  of  the  "Perfect" 
typewriter  (TTliuhlluh).  It  more  nearly  fulfils  my  idea  of 
what  a  machine  (23)  that  takes  the  place  of  the  pen  ought 


STKP    XIV.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  1G5 

to  do  than  any  that  has  ever  been  invented.  It  does  not 
stand  between  (45)  the  brain  and  the  sheet  of  paper  as  a 
dead  instrument;  you  forget  the  machine  in  your  work,  and 
there  is  no  impediment  (68)  to  the  rapid  expression  of  the 
thought,  or  any  restriction  upon  the  action  of  the  mind. 

It  has  other  and  great  merits  (90) ;  but  I  value  it  chiefly 
because  I  can  sit  down  to  its  keyboard  and  do  my  work 
with  the  same  forgetfulness  in  rapid  (23)  writing  that  one 
has  of  the  pen  which  he  holds  in  the  fingers.  The  machine 
is  forgotten  while  you  write  ;  and  yet  (45)  after  confinement 
at  the  "  Perfect"  for  four  or  five  hours  in  succession  I  have 
arisen  from  my  seat  with  far  less  fatigue  in  mind  ((!8)  and 
body  than  comes  from  the  continuous  use  of  the  pen  for 
that  length  of  time.  In  this  respect  it  meets  with  (180) 
great  success  the  needs  of  those  who  wish  to  use  the  type- 
writer for  original  composition. 

I  have  grown  to  like  my  machine  so  (23)  much  that  I 
never  use  a  pen  in  writing,  unless  it  is  absolutely  necessary  ; 
and  I  am  more  and  more  satisfied  that  (45)  the  typewriter 
is  the  only  instrument  that  can  be  used  successfully  by 
those  who  are  called  upon  to  do  much  rapid  and  original 
literary  work  (70). 

Yours  truly, 
(250  words.) 

The  student  should  not  consider  it  a  hardship  in 
speed  practice  to  devote  very  great  patience  to  repeti- 
tion. Select  matter  of  literary  merit,  at  least  some- 
thing that  contains  a  variety  of  words,  and  practice 
upon  the  same  piece  until  it  can  be  written  without 
hesitation.  Remember,  though,  to  write  wM  is  of  more 
importance  than  to  write  swiftly ;  and  that  thought 
should  always  be  a  check  upon  a  reckless  tendency  in 
rapid  writing. 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS— STEP  XIV.: 

What  may  be  said  of  halving  in  common  with  other 
abbreviating  principles?  How  should  the  shortening  prin- 
ciple be  employed?  Can  syllabic  writing  always  accompany 
halving?  How  are  similar  words  distinguished  ofttimes? 
Is  variety  of  form  a  matter  of  random  writing?  What  fea- 


166  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   XIV. 

tnres  must  be  attended  to?  (Analogy,  Direction  of  Strokes, 
etc.)  Why  analogy?  Why  direction  of  strokes?  Why  is 
halving  termed  a  fickle  principle?  Can  the  words  redeem, 
detail,  potato,  protect,  intend,  anticipate,  etc.,  be  written  syl- 
labically?  Then  why  distort  them  for  the  sake  of  halving? 
Is  a  brief  form  always  preferable  to  an  extended  one?  Then 
why  do  many  of  the  best  writers  use  comparatively  extended 
and  fluent  outlines?  Isn't  it  after  all  a  matter  of  tempera- 
ment or  taste  on  the  part  of  the  writer?  (Somewhat.) 

How  are  some  words  in  this  Step  distinguished  from 
others  of  like  consonant  elements?  What  other  instance  of 
implying  the  vowel  by  manipulation  of  the  consonant  have 
you  observed  in  this  manual?  When  is  it  good  judgment 
not  to  halve?  How  are  compounds  of  time  and  take  indi- 
cated? What  does  this  resemble?  (The  word-sign  for  time, 
i.e.,  M —  used  by  some  Graham  writers.) 

Why  is  upward-H  used  much  more  in  advanced  writing 
than  in  the  early  stages?  When  downward-R  is  not  fluent, 
what  is  to  be  done?  How  would  you  write  rarer,  merrii-r, 
terrier? 

Why  is  not  F-Tn  a  good  outline  for  fortune?  When  are 
L,  M,  N,  R  shaded  to  add  D?  When  not?  How  are  vi<-l,l 
and  yield  written  in  this  manual?  Need  strokes  W  and  Y 
ever  be  halved?  What  other  widened  character  is  next  to 
never  halved?  Is  it  wise  to  halve  a  stroke  beginning  with 
Rel?  How  would  the  word  brilliant  look  if  the  outline  was 
halved?  What  other  like  situations  do  not  admit  of  halving? 
How  would  seasoned,  fashioned  look  if  the  outline  was 
halved  ? 

How  are  the  group  word-signs  learned  ?  How  many  word- 
signs  have  you  entered  in  your  little  "  knowledge-book"  to 
date? 

Why  is  shorthand  difficult  to  write  rapidly?  What  does 
swift  writing  really  mean?  How  many  operations  are  in- 
volved in  the  act?  How  can  great  facility  of  writing  be 
attained?  What  is  haste  likely  to  occasion?  How  should 
dictation  now  be  given?  What  matter  is  suitable  for  dic- 
tation at  this  stage?  Is  variety  of  material  necessary;' 
What  does  the  demand  for  rapid  work  develop  in  the  writer? 
What  does  reading  the  notes  disclose?  What  does  the  ina- 
bility to  read  betray?  What  will  self-criticism  accomplish? 

Can  you  write  every  common  word  and  every  common- 
place sentence  given  in  Step  XIV.  as  swiftly  as  the  fingers 
can  move  the  pen? 


STEP  XV.]  PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  167 

STEP  XV. 

THE  LENGTHENING  PRINCIPLE: 

(329)  Writing  a  stroke  twice  its  ordinary  length 
may  bo  considered  to  mean  the  addition  of  the  syllable 
ter,  der  or  ther  (or  other,  there,  their  in  phrases). 

mother        father          matter  wonder        whether        order 


(330)  The  lengthening  principle  applies  more  par- 
ticularly to  curves,  though  straight  strokes  may  be  so 
treated  to  a  limited  extent ;  as 

rather          reporter    brother      chapter    typewriter       conductor 


\ 


(331)     An  n  or  shun-hook  can  be  read  after  the 
power  of  the  lengthening  ;   as 

return    moderation    pattern         modern        eastern        federation 


168  INSTKUCTIOX   IX  [STKI'    XV. 

(332)       Lengthening*  adds  ker  or  ger  to  ing;  or 
er  to  emp  or  emb  ;  as 


anchor  longer          anger       temper        lumber        December 


(333)  It  conduces  to  legibility  to  exaggerate  the 
stroke  as  above  to  a  trifle  more  than  double  length ; 
but  employ  the  principle  with  discretion,  like  any 
shorthand  material.  It  seems  almost  ridiculous  to 
write  like  the  first  line  below  :  — 


minister  rostrum  nostrils  intrinsic  federal 

V 


when  the  last  are  more  in  accord  with  analogy  and 
syllabication.  A  doubtful  gain  in  speed  does  not  com- 
pensate for  an  involved  mental  operation. 


*  The  theory  of  this  is  to  maintain  the  widened  form;  but 
the  tendency  among  practical  writers  is  to  execute  a  light 
line  when  such  lengthening  occurs  in  a  compound  form  ; 
as 

chamber          timber  September  cucumber  scamper 


STKP    XV.] 


PRACTICAL    SIIOHTHAND. 


1G9 


(334)     SOME  OUTLINES  NOT    LENGTHENED: 

.harder  (ardor) 


Arthur 


laundry 


(335)     The  lengthening  principle  is  also  especially 
useful  for  phrasing  :  — 


have-their 


\v       If-t.here 

••'VLL 

•  '      when-there 
(wlien-they-are) 

jn-there 

.^ 

another  one 
«  ^               (no-other-one) 

*^"^     ,    ..rather-than 

* 
in-other-words 

C^"*^^       where-tliere-is 

c 

~~\            further-thau 
\        .     (from-their-own) 

<f~    *"**^.        some-other-reason 

(330)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

Letter  confederation  render  another  center 
operator  when-there  exporter  entire  (w.s. ;  see  list 
of  Part  III.)  further  writer  enter  elevator  ma- 
terial (w  s.)  return-mail  think- there  Easter 


170 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


[STEP  xv. 


Chamber- (of) -Commerce  oyster  halter  hinder 
some-reason- (or)-other  smother  speculator  your- 
letter- received  disorder  literary  shoulder  water- 
proof as- (a) -matter- (of) -fact  stockholder  Walter 
bondholder  receipt- (of  )-your-letter  conspirator 
northern  brother-in-law  thither  veteran  enterprise 
(Xt-Prs)  spatter  squander  palter  calendar 
psaltery  Alexander  bother  up- there  Flanders 
in-this-matter  zither  out-there  handkerchief 
among-others  copy-holder  letter- (of) -credit  astern 

(337)     MULTIPLICATION  TABLE: 

Illustrating  hundred-groups  of  the  Smith  method  of 
figure  writing,  and  showing  when  to  use  the  circle-S  as  a 
convenient  junction  :  — 


j 


r 


i 


J 


0? 


f 


e_ 


H. 


S 


u 


H. 


s 


\ 


JL 


0? 


vl 


V 


\ 


STEP   XV.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  171 

PREFIXES  AND  AFFIXES: 

(338)  The  parts  of  words,  whether  syllabic  or 
otherwise,  furnish  situations  for  the  application  of 
shorthand  principles.  This  maybe  reiteration;  but 
it  cannot  be  too  strongly  impressed  upon  the  atten- 
tion of  the  student. 

Whenever  these  situations  are  frequently  recurring, 
the  more  needful  it  is  that  the  special  treatment  should 
be  simple  and  well  understood,  in  order  to  be  quickly 
applied.  The  Prefixes  and  Affixes  are  common  to 
many  words,  and  are  quite  uniform  as  regards  outline 
structure. 

(339)      PREFIXES: 

Many  prefixes  like  ab,  ad,  de,  dis,  ex,  sub,  are  repre- 
sented by  such  simple  syllabic  shorthand  material  as 
to  call  for  but  casual  mention. 

Exceedingly  common  prefixes  are  the  compound 
forms  1'oncom,  decom,  discom,  discon,  incog,  incon, 
incom,  incum,  irrecon,  miscom,  miscon,  noncom,  non- 
con,  rerot/,  recon,  recom,  recum,  uncon,  uncom,  unac- 
com,  unrecog,  vnrecom,  unrecon,  selfcon,  which  are 
denoted  by  disjoining  the  sign  of  the  first  syllable  of 
the  prefix,  as  illustrated  in  Sect.  148.*  The  student 
should  be  already  familiar  with  this  situation. 

(340)     Other  special  Prefix  signs  are  for 
Circum  — denoted   by    a   small   circle  written   in 
vowel  fashion  near  the  first  stroke  of  the  remainder 
of   the   outline.        Self — is    indicated    similarly   and 
sometimes  joined. 

*  Comic,  conic  (See  Sect.  153),  commissary,  concomitant, 
comiti/,  commission,  comrade,  condone,  commerce,  commode, 
connote,  en n n!re.  and  consols,  are  a  few  words  which  arc 
better  written  without  reference  to  this  rule. 


172  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STEP   XV. 

For  and  Fore  —  generally  by  stroke-F  joined, 
though  convenience  rarely  demands  the  employment 
of  F-uR  or  Fr. 

circumference      self-defense        forsake  foremost         forgive 


Inter,  intro  —  by  Nt  joined  (unless  absolutely  im- 
practicable) to  the  remainder  of  the  form. 

Magna-i  —  by  M  written  above  the  rest  of  the 
outline. 

interpose       intermix       introduce  intercept  magnanimous  magnify 


Contra,   contro,   counter  —  by  a    disjoined  tick 
(or  by  halving,  to  save  pen-lifting)  ;   as 

contradict  controvert  counterfeit 

(con-trad-ict)  (con-tro-vert)  (count'feit) 


Per  and  pre.  It  is  deemed  advisable  to  make  a 
distinction  of  form  between  these  very  common  pre- 
fixes, employing  P-Ruh  for  per  (except  in  JHT/HI/)*, 
|wrc/mse,  and  where  P  precedes  M),  and  Pr  for  pre  ; 
as  in 

present         per  cent       pretend       pertained        previous        pervious 

V     V*-     ^      v^j     V 


STK1'    XV.] 


TRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


173 


(341)     Other  less  common  prefixes  which  ordinary 
procedure  will  not  cover,  are 


Arch  by  K 

Astro  "  St-Huh 

Multi  "  M-Luht 

Post  "  1's 

Retro  ' '  Ht-liuh 

Stereo  "  sTr 

Subter  "  sHcl-Itnh 

Super  "  sPr 

Trans  ' '  Trns  or  Trs 

With  "  DT1I 


in  archangel,  architrave,  etc. 

"  astronomy 

"  multiply,  multiform 

"  postpone,  postal  (?) 

"  retrograde,  retrospect 

"  stereotype,  stereoscope 

"  subterfuge.,  subterranean 

"  superficial,  super  excellent 

"  transact,  transfigure 

"  withdraw,  withhold 


The  nomenclature  employed  above  is  simply  that  of 
denoting  the  stroke  by  a  capital  letter,  and  its 
modification  by  lower-case,  nil  is  made  R,  and 
nL  would  be  L. 


(342)     AFFIXES : 

The  affixes  demanding  special  treatment  are  rather 
more  numerous  than  the  prefixes.  Ant,  ent,  ate,  cle, 
/f.s.s  and  mi.rd  are  easily  written.  The  advantage  of 
an  upward  and  downward  form  for  R  and  L  assists  in 
making  legible  art/,  er,  or,  a/,  el  and  Zy.  /Shun,  tii-c 
and  ed  have  been  discussed  in  Step  XII.  ;  good  syl- 
labic rendering  disposes  of  acy  and  OH.S;  w3c'i'i  iiuj 
a  id  f iii/a  were  explained  in  Step  VII. 


174  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STKP   XV. 

(343)  Other  affixes  requiring  arbitrary  manage- 
ment are — 

Bleness,  fulness,  lessness,  someness  —  by 
a  circle  *  (slightly  larger  than  for  ings)  disjoined. 

Ality,  arity,  bility,  cality,  idity,  ology,  perity, 
etc.  —  by  disjoining  (generally)  the  stroke  for  the 
first  sound  of  the  termination  to  be  indicated ;  as 

teachableness     carelessness     wholesomeness     formality     amiability 

)  ^ 

/  , O 


^ 


-A 


zoology  rascality  validity         prosperity      verbosity 

Mental-ity  —  by  Mnt  disjoined. 
Self,  selves  —  by  S  generally  joined. 
Ship  —  by  SH  joined    or   disjoined    according    to 
convenience. 

instrumental-ity  thyself          themselves      friendship    apprenticeship 

<> 


7 

Head,  hood  —  by  D  joined. 

Worthy  —  by  DTH  joined  or  disjoined. 

manhood  womanhood      girlhood    Godh'd   fountain-h'd  praiseworthy 


*  •  )s»oodby  employs  a  disjoined  Bis,  Fs  or  Ls  (3d  position)  , 
for  bleness,  fulness  or  lessness. 


STKP    XV.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  475 

(•'HI)    Ture    (allix   are)  — by  Tr  joined ;   as 
torture  culture  literature  lecture          pasture 


-f»/v  is  not  regularly  included  in  the  common  lists 
of  postfixes  ;  but  in  the  mechanics  of  syllabic  writing 
it  deserves  a  place  with  the  stereotyped  forms. 

(345)     JUDGMENT    IN    OUTLINE  BUILDING: 

An  entertaining  class-room  exercise  is  found  in 
giving  a  consensus  of  opinion  upon  the  outlines  of 
words  which  may  be  submitted.  Often  five  or  six 
forms  can  be  suggested  for  a  single  word,  though  but 
one  of  the  number  is  superior  to  the  rest,  either  in 
fluency,  angles,  analogy,  syllabication,  or  a  happy 
combination  of  all  these  necessary  features.  The 
reasoner  Avho  knows  the  best  when  it  is  exhibited  is 
the  student  who  is  on  the  high  road  to  success  in 
writing  good  shorthand.  If  any  doubt  exists,  it  is  the 
part  of  the  teacher  to  explain  why  a  certain  rendering 
is  to  be  preferred,  and  how  it  must  be  a  matter  of 
knowledge  and  judgment  in  the  management  of  ma- 
terial. The  argument  might  be  advanced  that  the 
elasticity  of  shorthand  grants  a  wide  freedom  of  option 
in  respect  to  outline  formation.  Not  wholly  so;  it 
is  choice  regulated  by  fixed  requirements.  A  careful 
reading  of  some  of  the  contents  of  Part  III.  will 
convince  of  this. 

Closely  related  to  the  idea  of  exercising  discretion 
in  the  building  of  shorthand  is  the  liberty  given  of 
writing  alternate  shapes  for  some  of  the  aflixes.  Good 
judgment  on  the  part  of  the  writer  in  this  connection 
leads  to  the  quick  achievement  of  the  best  results. 


I'll  INSTRUCTION    IN  -il.f    XV. 

(346)  Note  the  alternate  forms  presented  for  (lie 
following  cases,  the  selection  to  be  obedient  to  the 
demand  of  convenience  of  joining  :  — 


Vie, 
Kiit, 

Kst, 

Fall 

bly,    by  151  or  15     as  . 

"  Nt  or  nt     " 

\ 

V 

\ 

s 

ist  *     "  St  or  stuh" 

{_ 

e* 

fore   "  F  or  F-R    " 

^\ 

.fully"  F,  Florf  " 

e  3 

y 

\ 

Ment,          "  Miit  or  Nt  " 

t 

Tt 

i  >IX/  I'll  III  1'  lit. 

Ness 

,  :in  <•<•  .1  •!><•<•  Ns  or  ns" 

c  —  * 

-  } 

nchii  i-i  im  nt 
i',/n  fii!iu  us,  iritiu-.-i.* 

(347)     READING  EXERCISE : 


*  St  for  est,  ist  may  be  written  upward  if  convenience   ' 
requires,    as    in    the    words  fusionist,    closest,    opinionistt 


8IT.1'   XV.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 

(348)     COMPOUND  FORMS: 


177 


.upward 

.backward 

.outward  (orT-Rd) 

.downward  (or  Dn-Rd) 

.understand 

.underwent 

.undersigned 


(349)     ELSE-PHRASES  AND  OTHERS: 


-somethiug-else 
-someone. else 
-anything-else 
.anywhere-else 


-2 or-else 

_£ what-else  (S 


it-is-not-necessary 

on-the-contrary 

for-instance 

by-soine-uieans 
for-example 


!  (Sec  §360). 

-{--•       I  lt.ni.-«-?is.fliiniMli 


—  some-how 

f  or-(the)-sake-of 


178  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STIC!'    XV. 

(350)     WRITING  EXERCISE  : 

Christianity  pomposity  despondency  physiology 
fundamental  theology  popularity  instability  faith- 
lessness incognito  selfish  questionableness  self- 
hood  mindfulness  uncontrolled  interchange 
magnesia  misconduct  magnificent  wheresoever 
inability  friability  preferment  foretaste  self-will 
interrupt  unselfish  endowment  self-love  ductility 
nomenclature  picture  forewarn  forfeit  self- 
reliance  forget  Legislature  forsooth  decomposition 
recumbent  forswear  introspection  international 
incumbent  interjacent  intermediate  counteract 
accompaniment  interval  countermand  archbishop 
intervene  post-ollice  stereotyped  multitude  inter- 
vale asteroid  counterpoint  postman  subtrahend 
supersede  withstand  transform  superhuman 
withal  supernatural  mature  unreasonableness 

(;5f>l)     WRITING   EXERCISE: 

It  matters  not  whether  you  or  Walter  wish  to-go  to- 
the  theater  with- me,  for  I  shall  take  neither  of  you. 
The-telegraph  operator  was-a  fellow-conspirator  with- 
those- concerned  in-the  strike.  It-is-no-wouder  that-a 
slender  thread  of  criticism  renders  modern  society 
tender  on-the  subject-of  slander.  It-is-most  in- 
competent and-incomprehensible  testimony,  and- we 
object  to- the  evidence.  The-evil  was  neither  supra- 
mundane  or  subterranean,  but  right  iu-our  midst. 
Contradiction  has-a  different  meaning  from  coittni'lix- 
ti  aft  ion.  The-interview  was  of-little  interest  to  me 
because-the  interrogations  of-the  interviewer  were-not 
intelligible.  "Onward  and-upward "  shall-be-our 
watchword  ever.  Though  it- was  calm  to-the  leeward, 
yet,  with  a  squall  occasionally  to-the  windward,  the- 


STK1'    XV.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  179 

"  sqiuire-riggor "  proceeded  swiftly  cm-its  eastward 
passage,  outward  bound.  The-cowardly  troops  of- 
the  queen  went  backward  and-forward,  inward  and- 
outward,  in  awkward  evolutions.  Boyhood  a-id- 
inauhood,  girlliood-and  womanhood,  are  successive 
periods  of  human  life.  The-snail  withdraws  within 
its  shell,  withholding  its  head  and  horns,  the-better  to 
withstand  the-enemy.  General  literature,  with-an  oc- 
casional lecture  on  Culture,  improved  this  interesting 
creature  wonderfully.  "  Mr.  President,  I  shall  enter 
on  no  encomium  upon  Massachusetts.  She  needs  none. 
There  she  is.  Behold  her  and  judge  for  yourself. 
There-is  her  history.  The- world  knows  it  by  heart." 
We-may  apprehend  God  and-His  works,  while  we- 
may-not  comprehend  Him.  The-comrades  connived 
to-have  the-commission  of-the  commissary  cancelled. 
Conic  sections  exhibit  either  perfect  circles,  comical 
ellipses,  oblate  curves,  or  frustums,  according  to  the 
way  the  figure  is  intersected  by  the  instrument  of 
cleavage. 

*  I  wonder  how  such  a  tender  and  slender  stalk  can 
support  so  large  a  flower  as  the  crysanthemum.     The 
number  of  wonderful  modern  inventions  of  high  order 
is  rather  bewildering.     Neither  his  mother  nor  father 
would  say  one  word  in  favor  of  moderate  drinking. 

The-prosecuting  attorney  recommended  the-release 
of-the  prisoner  on-his-own  recognizance.  His  self- 
conceit  was  self-evident,  and-enabled  him  to  retain 
complete  self-possession  under-the-most  trying  cir- 
cumstances. His  thoughtlessness,  carelessness  and- 
listlessness  will  hinder  his  success  iu-any  branch  of 
industry.  The-phrenologist,  mineralogist,  chronolo- 
gist,  physiologist,  philologist  aud-theologian  were 
diiscussing-the  genealogy  of-the  etymologist  in-the 
zoological  garden. 

*  See  foot  uote,  page  54. 


180  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STKP    XV. 

(352)     MODEL   LETTER  FOR   COPYING    AM) 
DICTATION : 

This  letter  is  written  in  an  offhand  style  of  short- 
hand, and  is  a  model  only  as  to  form  —  not  of  ^vo- 
metric  outlines.  It  is  a  fair  sample  of  a  page  of 
notes  written  very  much  as  they  should  be  in  the 
actual  business  of  amanuensis  work  :  — 


STKI'    XV.] 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


181 


(353)  Or  it  may  be  that  the  stenographer  is  ac- 
customed to  "take"  letters  involving  accounts,  and 
can  arrange  the  dictation  in  debit  and  credit  fashion 
as  he  writes.  If  so,  the  following  would  illustrate  the 
form  of  letter.  At  all  events  it  should  be  typewritten 
in  this  latter  form,  and  must  sooner  or  later  take  that 
shape  in  his  mind  :  — 


V 


V^J 


k~~\  I 


"/i  li/i 


yu 

/  or 


>v 


182  INSTRUCTION   IX  [STKP    XV. 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS  — STEP   XV.: 

What  does  lengthening  a  stroke  denote?  To  what  kind 
of  strokes  does  lengthening  more  particularly  apply?  What 
does  the  double-length  stand  for  besides  -ter,  -der  or  -ther? 
To  what  extent  are  straight  strokes  lengthened?  How 
would  lantern  be  written?  What  does  lengthening  add  to 
iNG?  To  Mb  or  Mp?  What  is  the  outline  for  the  word 
numerator?  When  may  shading  be  dispensed  with  in  con- 
nection with  these  strokes?  Should  the  lengthening  prin- 
ciple always  be  employed?  Name  a  few  words  it  need  not 
apply  to.  Why  not  employed  for  these  words?  What  else 
is  lengthening  desirable  for? 

What  does  the  circle-S  stand  for  in  the  multiplication 
table?  Is  it  always  used  in  hundred-groups?  When  may 
it  be  omitted?  When  is  it  indispensable? 

What  is  a  prefix?  Are  they  numerous?  Therefore  how 
should  they  be  denoted?  Do  the  common  ones  call  for  par- 
ticular comment?  Why  not?  Does  th'e  management  of  <•««- 
com,  uncon,  recom,  etc.,  present  any  difficulties?  Name  one 
or  two  words  containing  con  or  com  that  are  written  other- 
wise than  with  the  dot.  What  few  prefixes  have  special 
treatment?  What  two  ways  of  writing  contra,  contro  or 
counter  are  suggested?  What  advantage  (if  any)  has  the 
second  way?  Is  it  important  to  make  a  distinction  between 
per-  and  pre-9  How  would  permanent  and  pre-eminait.  be 
written?  What  is  the  outline  for  multiplication,  vitlml, 
post-office? 

What  is  an  affix?  Does  syllabic  treatment  dispose  of  a 
great  many  of  them?  Is  it  ever  advisable  to  Avrite  the 
termination  shun  other  than  the  usual  way?  Have  you  a 
firm  conviction  as  to  writing  -ed?  How  would  you  write 
locomotive,  charmingly,  asperity,  posterity,  frigidity,  >•»/- 
ciability?  In  selecting  one  from  many  possible  outlines  of 
a  word,  what  should  govern  the  decision?  How  should  :i 
dictation  of  figure  matter  appear  on  the  note-book? 


STEP   XVI.]  I'UACTIC.YL    SIIOKTHAN'l).  183 

STEP  XVI. 

FURTHER  EXPEDIENTS  : 

(3")4)  In  addition  to  the  advantages  of  short 
phrases  for  the  representation  by  hooks  of  the  words 
<tll,  in'/l,  own,  than,  ercr,  lnir<>,  etc.,  previously  illus- 
trated,—  and  besides  the  tricks  of  sign  and  outline 
manipulation  that  have  heretofore  been  presented  in 
their  proper  relations  (as  we  contend), — there  are 
other  expedients  resorted  to  by  the  expert  writer  to 
still  further  elaborate  the  art.  It  may  be  readily  in- 
ferred that  ingenuity  can  be  exerted  in  this  direction  ; 
but  unlimited  freedom  of  fancy  would  be  dangerous, 
and  a  selection  is  therefore  made  of  those  which  in 
our  judgment  belong  to  a  work  on  practical  shorthand. 

(355)     I     PHRASED. 

I  is  phrased  initially  to  other  forms  by  joining  a 
P,  ('II  or  T-tick,  according  to  convenience,  the  phrase 
beginning  in  the  lirst  position. 

T-ain  1  know         I-believe        I-can-be        I  bave    I-bave-been 

^-^          ^  \>  L_=  o  u 

The  writer  confesses  to  never  having  had  much  use 
for  the  I-phrases ;  and  the  reason  ascribed  is  this : 
The  words  lie  and  flic,  occur  ten.  thnex*  as  often  as  /, 
and  the  oblique  ticks  become  more  naturally  identified 
with  them  than  with  /.  And  appears  in  writing  over 
Jii'i'  time*  *  as  often  as  7,  and  therefore  the  T-tick  stands 

*  See  jiol.e,  (mire  Is. 


184  INSTRUCTION   IX  [STKP    XVI. 

for  and  with  unquestionable  propriety.  At  the  same 
time  the  enthusiastic  phrasier  may  with  judgment  cm- 
ploy  the  ticks  in  phrases  for  7;  as  also  may  the 
stenographer  who  reads  easily  his  swiftest  notes. 

(356)  In  situations  where  lengthening  is  not  feasi- 
ble, there  can  be  denoted  by  wjiat  is  termed  the  thr- 
tick.  This  tick  disjoined  serves  for  the  termination 
-ingly. 

siuce-there       down-there        can-there     out-of-their          longingly 


(357)  Of-the  is  often  denoted  by  proximity,  as 

time-of-the-day  day-of-the-week  man-of-the-world 

|3— 

(358)  Notwithstanding  the   above,    and   the   fact 
that  proximity  also  denotes  con,  com  or  cog  within 
a  word,  the    stenographer  is  in   rare   instances  com- 
pelled to  dissect  an  outline  to  insure  legibility.     Such 
breaking  up  of  the  form  is  commonly  at  the  junction 
of  a  prefix  or  aftix,  or  between  the  parts  of  compound 
forms,  and  is  resorted  to  because  any  other  procedure 
would    be    faulty.      Note   the   words  —  mono: 
'/K'linuin,    wardrobe,   supernatural,   t'Hjht-kiu't'd, 
natural,  completeness. 

(359)  To  is  quite  often  denoted  by  fourth  posi- 
tion, as  illustrated  in  Sect.   247-3,  and  from  — 

to  — by  close  proximity,  or  by  joining  ;   as 

to-go  from-time-          from-day-  from-generation- 

to-time  to-day  to-generation 


SIT.I'    \VI.J  PRACTICAL    SHOKTHAM).  185 

(3(50)     BRIEF1  WUH  AND  YUH  : 

The  signs   for  n-e,  n-cre,  I/OK   and   your  may  be  in- 
verted for  convenience  in  simple  phrasing  ;   as 

you-havi'  we-can  yon-had      we-remain         sinccrely-your 


'1 

(361)  The  same  signs  may  be  enlarged  to  add  one 
of  the  companion  words,  though  great  care  should  be 
exercised  in  the  use  of  this  material. 

we-were  we-w'd    you-were  you-w'd  what-were  what-w'd    were-we 

c  n  3 

(362)  Dw,  gw,  kw  (qu)  and  tw.  —  This  system 
has  no  special  appendage  or  character  for  these  initial 
digraphs;    and  experienced   writers    ignore    the   Wuh 
sound  for  the  most  part,  writing  tin-ell  D—  L,  quick  K-K, 
Ix'hri'cn  Tn1    (word-sign).     At    the    same  time  such 
neglect  does  in  rare  cases  jeopardize  the  legibility;  and 
it  is  recommended  to  employ  the  brief  wuh  in  conso- 
nant fashion,  or  by  striking  it  across  a  stroke,  like  the 
way  yuh  is  indicated  in  the  words  erroneous  and  lan-ycr 
in  Sect.  145. 

quiescent  Gwendolen  equator  queen  quaff 


(363)  Brief  wuh  and  yuh,  considered  as  consonant 
sounds,  can  be  employed  with  some  freedom  in  outline 
formation  to  assist  legibility  (see  also  Sect.  57,  Step 
III.)  Words  like  idiom,  cornea,  euphony,  opium, 
etc.,  are  made  more  readable  by  the  actual  indication 
of  the  wuh  or  yuh  sign,, 


1*1!  INSTRUCTION    IN  [STK.I'    XVI. 

(364)     OMISSIONS  — OF  SIGNS  FROM 
OUTLINES : 

In  order  to  compass  the  most  fluent  rendering,  a 
better  angle  or  direction  of  stroke  is  sometimes  gained 
by  omitting  a  part  of  the  outline.  Note  the  following 
omissions  :  — 

K  —  in  the  words  attraction , 
book-keeper,  aitsiottx 

T  —  in  custom,  postaar,  postal 

N  —  in  stranger,  transfer,  at- 
tainment 

M — in  commencement,  adorn- 
ment, consignment 

S  —  in  controversy 
bankruptcy 

P — in  Sampson,  consumption,    ^_^            s~-\       / 
jumped  <VX-^ — =-"J — — • 

The  word-sign  lists  exhibit  other  examples,  some  of 
which  are  abbreviated  for  the  reasons  above  given,  and 
others  varied  in  form  to  prevent  conflicts. 

Facility  in  this  kind  of  abbreviation  is  gained  by  ex- 
perience. There  seems  to  be  no  general  rule  for  a  sure 
guidance.  Fluency  is  the  great  aim  ;  and  that  is  at- 
tained by  dropping  this  or  that  stroke  of  the  outline. 
Then  the  next  need  is  for  legibility,  which  is  secured 
if  the  condensed  form  makes  no  conflict  with  any 
other. 

(365)     OMISSIONS  — OF  WORDS  FROM 
PHRASES: 

Unimportant  words  in  phrases  may  be  omitted,  if 
the  remaining  outline  is  as  suggestive  as  it  is  fluent. 


,  I'.fiijfucij,     CX  — f      \ 

\> 


STEP    XVI.]  PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  187 

With  the  exception  of  a  few  instances,  like  those 
of  Sect.  364,  unphrased  outlines  are  commonly  ren- 
dered in  full.  Cases  like  more'n  for  more-than,  our'n 
for  our-oK'n,  are  phrased  in  another  way  (see  Sect. 
244). 

And — from  again-and-again,  more-  ^^^ 

ami-more  — — •*— -s <^v^ 

A  —  from  for-a-moment,  in-such-a-    (  ^-J> 

Vx^~v-i  L D 


The  —  from  for-the-sake-of,  under-    ( 

the-circumstances  —          ? ^f- 


To  —  from  it-seems-to-me,  will-have- 
to-l>e 

Of —  from  as-a-matter-of-fact,JIon>w- 
of- Representatives 

In  —  from  for-instance 


(366)     POSITIVE  AND  NEGATIVE  WORDS  : 

In  a  manual  like  this,  given  up  so  much  to  syllabic 
rendering  of  words,  special  instructions  for  the  forma- 
tion of  the  negative,  as  distinguished  from  the  positive, 
hardly  seems  necessary,  because  the  regular  procedure 
of  the  book  will  serve. 

If  the  negative  prefix  be  in  or  un,  stroke-N  (or  the 
back-hook  in  situations  demanding  it)  furnishes  a  suf- 
ficiently legible  rendering  of  words  like  unbalanced, 
iiiiliijnihi,  unchanged,  insolvent,  etc. ;  while  for  nega- 
tives beginning  with  dis,  im  or  mis,  no  particular 
comment  is  required. 

For  the  prefixes  ille  and  irre  the  precepts  of  Step 
VII.  have  special  force,  and  two  suggestions  may  be 
now  made :  For  beginners  we  would  recommend  the 
writing  of  both  directions  of  the  strokes  L  or  R,  ac- 


188  INSTRUCTION   IN  [STI'-P  XVI. 

cording  to  Sects.  138  and  130;  but  the  advanced  writer 
may  use  the  up-stroke  for  the  initial  syllable  of  the 
positive,  and  the  down-stroke  for  the  negative ;  as 

regular       irregular          legal        illegal    responsible  irresponsible 


(367)     WRITING  EXERCISE: 

Application  post-office  passenger  danger  ap- 
portionment postmark  testify  postman  testimony 
partake  irreligious  overtake  illiberal  somebody 
(sMb-D)  steamboat  immoral  junction  postpone 
Thompson  restless  mistrustful  domestic  boastful 
priestly  devolve  mostly  impure  (Mp-Ruh)  I-am- 
pleased  inherit  I-am-glad  inherent  cynicism  I- 
assure-you  Sawyer  campaign  I- fear-yon- will-be 
I-cannot-say  incandescent  canvas  I-dare-say  im- 
material immortal  irrelevant  stringency  therewith 
assizes  contingency  attempt  impede  from-time- 
to-time  did  n't  you  Uriah  from-year-to-year  in- 
the-first-place  oue-of-the-most  illegitimate  at-the- 
same-time  first-class  Almighty  clumsy  Norwood 
all-sufficient  stubborn  paraphernalia  exemption 
hardware  stupendous  disenchantment 

(368)  SENTENCES  FOR  ILLUSTRATION: 

Great  care  will  have  to  be  taken  in  writing  these  sentences, 
in  order  to  have  the  principles  and  expedients  fully  expressed. 
Hyphens  are  omitted,  and  the  student  expected  to  write  the 
most  condensed  style  without  a  suggestion. 

When  compassed  round  about  by  many  combatants. 
In-regard  to-going  over-there,  would-say  that-it-seems- 
to-be  wholly  out-of-their  minds  to-do- so.  It  is 
necessary  to  reply  in  writing,  and  that  as  soon  :is 
possible.  He  stepped  past  the  stake  and  stood  stock 


BTK1'    XVI.]  ru.VCTICAL    SHORTHAND.  189 

still.  The  steamboat  stopped  at  the  embankment, 
and  the  embezzler  embarked.  We  went  down  there 
to  see  him  in  reference  to  the  matter.  In  response 
to  your  inquiry,  can  say  that  the  contrivance  contains 
a  combustible  compound.  The  odium  of  being  an 
opium  eater  was  disagreeable  enough ;  but  continued 
indulgence  in  it  reduced  him  to  absolute  indigence. 
He  was  not,  as  far  as  known,  cognizant  of  the  fact. 
A  vast  concourse,  in  respect  to  the  fame  of  the 
Commodore,  came  down  to  the  wharf  to  bid  him 
good-bye.  It  is  best  never  to  shun  the  shuu-hook, 
except  in  slione  and  ocean.  In  repeating  the  story  of 
the  adventure,  his  confession  of  complicity  was  so 
interesting  to  all  concerned  in  the  inquiry,  that  they 
compelled  him  to  put  it  in  writing ;  with  which  request 
he  immediately  complied.  Day  unto  day  uttereth 
speech,  and  night  unto  night  showeth  knowledge. 
Headache,  back-ache,  and  ear-ache,  are  all  unpleasant 
bodily  sensations.  What  would  you  reply  if  you 
were  questioned?  He  had  not  run  far  distant  when 
he  began  to  distend  his  cheeks  in  saucy  fashion.  I 
believe  fully  in  a  hereafter — and  in  a  heretofore,  for 
that  matter !  Seize  the  moment  of  excited  curiosity 
for  the  acquisition  of  knowledge.  He  was  suspended 
from  the  order  for  not  paying  his  dues  promptly. 
Mr.  Curtis  was  courteous  at  all  times.  That  ap- 
p:iivnt  anomaly  among  words,  ourself,  is  allied  to  the 
editorial  ice.  The  word  Jig  tire  has  far  different  mean- 
ings in  mathematics,  geometry,  rhetoric,  logic,  sculp- 
ture and  theology.  "Genius  detects  through  many 
species  the  genus,  through  all  genera  the  steadfast 
type,  through  all  the  kingdoms  of  organized  life  —  the 
eternal  unity."  "  Widdy,  widdy,  wen,  wake  cock 
warning."  The  counsel  of  the  consul,  to  console  him, 
concealed  his  real  sentiments.  He  was  bigoted  and 


190  INSTRUCTION    IX  [STKP    XVI. 

arbitrary;  in  other  words,  quite  galvanized  with  Cal- 
vinism. The  fervent  embrace  of  cousin  Charlie  ;it 
the  station  unmistakably  embarrassed  her.  Although 
he  really  owed  the  man,  he  was  not  visibly  awed  by 
the  stern  manner  of  the  creditor  he  was  owing. 


SHORTHAND    PP:NMANSHIP : 

(369)  In  Step  I.  it  was  declared  that  there  was 
a  penmanship  to  shorthand  as  well  as  to  ordinary 
handwriting ;  and  at  this  stage  it  may  be  proper  to 
discuss  the  matter  more  thoroughly,  although  not  to 
the  length  which  it  deserves,  or  to  the  extent  one 
better  qualified  might  venture. 

Position  of  Body.  The  student  should  sit  in  an 
easy  attitude,  with  the  weight  of  the  body  thrown 
slightly  upon  the  left  arm,  so  as  to  grant  perfect 
freedom  of  the  right.  It  goes  without  saving  that 
the  writer  should  not  bend  forward  extremely,  and 
that  the  note-book  should  have  a  convenient  position 
upon  the  table. 

Holding  the  Pen.  In  longhand  writing  all  the 
letters  slope  in  one  direction ;  and  the  writer  having 
decided  upon  a  correct  grasp  of  the  pen  between  the 
fingers,  the  instrument  may  remain  fixed,  and  all  the 
letters  will  be  made  with  facility.  For  such  writing 
a  soft  grasp  of  the  pen  is  required,  and  the.  opposite 
end  of  the  pen-stock  should  point  toward  the  right 
shoulder. 

In  shorthand  writing  the  lines  composing  the 
characters  extend  in  many  directions ;  although  it 
may  be  said  of  correct  stenographic  outlines,  that 
they  are  described  so  as  to  come  within  the  scope  of 


STKI'    XVI.]  I'KACTU'AL    SHOHTIIAND.  191 

tin-  most  lluent  movements  the  pen  is  capable  of  per- 
forming in  such  writing.  For  shorthand  the  pen 
should  be  held  with  the  same  natural  and  easy  grasp 
as  for  longhand ;  but  the  pen-handle  should  point 
out  waul  from  the  shoulder,  because  the  prevailing 
action  of  the  hand  is  to  draw  the  writing  instrument 
rather  than  push  it.  It  may  be  added  with  perfect 
frankness  that  the  opposite  end  of  the  pen-holder 
points  in  many  directions  during  the  progress  of 
writing,  considerable  freedom  being  allowed  in  this 
respect.  Besides  which,  there  is  an  action  of  the 
thumb  in  clever  shorthand  writing  quite  foreign  to 
ordinary  penmanship.  This  may  be  described  as  a 
rolling  of  the  pen-holder,  and  is  required  for  the 
tracing  of  the  shaded  horizontal  signs  (iuh  and  iNG, 
which  demand  considerable  manipulation  of  this  sort, 
while  some  other  strokes  call  for  less  thumb  action  of 
a  similar  nature. 

Movement.  Leaving  the  consideration  of  the 
above,  some  of  which  may  be  new  to  the  ordinary 
writer,  and  should  therefore  be  carefully  noted,  we 
come  to  "movement"  in  writing.  At  the  outset,  it 
may  be  remarked  that  movement  in  shorthand  writing, 
speaking  generally,  does  not  differ  materially  from 
that  in  longhand  writing.  The  "compound  move- 
ment," so  called,  which  is  the  union  of  'finger  and 
mnst;ular  action,  is  demanded  in  both  situations. 

Finger  movement  is  the  guiding  of  the  pen 
solely  by  the  fingers  holding  it,  and  is  needed  more 
or  less  for  the  execution  of  the  smaller  and  more 
intricate  parts  of  the  outline. 

Muscular  movement  is  the  action  of  the  arm 
•.•xh'iided  and  withdrawn,  while  using  the  muscle  near 
the  elbow  as  a  rolling  rest.  This  movement  is  de- 
sirable for  the  bolder  strokes  of  any  fluent  writing; 


192 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


-^i 


and  a  very  ordinary  penman  ought,  after  a  very  little 
practice,  to  be  able  to  utilize  it  for  the  less  involved 
shorthand  forms.  The  expert  writer  will  go  further, 
and  attain  to  the  facile  execution  of  the  tiniest  charac- 
ters and  the  most  critical  junctions,  by  this  same 
procedure. 

Practice  for  good  movement  in  the  management 
of  the  pen  should  have  a  place  alongside  the  other 
work  of  this  manual  ;  and  for  the  assistance  of  those 
who  would  labor  in  this  direction  some  exercises  in 
muscular  movement  are  appended  below.  Finger 
movement  need  not  be  illustrated  very  much,  beca  use- 
that  comes  easily  of  itself  and  is  not  desirable  except 
so  far  as  it  may  be  a  necessity;  but  a  well  disciplined 
muscular  movement  should  be  the  endeavor  of  every 
shorthand  writer  who  aims  at  excellence  in  all  the 
details  of  the  study. 

The  characters  of  the  scheme  of  consonant  signs  on 
page  17  will  afford  simple  practice  at  first,  and  should 
be  mastered  before  proceeding  further. 

More  valuable  and  entertaining  practice  will  be 
found  in  the  following  exercise,  consisting  of  joined 
words  and  phrases,  which  have  been  graded  as  to 
diiliculty'by  a  professional  penman.  Fill  many  lines 
of  foolscap  paper  with  each  example,  all  the  time 
maintaining  correct  position  for  body,  arm,  hand  and 
fingers  :  — 

PRACTICE   EXERCISE: 


.-TK1-   XVI.] 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


103 


Other  shorthand  material  as  good  as  this,  or  better, 
could  be  suggested.  It  is  not  so  much  what  is  writ- 
ten as  the  way  it  is  done ;  and  the  forms  are  likely 
to  show  by  their  grace,  or  by  their  lack  of  the  ap- 
pcarance  of  fluency,  whether  they  were  executed  by  a 
facile  muscular  movement  or  the  contrary.  It  cer- 
tainly conduces  to  graceful  outlines  to  have  a  good 
movement  in  writing ;  and  the  difficulties  of  speed  are 


194  IXSTKUCTIOX  IN  [STEP  xvi. 

more  readily  overcome  if  a  good  pen  movement 
accompanies  other  attainments  in  the  writing  of 
shorthand. 

(370)     LETTER   FOR   DICTATION: 

Messrs.  STERLING  &  ELLIOTT, 

.Hampton  Suburbs,  West  Virginia. 
Gentlemen : 

We  take  pleasure  in  mailing  you  today  specimen  books 
of  Barnes'  National  System  of  Penmanship.  These  books 
contain  all  the  copies  of  the  entire  system  (25').  A  Imsty 
glance  will  convince  you  of  their  superior  gradation,  utility 
and  beauty.  They  have  never  been  equalled  in  mechanical 
execution.  Your  attention  is  respectfully  (50)  called  to 
the  third  page  of  cover,  which  contains  a  classification  and 
analysis  of  all  the  letters ;  to  the  fourth  page  of  cover, 
which  shows  (75)  special  features  of  the  series ;  and  to  the 
small  sheet  of  practice  paper. 

We  will  furnish  these  large  books  for  introduction  at 
eighty-seven  cents  (100)  per  dozen,  and  the  small  books  for 
forty-seven  cents  per  dozen.  We  also  prepay  all  mail  or 
express  charges;  and  if  you  have  any  books  (25)  of  similar 
character  on  hand  now  in  good  condition,  we  will  give  you 
an  equal  number  of  our  new  series  for  them. 

Remember  that  the  (50)  whole  series  is  printed  from 
stone  by  hand,  and  is  far  more  elegant  and  beautiful  than 
the  cheap  copy  books  that  are  printed  from  type  (75)  on  a 
steam  press.  The  latter  will  never  be  used  by  competent 
teachers  of  penmanship. 

These  books  have  been  adopted  in  many  cities  and  towns 
(200),  and  are  heartily  endorsed  by  more  than  two  hundred 
of  the  finest  professional  penmen  in  the  country.  Wo 
believe  that  you  can  make  no  mistake  (25)  in  adopting  them 
for  use  in  your  classes,  and  trust  that  we  may  have  your 
order. 

Hoping  to  hear  from  you,  we  are 

Yours  truly, 

(250  words.) 

(371)     CONCLUSION  OF  PART  II.  : 

One  of  the  most  disappointing  results  of  the  study 
of  shorthand  —  when  the  principles  have  been  presented 


STKP   XVI.]  PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  195 

closely  following  one  another,  with  only  words  for 
illustration  —  has  been  that  the  inquirer  knew  next  to 
nothing  of  the  practical  bearing  of  the  subject  after 
such  a  hurried  passage  through  the  rules.  Doubtless  the 
clever  ideas  of  phonography  would  be  entirely  appre- 
ciated as  he  passed  along ;  but  the  learning  process 
was  simply  heaping  one  thing  upon  another,  until  the 
store  of  information  was  a  mass  without  detail  or 
color ;  and  when  the  time  came  for  a  general  applica- 
tion, nothing  could  be  handily  accomplished  :  because, 
although  some  observation  and  considerable  industry 
had  been  exerted,  the  impressions  received  were  more 
or  less  vague — at  least  not  quickly  distinguishable 
one  from  another. 

This  has  always  been  a  disheartening  outcome  for 
both  pupil  and  teacher ;  and  under  such  conditions  the 
passage  from  the  handbook  to  miscellaneous  writing 
was  a  weighty  period  and  marked  the  point  where 
many  fell  in  the  struggle  for  a  mastery  of  shorthand. 

We  have  long  believed  that  if  the  theory  of  phonog- 
raphy be  sufficiently  relieved  and  strengthened  by 
practice  all  along  the  line,  the  throwing  away  of  the 
crutches,  as  it  were,  will  not  leave  the  learner  still 
crippled. 

We  allude  to  this  stage  because  it  has  always  been 
a  critical  one ;  not  because  we  apprehend  much  of 
such  difficulty  in  the  use  of  this  manual.  It  does  not 
follow  the  traditions  closely  enough  to  inherit  the 
faults  of  out-of-date  methods.  The  lesson  we  would 
now  impress  is  that  the  underlying  principles  of  the 
study  must  be  thoroughly  understood,  before  leaving 
that  part ;  and  lest  anyone  pursuing  these  Steps  should 
be  deficient  at  this  time,  we  recommend  a  careful  re- 
view of  Parts  I.  and  II.  before  proceeding  to  Part  III. 
and  to  the  work  which  necessarily  accompanies  ad- 
vanced inquiry. 


PART  III. —  Advanced  Inquiry. 


WORD-SIGN  LISTS,  SCHEDULE  FOR 
TYPEWRITING,  ETC. 


198  INSTRUCTION   IN 

WORD-SIGNS  AND  WORD-SIGN  STUDY: 

(372)     Word-signs — what  for? 

First:  To  provide  brief  and  fluent  forms  for  the 
words  of  exceedingly  frequent  recurrence  ;  and 

Second :  For  those  words  the  regular  outline  of 
which  would  be  long  and  awkward. 

The  demands  of  speedy  writing  make  the  word-sign 
absolutely  indispensable  ;  and  rapid  writing  is  becoming 
more  and  more  the  need  of  the  times.  At  the  same 
time  it  having  become  more  the  custom  to  dispense 
with  the  vowel-sign  (and  scud  along  under  bare  poles, 
so  to  speak) ,  the  more  necessary  it  is  that  the  word- 
sign  should  be  as  suggestive,  as  that  the  regular  forms 
should  be  syllabic. 

(373)  The  word-signs  thus  far  given  have  been  to 
make  easy  disposition  of  the  common  words,  and  at 
the  same  time  to  illustrate  entertainingly  the  principles 
as  presented ;   though  in  doing  this  occasionally  one 
of  the  less  frequent  examples  of  word-sign  treatment 
has  been  permitted  to  intrude. 

(374)  Learners  have  a  varying  capacity  for  the 
management  of  word-signs ;  and  by  that  is  meant  not 
only  the  ability  to  store  them  in  the  memory,  but  also 
to  draw  them  forth  at  will.     About  750  word-signs 
are  set  forth  in  this  manual :  500  might  be  all  that  one 
writer  could  profitably  use ;  300  another ;    and  it  is 
possible  to  get  on  very  nicely  with  less  than  that  num- 
ber.    Nevertheless  we  would  counsel  a  mastery  of  the 
whole  list,  if  possible,  and  do  it  so  well  that  they  may 
all  be  made   the  ready  tools   of   swift   writing  —  as 
much  so  as  the  implement  held  between  the  fingers, 
or  the  phonetic  characters  which  are  the  alphabet  of 
shorthand. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  199 

(375)  .  The  word-signs  exhibited  by  the  books  are 
really  the  "combined  experience"  of  expert  writers, 
extending  over  a  long  period  of  time,    representing 
careful  investigation,  and  as  such  are  almost  impreg- 
nable  to   criticism.     Opinions   may  differ  as   to  the 
number  that  should  be  used,  and  as  to  the  extent  of 
abbreviation  ;  but  the  longer  we  study  these  ingenious 
forms,  the  more  willing  we  are  to  concede  that  they 
are  the  outcome  of  actual  experience,  and,  if  intelli- 
gently employed,  that  they  will  contribute  to  the  great- 
est good  of  the  greatest  number. 

(376)  Personally  we  confess  to  a  dislike  for  a  few 
of  these   signs,  on  the  ground  that  it  is  possible  to 
construct  forms  that  would   be  less  arbitrary  and  far 
more  suggestive.     We  allude  to  the  stereotyped  out- 
lines for 

nevertheless    notwithstanding    hesitate    manner    whatever   without 


which  might,  it  seems,  be  presented-  as  last  given 
above.  Yet  the  traditions  of  the  system  are  so  strong 
we  dare  not  more  than  whisper  thoughts  of  the  innova- 
tion, and  hasten  to  remark  that  the  standard  lists  are 
good  enough,  and  facile  enough,  considering  the  possi- 
bilities of  this  system  of  brief  writing. 

(377)     Word-signs  —  how  classified? 

In  order  to  make  the  word-sign  stand  out  as  a  spe- 
cial division  of  the  subject,  and  as  such  challenging 
particular  study,  we  have  been  pleased  to  arrange 
them  under  imaginary  heads,  thereby  assisting  the 


200  INSTRUCTION   IN 

mind  to  contend   with  the  difficulty.      Seven  classes 
have  been  noted  :  — 

1.  Word-signs  imitative  of  long-hand  abbreviation  — 
illustrated  by  the  list  on  page  208. 

2.  Word-signs    by   position    (vowel    implication)  — 
as  illustrated  by  the  groups  on  pages  52,  74,  10."), 
118,  128  and  156. 

3.  Word-signs  denoting  the  principal  sounds  of  the 
word  (consonant  suggestion)  —  as  illustrated  by 
the  forms  for  average,  charity,   en<j<nj<',    iinfnlgc, 
original,  simple,  seldom. 

4.  Word-signs  arbitrary,  but  feebly  suggestive  —  like 
exaggerate,   generation,  jurisdiction,    information, 
measure,  frequent. 

5.  Word-signs    purely    arbitrary  —  dollar,    imagine, 
hereafter,  influence,  large,  religion. 

G.  Word-signs  of  form  more  fluent  than  syllabic  — 
explanatory,  unless,  nearly,  voluntary,  majority. 

1.  Word-signs  showing  merely  a  part  for  the  whole 
form  —  unfortunate,  substantial,  essential,  authen- 
tic. 

(378)     Word-signs  —  how  made? 

It  profits  nothing  to  make  even  as  imperfect  a  classi- 
fication as  the  above,  without  the  inquirer  enters  with 
interest  into  the  composition  of  the  forms,  and  accepts 
the  above  as  an  illustration  of  this  division  of  the 
subject. 

Hence  it  may  be  affirmed  that  the  shorthand  writer 
can  with  judgment  invent  his  own  word-signs.  Not 
that  he  would  need  to  ordinarily  ;  but  if  engaged  in  a 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  201 

business  involving  technicalities,  lie  could  from  obser- 
vation of  the  standard  lists  go  about  building  new  * 
abbreviations  for  his  special  convenience. 

The  procedure  might  be  like  this :  If  the  word  has 
an  abbreviation  in  English,  imitate  it  in  phonography, 
if  the  resulting  form  be  well  constructed.  The  next 
best  outline  will  be  the  one  which  most  clearly  voices 
the  word.  A  part  may  be  given  for  the  whole,  taking 
care  to  select  that  portion  which  proves  to  be  quite 
unlike  any  current  sign.  The  word-signs  for  different 
and  difficult  illustrate  this  point ;  in  the  first  instance 
Df  was  taken,  and  therefore  Kl  was  "  Hobson's 
choice  "  for  the  latter.  As  the  last  resort  choose  the 
arbitrary  sign ;  but  if  it  can  be  made  the  least  bit 
suggestive,  all  the  better  for  its  legibility. 

(379)  Fluency  of  form  should  be  the  ruling  motive 
in  all  this  effort  for  abbreviation  :  it  is  the  why  and 
wherefore  of  the  classes  mentioned  above  ;  otherwise 
there  might  be  one  class  only,  namely,  a  wise  conden- 
sation ;  or  another  class,  namely,  one  imitative  of 
longhand  abbreviation,  etc.,  etc.  But,  no;  the  scope 
of  the  English  language  is  wide,  word  elements  are 
vastly  varied,  the  shorthand  equivalent  has  fixed 
limitations ;  and  so,  in  the  pursuit  of  brevity  with 
fluency,  many  paths  have  to  be  taken. 

Then,  really,  the  production  of  the  acceptable  word- 
sign  form  is  a  matter  of  judgment  (see  Sect.  34o)  to  a 
considerable  extent.  The  limitations  of  a  correct 
mechanical  treatment  environ  also  this  department  of 
shorthand  writing  ;  and  though  memory  serves  to  make 
useful  the  finished  product,  yet  it  is  memory  assisted 
by  the  reason. 


*  The  Century  Dictionary  exhibits  50,000  words  never 
before  defined  in  a  dictionary :  so  it  is  fair  to  presume  they 
are  new  to  writers  at  lars?e. 


202 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


(380)     WORD-SIGNS   OF  THE  STEPS : 

(Alphabetically  arranged.) 

Nomenclature :  Capital  letters  represent  stems,  and 
small  letters  the  appendages.  The  hyphen 
shows  a  separation  of  strokes,  and  the  fig- 
ures mark  the  position. 


able        Bl2 
above        B-V2 
accept        Ks-P3 
accession        Ks  eshon2 
accord-ing        Krd1 
account        Knt3 
accurate        Krt3 
accusation        Ks  eshon3 
acknowledge        K-J2 
acquisition        Jvs  eshon1 
addition        Dshun3 
advance        Dv3 
advantage        J2 
after        Ft2 
agent        Jnt3 
all        B-tick1 
allow        Lull3 
along        iNG3 
already        D-tick1 


am        M2 
any        N1 
appear        Pr1 
apposition        Ps  eshon3 
appreciate        Prs-T1 
architecture        R-K2 
are        Ruh2 
aristocratic        Rs-K2 
as        s2 
ask        S-K2 
assembl-e-y        S-M2 
association        Ss  eshon2 
astonish-ment        St1 
authority        THrt1 
average        V-J2 
aware        wRuh3 
awful        Fl1 
aye        ai1 


balance        Bins2 
bankrupt        Bnk2 
because        Ks1 
be        B2 

before  Bf2 
begin        Gn1 

behind  Bncl1 


believe 

belong 

beyond 

bring 

business 

but 

by 


Blv1 
Bl1 

y1  (involute) 
Br1 
Bs1 


calculate        Kl3 
cannot        Knt2 
capable        K-B12 
care        Kr2 
certain         sRuht2 
change        CH2 


character        Kr-K2 
charge        CH3 
circumstance        sTns3 
Co.  (company)         K2 
come        K2 
commercial        K-Mr2 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


203 


C  —  Continued 


common        K1 
commonwealth        K-wLuh2 
comprehend        Prnd2 
condition        Dslnm2 
consequence        sKns2 
consequent        slvnt2 
consider        sDr2 

clear        Dr2 
defendant        Dft2 
deficiency        Df-SH2 
degree        Gr1 
deliver        Dl2 
department        D-Prt2 
describe        sKr1 
description        sKr  shun1 
denomination        Dnl 
develop        Dv-P2 
differen-t-ce        Df2 


consideration        sDrshun2 
consignee        sN-N1 
consumption        sMshun2 
correct        Kr-K1 
cure        Kr3 
customer        Ks-Mr2 


1) 


difficult        Kl2 

dignity        D-G1 

direct        Dr2 

direction        Dr  shun2 

disadvantage        Ds-J2 

divine        Dv1 

do        D2 

dollar        D1 

done        Dn2 

Dr.  (doctor)         Dr1 

during        Dr3 


ease-y        Z1 
edition        Dshun1 
efficient         F-SH2 
either        DTHr1 
equal        Kl1 
especial        S-P2 
essential        S-N2 
establish-ment        St2 
ever        V1 


every        Vr2 
evident        Vd2 
examine        sMn2 
exchange        Ks-CH2 
expect        Ks-P2 
experience        sPrns2 
explain        sPln2 
express        sPrs2 


familiar        F-M2 
favor        Vr3 
feature        Ft1 
February        F-B2 
fill        Fl1 
first        stuh1 


for        F2 
form        Fr-1 
formation        Frshun1 
from        Fr2 
full-y        Fl2 
future        Ft3 


G 

general        Jn2  gentlemen        Jnt1 

generalization       Jns  eshon2       give        G1 
generation        Jshun2  govern-ment        Gv2 

gentleman  Jnt2  guarant-ee-y        Grn-T 


204 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


II 


had     '  D3 
half        F3 
happen        Pn3 
happy        P3 
hard        Rd3 
has        s2 
have        V2 
heard        lid2 
held         Ld2 
her        R2 
here         R1 
herself        Rs2 


high        ai1 
him        M2 
himself        Ms2 
his        s1 
hold        Ld2 
home         M3 
honest        Nstnh1 
hope         P2 
how        ow2 
however        V3 
human         Mn3 
humor         Mr3 


I        ai1 

imagin-e-ation         .In3 
immediate        Md1 
individual        Nd-Vdl 
infer        N-F2 
influence        Ns1 
influential         N-SII11 
information          Nshun1 
inscribe        in-sKr1 
insecure         in  sKr3 
instant         Nstuh1 
instruct        in  sTr2 


instruction        in  sTrshun2 
integrity        Nt-Grtl 
intellect        Nt-Kt1 
intelligent        Nt-Jnt2 
interest        Nt-sT2 
internal        Tr1 
into         N-T2 

investigation     N-Vst  eshon2 
irregular        R-G2 
is      's1 
issue        SH3 
it         T2 


jurisdiction        Jrs  eshon2 
kind        Knd1 


knowledge         N-J2 


language        iNG2 
large        J 3 
liberty        Br1 

magnitude        M-G2 
man         Mn2- 
manufacture         M-N-F2 
Massachusetts        Ms-CH3 
mathematics         M-TII3 
measure        ZSIIr3 


little         U1 
long         iNG3 


M 


member         Br- 
men         Mn1 
mention         Mshun2 
merchandise         Mr-CH2 
mistake         Ms-Iv2 
more        Mr2 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


205 


mortgage 

mortgagee 

movement 


M  —  Continued 


Mr-G2 
Mr-G-J3 
MntJ 


Mr.  (Mister) 
much  CH3 
myself  Ms1 


Mr1 


nature         Nt2 
necessary          Nss2 
negotiate         N-Gs-T2 
nevertheless         N-V-Ls2 
new         Neu- 


New  York         N-yK1 
next         Nst2 

notwithstanding      Nt-sTndl 
now          Nou2 
number        Br3 


0 


object        B2 
of         P-tickl 
on         Kuh-tick1 
only         Nl2 
oi)inion         Nn1 
opportunity         Prt2 
opposition         Ps  eshon1 
or        T-tick1 


ordinary         Rd1 
organization        Gns  eshon1 
original         Ruh-J2 


other 

ought 

ourself 

over 

own 


DTIIr3 

J-tick1 

Us3 

Vr1 

N3 


parallel         Prel2 
Parliament        Prel3 
part         Prt3 
particular         Prt1 
peculiar        P-K2 
people         PI2 
perfect-ion         Prf2 
plaintiff        Pint2 
pleasure         XSIIr2 
popular         P-P1 
position  Ps  eshon2 

possession        Ps  eshou3 

question         Kn2 
quite         Kt1 

real        1111 
refer-ence        Ruh-F2 
regular         lluh-G2 
rela-tive-tion        Rl2 


practic-e-al 

prejudice 

preliminary 

president 

princip-al-le 


Pr3 
Pr-J2 

Prel1 
Prs2 
Pr2 


private         Prft1 
proficient   Prf-SH2 
profit        Prft1 
proper        Pr1 
pub-lic-lish         P-B2 
punctual-ity        Pn-K2 


Q 


quotation   K-Tshun2 


li 


religion        Jn1 
remark-able        Mr1 
remember         Br2 
represent-ed         Ruh-P2 


206 

representation 
republ-ic-ish 
respect-ive-ful 

INSTRUCTION   IN 

R  —  Continued 

Ruh-Pshun2       revelation 
Ruh-P-B2           revolution 
Rs-P2              rule        Rl3 

Luhshun2 
Luhshun3 

sacred  .     sKrd2 
San  Francisco        sN-ssK2 
satisfac-tion-tory        sT3 
second         sKnd2 
secret        sKrt1 
secretary        sK2 
secure        sKr3 
secured        sKrd3 
seldom        sLd2 
several        sV2 
shall        SH2 
should         Ruh-tick2 
signature        sG-Tr2 
somewhat        sMt2 


soon        sN2 
speak-er        sP1 
special        sP2 
spoken         sPn2 
stenograph-y-er       stub  N2 
strength       -sTr-TII2 
strong        sTr2 
subject        sB2 
sufficient        sF-SH2 
suggestion   sJs  eshon2  orsJ2 
suppress        sPrs3 
surprise        sPrs1 
system        ssT2 


telegraph        Tl-G2 
testify        Ts-F2 
thank        TH3 
them        DTH2 
there         DTHr2 
thing         iNG1 
think        TH2 
this         DTHs2 
those        DTHs3 
though        DTH3 
thousand         TH3 
throughout        THrt3 


thus        DTHs3 
thy        DTH1 
time        T1 
to        P-tick2 
together        G2 
tonight        Nt3 
too        P-tick2 
toward        Trd2 
transfer        Trs-F2 
truth        Tr2 
two        P-tick2 


under        Nd2 
union        Nn3 
United  States        Nss1 
unless         Nls2 
until        Tl3 
unto         N-T3 


us         S3 
use  (n.) 
use   (v.) 
usual-ly 
utter 


S3 
Z3 

ZSII2 
Tr3 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


207 


value 
very 


VI3 

Vl-2 


was  Z2 

\ve  w1     (e  volute) 

were  \v2    (e  volute) 

what  w1   (involute) 

when  wN1 

where  wlluh2 

Avliich  CII- 

Avho  J-tick2 

whole  Luh3 


V 


virtue 


Vrt1 


W 


whom        J-tick2 

will        Luh2 

wish        SH1 

with        w1   (evolute) 

within         DTHn1 
wlluhd2 
(w)  Ld2 
w2   (involute) 


ye        y1  (evolute) 
year        y1  (evolute) 
yet        y2  (evolute) 


you  y2  (involute) 
your  y2  (involute) 
youth  TH3 


Word-signs  —  how  learned  : 

There  is  no  better  way  to  learn  word-signs  than 
by  use ;  yet  the  student  confronted  by  an  appalling 
list  of  more  or  less  arbitrary  forms  would  not  be 
benefited  by  such  advice  as  this,  simply  because  he 
would  not  know  how  to  use  them  advantageously. 
But  in  this  manual  a  few  word-signs  have  been  pre- 
sented at  a  time,  and  so  blended  with  related  matter 
that  they  can  be  used  with  the  proper  setting  of  lan- 
guage. Therein  lies  the  merit  of  the  progressive 
word-sign  study  feature  of  the  book.  More  than  half 
the  word-signs  required  for  ordinary  writing  have  been 
so  impressed.  A  good  foundation  has  been  laid  ;  and 
as  dictation  work  progresses  the  following  lists  should 
be  referred  to  as  a  dictionary  would  be,  for  such 
words  encountered  as  may  be  fit  subjects  for  word-sign 
treatment. 


208 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


(382)     WORD-SIGNS    IMITATIVE   OF   LONG- 
HAND   ABBREVIATION: 

(These  are  by  far  the  simplest  word-signs  to  memorize 
and  use.) 


-^- 


ad.    advertisement 
astron.   astronomy 
Benj.     Benjamin 
•"biz."*     business 
Calif.     California 
capt.     captain 
cash,     cashier 
Cath.     Catholic 
"cert."     certain 
chap,     chapter 
-= — Co.     company 
— I deft,     defendant 


L 


Dem.     Democrat 
"  din"."     difference 
"dig"     dignity 
Dr.     doctor 
Eng.     England 
Esq.     esquire 
exch.     exchange 
Feb.     February 
fut.     future 
gen.     general 
gent,     gentleman 

Gov.     governor 


*  Syllables  in  quotation-marks  are  slang,  it  is  true,  but 
most  suggestive  word-signs. 


PKACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


209 


..uifm.     infinitive; 
Jnst.     instant 
-Jan.     January 
Just,     justice 
.Jr.     junior 
.leg.     ledger 


,Mr.     mister 
Nov.     November 

j.     objection 
orcl.     ordinary 
pass'gr    passenger 
Penn.     Pennsylvania 


\ 


-mag.     magazine  ^ — perf.     perfect 

_manf.     manufacture   S plaint,     plaintiff 

-Mass.  Massachusetts  <^\...Parl.     Parliament 

.mem.     memorandum  — Ji_Z.per  cent 

-Messrs  __L__Phila.     Philadelphia 

.Meth.     Methodist  J     phren.     phrenology 

.Mex.     Mexico  X pop.     popular 

t\ 

pres.    president 

prof,     professor 
prox.     proximo 


-ingr.     manager 
-Mich.     Michigan 
.Mrs.     missis 


210 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


representative    _ 
•ev.  reverend, revenuc- 


-Sept.     September 
.super,     superior 
_ult.     ultimo 
-vol.     volume 


;ec.     secretary 


Other  familiar  abbreviations  are  doc.  (D-K1)  for 
document  (as  "Pub.  Doc."),  "prob."  (Pr-B)  for 
probability  (as  "Old  Prob.")  Apt  abbreviations  of 
terms  in  a  trade  or  business  may  be  similarly  imitated 
by  the  shorthand  writer  of  judgment. 

(383)     GENERAL  WORD-SIGNS: 

Some  of  the  words  in  this  list  have  two  signs.  The 
omission  of  K,  the  most  fluent  stroke  in  stenography, 
has  seemed  to  us  an  unwarranted  hardship,  and  we 
are  loath  to  inflict  it  upon  students  of  this  manual 
without  giving  an  alternative  outline. 

Of  course  in  words  like  direction,  instruction,  ntfr/n-- 
tion,  there  is  enough  suggestion  to  compensate  for  the 
absence  of  the  K,  and  words  like  explode  and  exj>l<ii,i 
do  not  admit  it.  Ts  eshon  for  taxation,  sPs  eshon  for 
specification^  Trs  eshon  for  transaction  and  Prs  eshon 
for  j>rosecution,  appear  far-fetched,  except  when  used 
a  great  many  times  at  one  sitting.  Forms  like  T  for 
take,  M  for  make,  wRuh  for  ivork,  also  strike  us  as 
being  unduly  abbreviated. 

A  certain  design,  however,  pervades  many  of  these 
word-signs.  For  instance,  the  outline  for/or??i  is  Fr1 ; 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


211 


and  that  same  shape  appears  in  the  compounds,  re- 
form, perform,  inform,  deform,  etc.  F  likewise  stands 
for  -fer,  as  in  infer,  refer,  and  it  ought  to  in  prefer. 

The  simple  root  form  is  for  the  most  part  given,  to 
which  the  terminations  attach  regularly.  The  present 
tense  is  made  to  stand  for  the  past,  as  is  the  habit  of 
expert  writers. 

Words  in  bold-face  type  are  strictly  word-signs ; 
others  are  facile  forms  or  desirable  phrases. 

Not  all  the  word- signs  employed  in  varied  writing 
are  here  presented,  because  a  workable  list  is  superior 
to  an  inflated  one.  The  systematic  progress  of  the 
steps  has  furnished  a  great  many  of  the  commoner 
forms,  the  unmistakable  tendency  of  the  instruction 
makes  it  unnecessary  to  more  than  hint  at  simple  de- 
ductions ;  and,  therefore,  only  the  more  arbitrary  word- 
signs  and  unusual  word-outlines  are  given. 

A 


ab!e-to 


abundant 


dvancement 


advent 


— accompany 

L 

achievement 


-acquaintance 
-acquire-cl 


-amount-ed 


-,angel 


212                                                INSTl 

—  Q-;/  —  annual 
—  —  i  anticipate-d 
..anybody 

IUCTION  IN 
*\      ,       .approximate 

\           fippnrtf>n;ni'i<is 

'\rriv-e-al 

_  J           art 

..  ,.any-otlier-oiie 

~b             nvt.ist. 

% 

appearance 

"5  —          artistic 

—  \~  .  .appellate 
^  apply 
£.  appliance 
C         applicab-le-ility 
O       .applicant 
V        application 
1         appreciate-d 
^  apprehend-d 
^  ....apprehensive 

^                     ascertain 

js-  —  -  &s 

p           ns-it-\vnuld 

^_^-'  *L**~r 
\            assist-ed 

o 

<y          assistant 

9 

O           assure 

0          assurance 

e/ 

I           at-first 

D 

P               at-last 

,,     ,                      nt-lonst. 

PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


213 


1  at-length 
-  —  3  at-our-own,  attorney 

bcniirn;uit 

\ 

x  —  brethren 

0 

L  —  attain-ment 
1  attainable 

C 
^S     Campaign 

—  attitude 

—  :    ?     can-there 

\  —  auspicious 

(r—  C 

authentic 

c  —     nnrn,  carry 

(•>    ..avocation.  (2)  vocation 
avoid-ed 

Q"1         certificate 
/       chair 
:  °  —  characteristic 

—  ^s?    aware-of 

B 

V  l)een-thcre 

^^^    bc^un    bc^in 

o       ch  arity 
^cheer 
P       c  ircu  m  stan  tial 

V 

civilization 

\      ..behold 
.  belief,  believe 
__iL__benevolent 

f,lear-cd 

214 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


1      r 

^-collateral 

f  constitute-d 

P 
1  —  constitution-al 
U 

P 
—  constitutive 
J 

1    1 
—  ==  —  1  —  construct-ed 

*L  —  construction 
—  £^  —  consumption 
—  _1  —  control-led 
fe  —  conversation 
0    .conversion 
—  3  —  convert-ed 
—^    \  country 
c          ronrsfi 

c.  

....oollect-ed 

isft. 

^ft^ 

~T 

s 

_A_ 
__1 

2=n_ 

a_ 

P 

—  combin-e-ation 
—  commence 
—  commencement 
—comply 
—compliance 
—.compliant 
—comprehensible 
_comprehension-sive 
—consequence 
_considerate 
consist-ed 

P 

consistent 

__^__ri 

P  f 

I 

_J_ 

—consistency 
—constituent 

creature 

.creation 

PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


215 


^creative 

..criticism 

-cross-examination 

-cure 

-curious 

.curiosity 

-custom 

D 


-deriv-e-ation 


b    / — .dan  ge  r 
n       .danger-s-ous 


.endanger 

deform-ed 

.delight-ed 

-delinquent 

-derid-ed 
.derision 


cr^ 
description 

descriptive 

-determine-d 

-develop-ed 

-director   (See  also  §330; 

-discharge-d 

-discriminate 

-distinct-ion 

SV;— distinctive 

B-—  distinguish-ed 

I 

U — distribut-ed 

s^ — disturb-ed 

— -J- dollar 

r~0~r.. -domestic 
1 duration 


21R                                              INSTRUCTION   IN 

E                    -=3_S 

—  except-ed 

>                                  ? 

...  ,             ftasl.                                             \J 

-exception-al 

j        eastern                                 \\ 

..exceptionable 

L  —      electric                             —  £-  fi- 

^->~~    engaee-d 

excuse-d 

—  f  " 

English                              —  Q- 

execute-d 

^~t       enlarge-d 

exhibit-ed 

entire                                           V) 

.exhibition 

"^                                                      —  P    P 
1      equity                                T    r 

_exist-ed,  system 

—  T~     equivocate                           o 

—existence 

rv/\   Europe                                \    \ 

expect-ed 

J        every-one                                  >i 

_unexpect-ed 

exact-ed                                        o 

expense 

9  9     exaggerate-ed                       .^ 

-  expend  -ed-iture 

<S^        example                                    o 

_explain-ation 

\        pvasnerat-e-fl-inn                    O 

explainable 

PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 

a 


217 


—  >•  —  —  explanatory 

JL.  formal-ity 

_  2__ex  )lore-ed 

formation 

j*i_-  expression 

formal-ly 

J     J     e-xtenrl-t 

____^___found-ed-ation 

—  J  —  U  —  exten-sion-sive 

j  fraternal 

c^  tr3.ordiH3.rv 

-._,  1     1^  cxtr3.v3,£['3.n-t-  cc 

frequent 

extreme 

J           frpqiipnry 

j  extremity 

.  —J  from-all 

V.        fnllnr 

^ 

u        furnish-ed.  furniture 

i 

g^  —  family 

G 

V^~\  ^familiar-arity 

t?          generalization 

Qj  fluctuation 

.  guilt-y 

^    fm 

C\ 

H 

fnrm-prl 

..-I     halve 

218 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


X — happen-ed 
0 

X — happ-ens-iness 
o 

5s3 — have- (ing) -been 

^ — have-not 

? 

hereafter  (rft) 

heretofore  (rtf) 


<D 


.hundred-th 


identical 

— L* identification 

idleness 

ignorance 

. ignorant 

— ^ — imaginable 


< — ifN?    impatient 
. £* —  impenetrable 

• A —  inconsiderate 

7 

1 sJ —  in-consideration 

^ 

s^  indefinite 

independent 

indescribable 

indiscriminate 

indulge-d 

inexperience 

inform-ed-aut 

inquire-d 

inscription 

insecurity 

insignificant 

instructive 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


219 


G/  insnranf.fi 

L 

intppritv 

V  ,          Ian  "*h  tor 

X 

i       .it-had  (-would) 
u  it-will-have 
L  it-would-have 
__i___it-would-not 

J 
-..    LJ     j  ndicious 

9  /  ^    jury 
d  jurisdiction 
—  ?C-  justice  of  peace 
,.     V          justification 
__«C        .Juxtaposition 

len^thv 

,.  .  longer 

M 

•                     -magistrate 

,  .magniflrpnt. 

,  /  majority 

**              "^    ,  material 

r  -a       ,  may-have-been 

,  mfiflinvhile 

mechanical 

220 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


.metropolitan 

.merc-y-iful 

_million-th 

-minority 

.misdemeanor 

.misfortune 

-modification 

-moral-ity 

-mortal-ity 

-movement 

N 
.nearly 

.neglect-ed 
.negotiate-d 
Ino-other,  another 


-notification 

O 
-occurr-ed 

-occurrence 

-of-our-own 

-only 

-on-one-hand 

-on-the-other-hand 

-oppression 

-order-ed 

-organ 


,  no-other-one,  another-        ~7) 
-    one  


organization 
organiz-ed 

or-if,  or-have,  I  have 
ornament 


1'KACTICAL    SHOItTIIAM). 


221 


.      •  •        !•   1        .•|JVJllLl^ltMI 

VD 

-owner 

possess 

L^  —  oyer 

^  —  possessed 

o  oyez 

—  V  possession,  apposition 

P 

-y^  —  possessive 

*\       -partake 

—  £2  -possessor 

V 

\         p  a  rty 

possible 

-V-  —  perhaps 

\> 

poverty 

_V_J_.!>erform-ed 

£^  pract-icable-icability 

V-"&    performance 

V       pyppnrr'-d 

V^^    perpendicular 

^^     prev6ut~ed 

j^J    perpetual-lv 

Jb^  —  privilege-d 

v^v,    persevorc-d 

\J 

\J          profirient 

0 
^>        philanthropy 

nrolit-^d 

Y>      philosophy 

-A  —  profitable 

^ 

c  pnlitir.al 

\J—  ni-oimc 

222 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


V  .property 
.     ...A  propriety 
V.>  —  publication 
.  ^  ,punish-ed-ment 
V"T...\a...  purpose 

Q 

1  .quality 
—  ~~5  questionable 
!  -quarter 

R 
C^l      .railroad 

•^^       ,  rather  (1)  writer 

S 
—  ^»^  —  sanguine 

^"^  sanguinary 

school 

e_ 

^n 

—  u  set-forth 

C 

Sfit-Oft' 

^X        shall-have-been 
signi-fy-fied 

,  .-^^      rational 

realize 

significant 

reform-ed 
,     ^s           relinauish-pd 

simi1ar-ity 

simnlp  iritv 

PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


223 


simplest 

Vr>       ^               t- 

single  -d 

Q 

singular-ity 

c 

situation 

^_y 

vr        siDcrficial 

e  —  D 

-skillful 

a          superintend-ed-ent 

.  1  somebody 

£  southeast 

f 

^      .southern 

,  spectacle 

ence 

<?         .supplant 

^       .,  ..supplication 

°V  \     jsupprossion 

spirit 

?         suspend-ed 

u     ....suspension 

V- 

spiritualistic 

T 

J          taken  fta'en") 

spiritu  q1i'7ati^n 

a  stranger 

V 

>~\         temporary-ily 

9*  —  '      .testimony 

subordinate 

")           therp-xyniilfl 

INSTRUCTION 

—  1—  —  they-had                         .  L 

IN 

2  —  transient 

(                                                 P 

**      they  have 

(j    twel-ve-fth 

r 

—  5J  they-will-have 
H 

U 

i 

undefined 

t-O-gl  V*' 

/    -uniform 

v_r 

tn-<ro                                     ,  .. 

) 
unfortunate 

—J^  —  to-have-been                  v 
to-him                                  / 
to-it,  (to  wit:) 

tnlprant                                            ^ 

upon-there 
—  usurp 

V 

Virgin-ia 

vi'rtM-^-al 

* 

to-you 

.    virtuously 

a         tracer                                           V3 
1                                                            *. 

—  vocation,  (3) 
void,  avoid 

1                                                             ^^ 

UX.          trancfr>rnn_orl                               

.   volnntarv 

PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


225 


who-have,  \vho-of, 
whoever 


O__^you-\vere-\vould 


226 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


SOME   UNCLASSIFIED    WORDS,  WORD- 
SIGNS    AND    PHRASES: 


* 

abstract 

C  O              genius 

1 

accuracy 

Y              genus 

7 

adiournment 

^                   greater 

v/ 

? 

alternative 

*""*(              impulse 

ancestor 

^~\           employs 
^         implies  (1^ 

V 

proximate 
approximate  (3") 

infinite 

^ix 

daughter 
debtor 

int6m&] 

<?  v^: 

bondhnlrlpr 

C                intolerahlt. 

i 

c 

eloquent 

A/        //        jiidifial 

3o 

emphasis 
emphasize 

\^)              junction 

7  7 

employee 
Mayo 

kingdom 
<-.nnimnn 

r    ^ 

insrrftdlfint 

1                    Ifiarn 

-4.... 

enthusiasm 
enthusiastic 

(_                       luxury 

py  3 

eternal                   Lll. 

^~W~N          maximum 

^ 

event. 

«^~^v  —  ^  —  s     minimum 

~c  n 

?  extinguish 
1    extinct 

b          mistress 

PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND. 


227 


L 


technical 


\J            obligation 

territory 

^~    ......  obstacle 

? 

thereof 

C~^          overwhelm 

L 

P 

tolerate 

<\      /      premature  or 
W^        Pr-M-Tr 

1 

and-of  ,  of-an 

^^^^       peremptory 

-*-9 

common- 
sense 

\j.  prefer 

0,     ^ 

c.o.d.    f  o.b. 

v 

Ey           proffer 

L 

direct-ex- 
amination 

\       \     s     power 

y  V 

50.000 
500,000 

"\,    -^                rfltifipfltinn 

-v 

notary- 
public 

r  state 

^ 

.  oftentimes 

0                 ptfltnt.p 

\  \ 

party-of-the- 
flrst-part 

9 

st.raiglitpn 

\     \ 

party-of-the- 
second-part 

^                   stupfiTidnns 

\ 

real-estate 

\; 

VT              snperfififl.1 

1 

so-far-as 

^                snporn.at.nrnl 

s 

take-care-of 

228 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


"V 

mysterious 

IL 

extinguish 
neuralgia 
Australia 
Carlvle 
denunciation 
time-will-tell 

what-we-want 

it-is-further- 
agreed 

^ 

synonymous 

V 

owner 

thoroughly 

^T 

(^ 

function 

L 

\ 

proba-ble-bility 

I 

\^ 

prompt 

1 

I 

turn 

^ 

1 

attempt 

V- 

to-have-and- 
to-hold 

L 

_,  betterment 

V~V^1 

^^ 

/ 

arbitrament 

"V 

in-witness- 
_  whereof 

^ 

__  univers-e-al 

\ 

be-it-remem- 
.  bered 

PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


229 


TERMS  PERTAINING  TO  ELECTRICITY. 


accumulator    KM-Lter 
ampere    Mp-R 
annunciator     N-Nn-SHter 
armature    R-M-Tr 
battery     Bt-Ruh 
cathodic    K-TFID-K 
calorimeter    Klr-Mtr 
candle-power     Kud-Luh-P-R 
centigrade     sNt-Grd 
centimeter     sN-T-Mter 
centrifugal     sNter-F-Gl 
commutator     com/Tt-Ruli 
condenser    con/I)ns-R 
conductivity     con/DKt/V 
coulomb    K-Ln 
deflector    D-FlKter 
demagnetize     D-MG-Ts 
dielectric     D-LK 
dittuse     D-Fs 
discharger    Ds-CH-R 
dynamo     D-N-M 
dyne     I)n 

electrician    LK-SHn 
electrode    LK-Trd 
electrolized    LK-Lsd 
electro-magnet     LK-MG-Nt 
electrometer     LK-Mter 
electro-motive     LK-M-Tv 
electro-positive     LK-Ps-Tv 
electroscope    LK-sKP 
electrose     LK-Trs 
exploitation     sPl-Tshn 
farad     F-Ruhd 
fluorometer     Flr-Mter 
fusibility    Fs/B 
galvanometer    Glv-Mter 
generator     JNrter 
henry     Hn-Ruh 
horse-power    Rs-P-Ruh 
hysterisis     St-Ruhss 
impedance     Mp-I)ns 
incandescent     N-Kn-I)s-Nt 
inductance     N-DKt-Ns 
induction    N-DKshu 


inductive    N-DKtive 
installation     iusTl-shn 
intermittent    Nt-Mt-Nt 
joule    Jl 

kilogram    Kl-GrM 
leyden    Luh-Dn 
luminosity    L-Mn/S 
magnet     MG-Nt 
magnetometer     MG-Nt-Mter 
milliampere     Ml-Mp-Ruh 
molecular     Ml-K-Luh-R 
monocyclic    MN-sKlK 
motor    Mter 
multophase    Mlt-Fs 
multipolar    MLt-Pl-R 
ohm     M 

polarity    P-Luh-Ruh-T 
polarization     P-Luh-Reshn 
polyphasal    P-L-Fs-L 
potential     P-Tu-SH 
quadruplex    KD-Ruh-PlKs 
reactance    R-K-Tus 
regulators     Ruh-G-Lters 
reluctivity     Rl-Ktive-T 
remanent     R-Mn-Nt 
retardation     Rter-Dshn 
rheostat     Ruh-sTt 
self-induction     s/N-DKshn 
sinusoidal     sN-sD-L 
switchboard    swCH-Brd 
synchronism     sN-Kr-NsM 
synchronous     sN-Kr-Ns 
thotometer    THt-Mter 
transmitter     Trns-Mter 
triphased     Tr-Fsd 
trolley    Tr-Luh 
vacuum    VK-M 
vibrator     V-Brter 
volatilized    Vl-Tlsd 
volt    Vlt 
voltage    Vlt-J 
voltmeter    Vlt-Mter 
watt    wT 
watt-meter    wT-Mter 


230 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


(384)     SACRED  WORD-SIGNS: 

The  above  title  is  submitted  without  irreverence, 
and  such  a  branch  of  the  subject  is  presented  because 
sermons  and  religions  discussions  are  very  much  re- 
ported. 

The  student  of  shorthand  will  often  find  it  con- 
venient to  follow  the  words  of  the  preacher,  and  the 
appearance  of  the  note-book  in  church  is  looked  upon 
by  both  clergy  and  congregation  with  complacency. 


-ecclesiastical 


f 

* — evangelical 

— C evangelist 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


231 


immortal                                  ^^_         rpsnrrfiftin.i 

Immortalize 

/~  ...-.salvation 

intfir^fission 

6 

P 

\v     .  .  Saviour 

~"ZT 

Jesns  Christ 
Lord 

.Scripture 

spirit 

°^        t,psta.nipntf 

^"1        New  Testament 
..../  revelation 

/ 

.    religion 

f         theology 

c 

thine 

/           thou 

religious 

thy 

(385) 
Lord  God 

PHRASES: 

Almighty  Gnd 

\_       Lord  and  Saviour 
Lord's  kingdom 

S         children  of  Israel 

\     Christian  brethren 

2 

<s~^\        .Tornajilpm 

i 

S\     Holv  Spirit 

2_ 


<7*     Word  of  God 


232  INSTRUCTION  IN 


Jesus  of  Nazareth        ^-  .  .    Saviour  of  the  world 

Kingdom  of  Heaven         0—^-3     Son  of  man 
religious  life  IZ!L_wisdom  of  God 


(386)     SENTENCES    FOR   WORD-SIGN 
PRACTICE : 

All  constituent  members  must  comply  with  the 
conditions  or  take  the  consequences.  He  was  abun- 
dantly satisfied  with  his  advancement.  The  situation 
was  extremely  delightful.  God's  mercy  is  infinite. 
Good  government  is  necessary  to  a  good  country. 
The  doctor  was  delighted  with  his  patient.  AVe  are 
all  under  divine  jurisdiction.  It  is  a  stupendous 
statement,  but  nevertheless  it  is  true.  Such  things 
are  too  sublime  for  us  to  realize.  Do  not  let  your 
expectations  be  too  sanguine.  He  was  -very  much 
exasperated  by  the  cross-examination  he  was  subjected 
to.  The  superintendent  and  his  assistant  were  both 
very  busy  at  the  time.  In  all  cases  of  *  this  kind  he 
suffers  the  blame  for  adverse  results,  no  matter  how 
fully  his  superiors  have  endorsed  his  course  in  ad- 
vance. There  is  no  subject  so  taken  to  the  extreme 
as  is  religion.  It  was  not  of  sufficient  importance  to 
mention.  The  English  language  has  this  advantage 
over  others,  that  it  is  spoken  in  nearly  every 
country  in  the  world.  The  supplies  of  the  men  in 
the  exploration  gave  out.  He  was  a  member  of  an 
evangelical  denomination.  Eternal  is  thy  truth,  O 
God !  All  things  are  possible  to  him  that  belie veth. 
The  document  was  complete  except  the  signature. 
Education  begins  the  gentleman,  but  reading  and 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  233 

good  company  must  finish  him.  Good  order  is  the 
foundation  of  good  society.  People  cannot  improve 
when  they  have  no  example  to  follow  except  their 
own.  He  gave  a  few  dollars  to  the  doctor,  who 
delivered  him  from  danger.  Astonishment  was  de- 
picted in  her  countenance.  He  was  preferred  to  the 
professor  of  languages.  The  superintendent  was  soon 
at  leisure,  however,  and  being  satisfied  with  my 
appearance  and  references,  engaged  me  at  once.  I 
occupied  some  time  in  examining  the  peculiar  object. 
That  gentleman  is  a  distinguished  member  of  parlia- 
ment. That  is  not  a  parallel  situation.  However,  I 
will  refer  it  to  the  manager,  uninfluenced  by  any 
opinion  of  my  own,  and  profit  by  his  decision.  The 
witness  hesitated  with  some  embarrassment,  and 
seemed  anxious  to  equivocate,  before  answering  the 
question.  Another  important  movement  was  effected, 
and  the  transaction  was  considerably  promoted.  The 
ornamentation  of  the  entablature  was  beautiful  in  the 
extreme.  The  plaintiff  appeared  in  the  supreme  court 
for  a,  continuance  of  the  litigation.  The  magistrate 
fined  the  delinquent  creditor  five  hundred  dollars. 
There  were  two  parties  to  the  controversy,  the  doctors 
and  the  professors.  This  is  my  private  opinion  pub- 
llcly  expressed.  The  whole  kingdom  favored  the 
measure  for  annexation.  The  wily  politician  was  the 
largest  owner  of  stock  in  the  defunct  corporation.  I 
have  perfect  confidence  in  his  judgment  and  integrity. 
Impenetrable  darkness  pervaded  the  cavern.  "  Give 
thanks  at  the  remembrance  of  His  holiness."  They 
have  very  sanguine  hopes  in  the  future  of  the  enter- 
prise. Afflictions  are  said  to  be  given  to  us  in 
mercy.  It  is  difficult  to  possess  ease  and  great  fame 
at  the  same  time.  The  physician  effects  quite  a  large 
number  of  cures.  The  treasurer  received  ten  thousand 
dollars  to  balance  account. 


2.34 


INSTRUCTION    IN 


(387)    THE   ORGANIZATION   OF    AMERICAN 
EDUCATION  : 


MM 


c. 


'l     "I 


.  i;  L  '  .1 


IP 


7 


,  u  ^  \ 


ill 


J  ' 


PUACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


285 


V 


XI 


V 


V  f  -    JL 


-r 


\P-7- 


u 


.vv 


\.    ' 


J    > 


"7 


"1 


/  3  Ss   V 


230 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


\ 


t 


*  e  * 


V 


•N    v    <0     "V 


\ 


-I  "f  ^  '  b 

~~?      ^r     ^ 


I'UACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


237 


V 


\ 


)    N     a       x     b     p 

-iri — |P 


r 


-\     < 


J 


r/i 


VjjCfo  (A 


r 


r 


r  7^ 


238 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


V 

.£< ^s...c   ~S 

±  (I  *) 

; ^  ^> 

C (T) . 

Vr\<^'&\st(       S~ 

J...  ....)>....\/\..  C L... 


.\ 


PRACTICAL   8IIOKTHAXD. 


239 


2 *       [k ^ \ n 

r>...' 

\  I/ 
^ 

4* 

^ c...,f vj 


S 


240 


INSTRUCTION   IX 


-N 


c\ 
A 


O    )«L 


v    . 


4 


.  —  •>  r. 


(  '  ^         I 


(  , 


^  J-  >^  X. 


.  U^"  L 


"A. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


241 


1/1...L, 

I SJ2 ,\ 


6  p 


A    "V/*-J    Jl  v 

>>       V^   o/ «5 


242 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


.x.x.x. 


I 


C...t..--/t.. 

<  «•*-  x  £> 


L  ^ 


..X...X.X 


PRACTICAL  SllOUTHAJS'I) 


248 


v 


5  x- 

./....r. 


.. 
A! 


C     ..O 


y?.. 


y. 


.^...r...:. i hi. 


244 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


<k. 
-A 


— P     ex 
..\ ) 


D   . 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  245 


(388)     SYLLABICATION   FOR  SHORTHAND: 

So  frequent  allusion  is  made  to  the  syllable  in  this 
manual,  it  is  important  the  student  should  understand 
its  bearing  in  the  structure  of  words,  in  order  to  know 
what  shorthand  treatment  to  apply. 

A  syllable  is  produced  by  a  single  impulse  of  the 
voice.  The  syllables  of  a  word  are  not  necessarily 
separated  by  an  absolute  cessation  of  sound,  but  by  a 
weakening  of  the  stress  at  the  end  of  one  syllable, 
succeeded  by  a  fresh  impulse  for  the  next.  Accent  is 
more  than  ordinary  stress  of  voice. 

The  principles  of  syllabication  appear  somewhat 
complicated  to  the  young  inquirer;  and  for  the  pur- 
poses of  this  instructor  a  simple  exposition  of  the 
subject  will  be  attempted,  the  aim  being  to  bring 
shorthand  .practice  into  harmony  with  the  general 
structure  of  words,  and  so  make  the  acquirement  of 
brief  writing  easier  for  those  who  have  only  a  super- 
ficial knowledge  of  language  —  or,  we  might  say,  a 
knowledge  derived  from  usage  more  than  from  inves- 
tigation. Premising  that  the  intelligent  student  knows 
how  to  pronounce  English,  whether  by  rote  or  reason, 
this  presentation  of  syllabication  will  be  made  to  start 
from  that  beginning. 

The  question  may  be  asked :  If  shorthand  can  be 
written  syllabically,  why  will  not  the  regular  rules 
serve  for  the  guidance  of  the  student  of  stenography  ? 
A  partial  reply  is,  that  the  said  rules  are  based  on  the 
conventional  spelling,  which  oftentimes  has  no  par- 
ticular phonetic  value,  while  shorthand  follows  quite 
faithfully  the  sounds  of  speech.  The  one  may  be 
called  iri-iltci)  syllabication;  the  other,  spoken.  Then, 
too,  it  is  not  claimed  that  strictly  syllabic  shorthand 


246  INSTRUCTION   IN 

can*  at  all  times  be  written.  Such  is  not  entirely  the 
fact ;  yet,  out  of  a  large  number  of  words  furnished 
with  syllabic  forms,  less  than  one  per  cent  were  found 
impracticable.  So  it  may  be  declared  that  syllabic 
shorthand,  when  words  are  correctly  and  logically 
written,  is  so  overwhelmingly  a  possibility  as  to  make 
a  simple  utilization  of  the  idea  a  most  potent  aid  in 
popularizing  shorthand,  because  it  can  be  made  a 
favoring  feature  of  primary  instruction. 

It  will  be  readily  inferred  that  the  great  object  to  be 
gained  is  legibility ;  and  the  legibility  of  the  shorthand 
outline  is  promoted  in  the  following  way  :  The  inquirer 
is  supposed  to  know  what  the  syllabic  division  of  a 
word  may  be,  and  next  what  the  stroke  is  for  short- 
hand as  herein  taught.  Then  according  to  the  simple 
rule  (see  Sect.  117,  Step  VI.),  to  write  a  stroke  for  a 
syllable,  a  syllabic  structure  is  given  to  the  shorthand 
form  by  substitution.  The  notion  of  a  vowel  enters 
into  the  syllabic  idea ;  therefore  such  a  structure  imjiUc.^ 
the  vowel,  making  the  absence  of  the  vowel  sign  endur- 
able ;  and  with  the  result,  that  the  whole  outline  thus 
logically  builded  spells  the  word. 

Knowing  the  composition  of  the  shorthand  stroke, 
the  next  inquiry  should  be  how  to  divide  for  S3rllables. 
Vowels  are  naturally  the  bearers  of  stress  of  voice, 
and  no  syllable  is  separable  which  does  not  contain  a 
vowel.  A  vowel  alone  may  constitute  a  syllable,  but 
a  single  consonant  cannot. 

The  nature  and  kind  of  vowels  which  may  appear 
are  the  leading  factors  in  determining  syllabic  division. 


*A  good  many  words  like  redeem,  intent,  indicate,  etc.,  can 
be  Avritten  syllabically  and  the  outline  be  practical ;  though 
it  has  become  the  custom  to  write  them  otherwise,  the 
logical  form  having  been  lost  sight  of  in  the  endeavor  for 
brevity. 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND.  247 

The  following  rules  will  in  a  general  way  explain 
the  syllabication  of  English  words  :  — 

RULE  I.  (a)  The  Long  Vowels  e  a.  a.  (as  in 
arm)  a  (all)  6  66,  or  u  in  tu-mor,  and  the  Diph- 
thongs ai  oi  eu  ou,  do  not  take  with  them  in  the  same 
syllable  the  single  consonant  following.  Observe  the 
words,  ha-tred,  fa-ther,  dra-ma,  He-brew,  va-ry, 
ju-ry,  neu-ter. 

(b)  Two  or  more  consonants    following   Long 
Vowels  are  not  commonly  joined  to  the  long  vowel; 
as  A-pril,  pre-scribe,  be-shrew. 

(c)  The  Long  Vowels,  as  modified  and  shortened 
in  unaccented  syllables,  are  considered  as  Long  Vowels 
in  shorthand  writing ;  as  in  miscella-ny,  re-treat, 
po-litical,  so-cie-ty. 

Exceptions : 

(w)  This  (a)  gives  way  to  Rule  IV.,  when  the  deriva- 
tive retains  the  original  spelling,  accentuation  and  meaning 
of  the  root;  as  in  bound-ed,  hat-er,  mak-er. 

(x)  Where  the  pronunciation  demands  a  division  of  the 
consonants,  the  first  goes  with  the  first  vowel,  as  in  Rule 
II.  Note  the  words  an-gel,  cam-brie,  cham-ber,  hol-ster, 
Cam-bridge,  moun-tain. 

(y)  N,  L  or  V,  followed  by  the  sound  of  Y  CYuh),  is 
treated  as  in  the  words  al-ien,  gen-ius,  un-ion,  behav-ior, 
sen-ior. 

(//)  ST  after  a  long  vowel  is  divided  as  in  has-ty. 
eas-tern,  pas-try;  though  etymologic  division,  as  in  hast-ed, 
past-er,  west-ern,  wast-ing  (see  Rule  IV.),  is  not  im- 
proper. 

RULE  II.  (a)  The  Short  Vowel*  a  (as  in  at) 
a  (ask)  e  (her)  i  6  (box)  u  (but)  65  (look)  (or 
u  in  full),  attract  the  single  consonant  which  follows 
to  the  same  syllable  with  them,  as  hab-it,  par-ent, 
liv-id,sub-urb,  proph-et  (ph=f)  epidem-ic,  ex-act. 

(b)  Likewise  the  first  of  two  or  more  consonants 
which  may  follow,  as  ser-vant,  en-dure,  pet-rify, 


248  INSTRUCTION    IX 

sub-lime,  fil-ter,  but-ter,  lat-tice.  Though  this  (b) 
gives  way  to  Rule  IV.  in  words  like  trans- mit, 
trans-act. 

Exceptions : 

(x)  I  66  or  u  exclude  the  following  consonant  from 
the  sann-  syllable  with  them,  as  pres-i-dent,  tu-tor-i-al. 
fru-gal-i-ty  a  as  in  a-broad,  di-a-dem,  dis-a-gree,  comes 
under  this  exception  also. 

(y)  If  the  following  consonant  sound  is  SIT,  ZII  or  .T, 
a  different  division  is  required,  as  in  spe-cial,  vi-sion, 
re-li-gion.  (See  Rule  I\T.) 

RULE  III.  In  consecutive  unaccented  syllables, 
with  a  consonant  between  the  vowels,  it  is  often  a 
matter  of  indifference  as  far  as  concerns  the  pronun- 
ciation in  ordinary  speech,  whether  the  consonant 
sound  be  regarded  as  attaching  more  closely  to  the 
preceding  or  to  the  following  syllable;  ns  in  nomi- 
nal, defi-nite,  felo-ny,  phanta-sy,  secu-lar,  adju- 
tant. (See  also  note,  page  250.) 

RULE  IV.  (a)  Prefixes  and  Affixes*  (or  in 
shorthand  writing  syllables  considered  as  such,  like 
-cial,  -ture,  -hood)  are  generally  separated  from  the 
remainder  of  the  word,  as  hat-ing,  con-strain,  bak- 
er, trans-fix,  na-tion,  aw-ful-ly. 

(b)  In   ordinary    writing    this  principle    may  be 
restricted  to  derivatives  which  retain  the  spelling  and 
pronunciation  of  the  original  words,  which  is  not  the 
case  in  ab-sti-nence  from  ab-stain;  but  in  short- 
hand one  or  the  other  alternative  is  followed,  accord- 
ing to  the    fluency  of    form  resulting  —  which  is  the 
main  consideration. 

(c)  When  the  syllable  affixed  causes  a  doubling 
of  the  final  consonant  of  the  stern,  the  added  conso- 

*  Double  suffixes  are  syllabically  divided,  and  principally 
according  to  the  general  rules. 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  249 

nant  goes  with  the  added  syllable,  as  glad-den,  rob- 
ber, fat-ten,  sub-mis-sive. 

(d)  For  -ed  (the  termination  for  past  tense),  it 
is  recommended  to  follow  the  syllabic  division  of 
etymology  in  all  cases,  in  order  to  secure  uniformity 
of  outline.  According  to  which  an-te-da-ted  would 
become  an-te-dat-ed  ;  emancipat-ed,  etc. 

RULE  V.  (a)  Double  Vowels  which  constitute 
diphthongs  are  never  divided  into  syllables,  though 
two  consecutive  vowels,  sounded  separately,  belong  to 
different  syllables,  as  a-orta,  moi-ety,  abey-ance. 

(b)  Digraphs  or  trigraphs  (i.e.,  two  or  three  letters 
with  but  one  syllabic  sound)  are  not  divided,  as  th, 
sh,  sch,  spr,  etc. 

(c)  In  writing  or  printing,  *  no  syllable  is  separable 
which  does  not  include  a  vowel.     Thus  chasm  and 
prism  are  treated  as  monosyllables. 

(d)  Members    of    a   compound   word,    which   are 
themselves  English  words  with  meanings    recognized 
in  the  compound,   are  separated   in    syllabication,  as 
mill-stone,  foot-stool,  ball-room. 

It  is  perhaps  unfortunate  for  Syllabication,  and  the 
formulation  of  rules  for  it,  that  there  are  two  methods 
followed,  namely,  the  syllabication  of  pronunciation, 
and  the  syllabication  of  etymology.  It  is  certainly 
unfortunate  that  in  the  practice  of  shorthand  writing 
the  demand  for  distinguishable  outlines  and  cursive 
direction  overmasters  the  precepts  of  theory. 

Shorthand  (Pitmanic)  is  not  an  exact  science. 
There  is  a  degree  of  inexactness  in  syllabic  division 

*  For  the  edification  of  the  typewriter  it  may  be  added 
that  by  printers'  usage  le  is  not  allowed  to  stand  alone  in 
the  last  syllable,  as  in  a-ble,  fee-ble.  Neither  can  a  single 
vowel  be  left  alone  at  the  end  of  a  line,  nor  at  the  beginning 
of  the  next  line. 


250  INSTRUCTION    IN 

of  words.  A  range  is  given  to  opinion*  in  both  sub- 
jects, and  doubtless  the  inequalities  of  one  about 
balance  those  of  the  other. 

Nevertheless,  there  is  enough  of  stability  left  in  both 
to  establish  reciprocal  relations;  and  the  value  of  such 
a  connection  is  considerable  to  the  student  who  would 
learn  shorthand  by  the  aid  of  the  reason  as  well  :is  by 
memory,  and  to  the  instructor  who  would  teach  the 
fickle  art  with  thoroughness  and  despatch. 

We  are  indebted  to  the  excellent  treatises  on  Syllabica- 
tion and  kindred  topics  to  be  found  in  the  International 
Dictionary  for  substance,  and  to  Dr.  L.  J.  CAMPBELL  for 
criticism  while  preparing  this  article. 


(389)     ANGLES   AND    DIRECTION   OF 
STROKES : 

Angles.  When  a  shorthand  outline  is  not  grace- 
ful, and  the  direction  of  the  steins  backward,  its  angles 
uncertain,  the  junction  of  its  strokes  awkward,  it  may 
at  once  be  decided  that  the  character  is  wrong.  It 
certainly  has  mechanical  faults,  and  it  is  the  mechani- 
cal, rather  than  the  intellectual,  that  rules  under  this 
head.  Forward  strokes  are  an  element  of  progress. 
certain  junctions  assist  the  laws  of  motion,  distinct 

*  "  The  division  of  a  simple  syllable  into  a  consonant  and 
a  vowel,  in  as  far  as  we  are  to  imagine  both  as  independent 
of  each  other,  is  only  an  artilicial  one.  In  natnre,  vowel 
and  consonant  determine  each  other  in  such  a  manner  that 
they  form  to  onr  ear  only  one  undivided  whole.  If,  there- 
fore, the  writing  is  to  reproduce  this  natural  result,  it  will 
be  more  correct  to  treat  the  vowels  not  at  all  as  proper 
letters,  but  only  as  modifications  of  the  consonants."  S  > 
writes  Wilhelm  von  H'.unboldt ;  and  onr  inference  is  that 
the  best  syllabication  i.s  that  which  <rroups  the  sounds  most 
naturally  as  they  are  voiced.  Unquestionably  the  syllabica- 
tion for  shorthand  is  the  syllaiiictitinH  of  pronunciation. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  251 

angles  conduce  to  speed  and  legibility,  and  grace  of 
form  leads  to  easy  writing  of  the  same  :  therefore  a 
combination  of  all  these  features  is  the  ideal  form. 

The  necessity  for  good  angles  and  progressive 
strokes  is  a  vital  one.  An  analysis  of  outlines  de- 
velops the  fact  that  acute  angles  are  the  swiftest  and 
most  legible,  and  that  every  departure  from  the  acute 
toward  the  obtuse  increases  the  difficulties  of  writing 
and  reading  in  a  direct  ratio.  Acute  angles  maintain 
their  individuality  when  written  rapidly,  while  obtuse 
degenerate  into  curves  under  like  circumstances. 

An  illustration  of  this  will  be  found  in  the  following 
simple  junctions :  — 


Slow  angles 


_<1 


A  further  illustration  will  be  found  in  the  instruc- 
tion given  for  the  management  of  the  ticks  in  Sects. 
97-102.  ' 

Good  angles  at  the  junction  of  strokes  conduce  to 
clean-cut,  legible  forms ;  and  to  secure  them  it  is  not 
considered  evil  procedure  to  vary  the  outline  to  a 
marked  degree.  It  is  reasonable  to  expect  a  fail- 
average  of  undesirable  angles  among  the  great  number 
of  possible  combinations  in  stenographic  writing ;  and 
were  the  segment  of  the  circle  and  the  different  direc- 
tions of  the  straight  line  the  only  material,  the  situa- 
tion would  be  more  involved ;  but  the  existence  of 
hooks,  circles,  alternate  direction  of  strokes,  etc., 
makes  substitute  forms  possible,  and  the  object  gained 
is  practical  shorthand  —  practical  in  the  sense  that  it  is 
facile  to  write  and  legible  to  read. 


252  INSTRUCTION   IN 

Some  of  the  more  undesirable  of  the  simple  junctions 
are  :  — 

Theoretic  Form.  Practical  Form. 

\        ^         V 


\      ^ 

V_>^^          banana                   \^ 

^      ( 

[                 earth                          \ 

s>    _ 

^_                   r"i>m                                ^ 

^~N                       "^ 

I^^>-NV             admire                  V-  —  ^^ 

) 

>,             ^ 

survey                   —  —    ^~ 

^               I 

1       ,          nrtifii'f1                       \.D 

o       \ 

Vo 

X,/                <7i)i/i«x/;                         ^"\S 

1     ^ 

^ddnnrrft.p                _J      

*< 

t— 

v^-^7               enrich                     ^rf 

^     r 

C\                        M 

v  —  *    0              rnliglit.cn                      d 

\      ^ 

\           ,         defend                     t^ 

,      ^ 

>1 

1                        achievement 

v^ 

NOTE  —  The  above  does  not  exhaust  the  possibilities  of 
unangnlar  junctions,  but  the  student  will  get  an  idea  of 
•what  to  avoid. 


PRACTICAL   SIIOHTIIAND.  253 

.Thus  is  illustrated  a  few  of  the  "  slow  "  angles,  con- 
trasted with  the  alternate  procedure.  It  is  clearly  a 
matter  of  shorthand  mechanics,  where  the  more  literary 
attributes  of  the  art  have  to  yield  place  to  physical  de- 
mands. The  substitute  forms  are  likely  to  offend 
analogy,  syllabication,  and  all  that ;  but  the  impetus 
of  swift  writing  allows  no  obstacle  in  its  arrogant 
path. 

It  is  perhaps  as  good  an  example  as  can  be  fur- 
nished of  the  difference  between  theoretical  and  practical 
shorthand :  the  one  phonography,  the  shorthand  of 
definite  principles  and  reasonable  rules ;  the  other  the 
shorthand  of  expediency  —  difficult  to  acquire,  but 
when  attained,  capable  of  the  swiftest  execution. 

Direction  of  strokes.  The  forward  direction  of 
strokes  should  be  sought  for  wherever  an  option,  is 
granted.  Backward  strokes  should  be  avoided  as  far 
as  possible,  although  it  must  be  stated  that  the  need 
for  a  quick  angle  is  often  greater  than  for  particular 
stroke  direction.  It  is  a  happy  event  when  both  are 
favorable. 

Of  two  characters  representing  a  like  situation,  one 
straight  and  the  other  curved,  the  former  would  be  the 
better  in  advanced  writing,  providing  its  direction  is 
fluent.  We  say  advanced  writing,  having  in  mind  the 
double  directions  for  R  and  L  which  the  student  when 
in  the  formative  stage  should  use ;  but  as  the  subject 
becomes  less  confusing,  a  transition  may  be  made 
from  the  exactness  of  theory  into  the  freedom  of  prac- 
tice. (See  Note,  Sect.  144.)  A  good  example  of 
proper  stroke  direction  is  shown  by  the  way  the  ticks 
arc  thrown  off  at  a  tangent  from  the  circle-S.  (Sect. 
!!'.)  and  Blackboard  Illustration  No.  5.) 

While  upon  this  subject,  one  point  is  worthy  of 
notice,  namely,  the  difference  of  treatment  required 


254  INSTRUCTION  IN 

for  pen  *  and  pencil.  The  pen  can  not  naturally  execute 
a  shaded  curve  in  an  upward  direction,  while  the  pen- 
cil is  not  limited  in  its  action  ;  therefore  the  direction 
of  strokes  is  sometimes  modified  to  suit  the  writing  in- 
strument, although  in  a  very  slight  degree.  The 
words  yield,  wield,  seldom,  which  will  be  found  in 
the  list  of  word-signs,  are  examples  in  point. 

Good  form  in  shorthand  writing  consists  in  an 
agreeable  combination  of  good  angles  and  cursive 
strokes ;  yet  the  existence  of  the  contrary  is  a  neces- 
sary evil,  because  the  teachings  of  theory  are  not  suf- 
ficient for  the  demands  of  practice. 

Therefore  we  believe  that  the  dynamics  of  shorthand 
forms  should  be  a  part  of  early  instruction  ;  and  rather 
than  peremptorily  command  the  student  to  write  such 
and  such  outlines  because  they  are  expedient,  it  is 
wiser  to  teach  him  that  certain  angles  are  incompatible 
with  speed,  that  the  best  strokes  are  somewhat  de- 
pendent upon  direction ;  and  then  the  careful  writer 
will  make  such  a  selection  of  material  as  will  lead  to 
characteristic  outlines.  Painstaking  will  be  required 
to  accomplish  this,  and  experience  to  prove  the  inva- 
riable wisdom  of  the  choice ;  but  if  this  inquiry  be 
cultivated  from  the  beginning,  the  student  will  grow 
in  ability,  until  his  action  in  this  respect  will  become 
as  natural  as  in  the  other  operations  of  shorthand 
procedure. 


Ten  notes  are  superior  to  pencil,  because  the  contrasts 
between  light-line  and  shaded  strokes  are  sharper  and  all 
angles  can  be  made  more  distinct ;  besides  which  the  springy 
action  of  the  pen  lessens  fatigue.  The  beginner  derives  an 
immediate  advantage  from  the  use  of  the  pen,  though  the 
expert  writer  experiences  a  little  difficulty  changing  from 
the  pencil;  but  it  is  merely  transient.  It  is  true  there  is 
a  smoothness  about  pencil  writing;  but  it  is  equally  true 
that  it  blunts  the  hand  to  an  appreciation  of  fine  chirog- 
raphy. 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  255 

(390)     DISTINGUISHED   WORDS: 

Words  of  different  meaning,  though  containing  the 
same  consonant  sounds,  are  of  quite  common  occur- 
rence. In  advanced  writing,  when  vowels  are  omitted, 
there  is  taken  away  the  best  identifier  of  the  word,  and 
it  is  sometimes  necessary  to  devise  distinguishable 
outlines  by  a  manipulation  of  available  material. 

This  branch  of  the  subject  has  always  been  prolific 
of  trouble,  because  the  language  is  so  broad  and  the 
scope  of  shorthand  material  somewhat  limited.  If  no 
thought  is  taken  of  word  characteristics,  arbitrary 
variations  of  outline  will  be  made,  or  the  accepted 
forms  will  appear  so  to  the  mind.  This  phase  of  the 
situation  is  a  difficult  one  to  manage  —  one  of  the  many 
dilliculties  attending  the  unintelligent  study  of  short- 
hand. 

But  the  danger  from  conflicting  words  is  greatly 
reduced  by  an  observance  of  analogy,  syllabication, 
the  timely  application  of  position,  the  double  use  of 
R  and  L,  or  by  more  artificial  distinctions,  like  that 
of  Pr  for  />re-,  and  P-Ruh  for  per-. 

Some  of  the  more  dangerous  word-forms,  unless 
made  to  differ  for  a  reason,  appear  as  follows :  — 

Syllabication : 


Support,     separate  —  repres- 
sion,   reparation  —  police,  \S&  X/*"') 
policy  —  tariff,  terrify  —  exe-  ~~ 
crate,    excoriate  —  parcel,       ,—    — e — I        V  V-^ 
perusal  —  invasion,     innova- 
tion —  funeral,    funereal. 


25fi  INSTRUCTION  IN 

Analogy : 
Proportion     (like     portion,  f\      <\ 

Prshnn^     nrpnaratirm  —  nnrlp. x  \ — \ 


Prshun)    preparation 

fined  (find),  indefinite  —  for-  . 

ward,  froward  —  differ,  defer  V^,     c\       t\  k      n 

—  valuation,  violation.               ^ )  ] — \j 


uR,  Run  —  uL,  Luh  : 


J-^> 


Turn,  train — fierce,    furious  — . 
penury,     opener  —  approach,  v  \  cv 


perch  —  hardly,      readily —                   )             / 
display,  dispel.  T         ^ (jb       <i. 


Pre  (Pr)  Per  (P-Ruh)  : 


Pretend,     pertained  —  perhaps 


(p'raps),  purpose — prosecute,  <\ 
persecute  —  Prussia,     Persia     o~ 
—  prosper,      perspire  —  pre- 
pared, purport. 


\      \S\ 


There  is  no  strong  reason  why  the  above  outlines 
should  be  imputed  arbitrary,  or  particularly  difficult. 
Certain  situations  seem  to  prevail  which  a  rational 
treatment  covers,  and  that  is  the  essence  of  it.  Out- 
side of  these  examples  there  are  a  few  conflicting  forms 
which  call  for  somewhat  arbitrary  action,  but  the 
number  is  reduced  to  a  minimum  by  these  teachings. 


PRACTICAL   SH011TIIAXU.  257 


(391)     ANALOGY: 

Analogy  is  likeness,  and  its  application  in  short- 
hand is  mainly  in  the  direction  that  derivatives 
should  follow  the  primitive,  and  that  composite  out- 
lines should  exhibit  the  characteristics  of  the  compo- 
nent parts. 

For  an  illustration  notice  the  word  write  (Ruh-T), 
some  derivatives  of  which  would  be  — 

-     vi 


Presumably  _  and  _  are  quicker  forms 
to  execute  than  the  above  —  that  is,  after  the  habit  has 
been  formed  ;  but  while  manually  facile,  they  are 
mentally  a  variation  -from  a  preconceived  notion.  The 
mind  has  to  evolve  a  new  thought  :  and  though  the 
gain  or  loss  in  point  of  time  is  infinitesimal  in  either  case, 
yet  it  is  a  principle  at  issue  ;  and  as  between  the  forms 
the  analogical  one  is  the  better,  because  it  follows  the 
primitive  as  far  as  the  primitive  goes,  and  the  additions 
appear  as  such. 

The  words  minister  and  ministration  obviously  lead 


to  administer  and  administration  Jzs±z. rr>fe? ,  and 

besides  being  analogical,  the  latter  form  enables   the 
writer    to    distinguish    between    administration    and 


demonstration  ....:^...,   wrords  having  the  same  conso- 
le 

nant  elements.  This  is  not  a  distinction  without  a 
difference ;  the  difference  actually  exists,  and  the 
unlikeness  of  the  words  is  clearly  apparent. 


258  INSTRUCTION   IN 

Take  the  case  of  a  compound  word.  (See  Sects. 
155  and  348.)  Granting  that  iNG,  wRuhd  and  Nd 
are  good  forms  for  thing,  ward  and  under,  then  the 
outlines  given  in  the  sections  cited  exhibit  just  that 
analogy  of  form  which  leads  to  easy  shorthand  writing. 
It  would  be  profitless  to  vary  the  outlines  under  such 
circumstances,  even  though  an  improved  mechanical 
structure  were  thereby  attained. 

A  common  violation  of  analogy  (and  syllabication) 
occurs  in  writing  -TED  for  the  familiar  affix -ED  (past 
tense).  Not-ed  is  sometimes  carelessly  made  no-ted; 
vot-ed,  vo-ted.  These  outlines  should  preserve  the 
root  forms,  as  it  is  possible  to  do,  and  thus  illustrate 
the  direct  affinity  that  analogy  in  shorthand  has  with 
the  relation  which  exists  between  primitive  and  deriva- 
tive in  language.  Outline  formation  is  thus  made  less 
dependent  upon  memory,  and  becomes  a  subject  of 
reason  ;  for  it  is  by  process  of  logic  that  the  character 
is  builded,  proceeding  from  the  root,  and  making  the 
resultant  form  exhibit  each  step  of  increment. 

The  function  of  analogy  is  to  assist  also  in  a  quicker 
and  better  acquirement  of  the  art,  by  reducing  the 
quantity  of  new  material,  and  by  those  promptings  cf 
suggestion  which  are  the  best  aid  to  memory.  At  the 
same  time,  analogy  will  have  no  attractions  for  the 
automatic  writer,  who  perceives  his  outlines  wholly  by 
the  eye,  and  stores  them  in  the  mind  without  having 
exerted  thought  in  their  formation.  Such  a  writer 
will  continue  to  rely  upon  memory,  and  memory  over- 
taxed will  often  be  fickle. 

Therefore  we  would  recommend  the  beginner  to  pay 
earnest  heed  to  the  teachings  of  analogy ;  for  by 
building  well  on  a  sure  foundation  the  shorthand 
structure  will  be  made  to  endure. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  259 

The  following  are  a  few  examples  in  point  :  — 


J 


.  _  ^>  _      Nat-ure,     natural,     natu- 
^  rally,       native,      unnatural, 

a  «\  ^_s*^  supernatural,   preternatural, 

\>^/        \yx  _  innate. 


L          °|        0        n  Tract,    detract,     extract, 

(_  L  contract,  attractive. 


Not-e,  notify,  noted,  un- 
==1 — ^"l    -> — noted,  notification. 

~^      ^~^_p  Mean,    meaner,   meanest, 

-1 meanness. 

(o     ^     ^f^    L      (^J> 

, -A Fin-e,   finest,   finery,   fin- 

^_^^                \  able,    fineness,   infinity,    in- 

v>       yJ  finitive  (word-sign),  finish. 


Of  course  the  mechanical  limitations  which  so  beset 
all  shorthand  writing  bestow  also  upon  this  branch  a 
share  of  their  aggravations,  as  will  be  discovered  in 
the  business  of  shorthand  writing.  Analogy  of  form 
cannot  always  be  maintained ;  obstacles  to  it  are  im- 
practicable angles  and  direction  of  strokes ;  yet  the 
exceptions  are  so  few  they  do  not  impair  the  rule. 

It  is  an  excellent  principle  in  shorthand  writing 
that  the  best  results  accrue  if  the  same  thing  be  invari- 
ably written  the  same,  whether  it  be  prefix,  root,  word- 
sign  or  phrase.  The  teachings  of  analogy  are  in  this 
direction.  The  possibility  of  such  writing  is  far  greater 
than  has  commonly  been  supposed,  and  it  should  be 
the  earnest  aim  of  the  student  to  follow  every  possi- 
bility that  unmistakably  leads  to  ease  of  execution 
and  legibility. 


2r>0  INSTRUCTION    IX 

(392)     PHRASING : 

There  are,  to  our  thinking,  two  ways  of  approach- 
ing the  subject  of  phrasing.  It  must  be  either  studied 
in  a  simple  aspect,  coincidently  with  the  investigation 
of  the  principles  of  shorthand,  but  made  so  little 
obtrusive  as  not  to  detract  from  the  thoroughness  of 
that  inquiry;  or  else  entirely  neglected,  while  the 
foundations  of  shorthand  are  being  laid,  and  then 
taken  up  as  one  of  the  embellishments  of  proficiency. 

This  conclusion  is  arrived  at  because  the  phrase 
occupies  such  a  peculiar  position.  It  is  indeed  one 
of  the  elaborations  of  the  art.  Many  do  without  it 
altogether  and  get  on  sufficiently  well,  while  others 
employ  it  with  ease  and  effect.  The  ability  to  phrase 
cleverly  may  or  may  not  be  a  matter  of  temperament ; 
but  certain  it  is  the  beginner  should  not  be  attracted 
from  sober  study  by  the  allurements  of  phrase  writing ; 
and  on  the  other  hand,  no  writer  can  be  said  to  have 
compassed  all  the  possibilities  of  shorthand  if  phras- 
ing has  never  been  attempted. 

As  we  have  before  written,  the  advantages  of  the 
phrase  are  in  the  saving  of  pen  liftings,  and  in  bring- 
ing the  thought  to  a  visible  focus.  A  knowledge  of 
the  context  always  assists  the  writer.  The  phrase 
outline  is  a  striking  illustration  of  this  idea;  it  not 
only  presents  the  forms  together,  but  in  a  most 
helpful  juxtaposition. 

Phrase  writing  has  its  possibilities  and  its  limita- 
tions. Its  possibilities  lie  in  the  direction  of  those 
liberties  granted  to  all  outline  formation.  The  phrase 
must  be  fluent  in  structure.  If  it  can  be  said  that 
the  phrase  is  a  composite  outline  derived  from  agree- 
able elements,  then  it  is  equally  true  that  the  derivative 
should  partake  of  the  character  of  its  parts,  and  be 
identified  with  them  by  analogy.  The  limitations  of 


PUACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  261 

the  phrase  are  equally  strong.  Do  not  phrase  to 
excess.  There  should  be  conservative  treatment  of 
the  subject.  The  tendency  should  not  be  to  weave 
arabesques  of  shorthand  delineation,  but  rather  that 
of  utilizing  possibilities  of  combination  for  those 
characters  that  join  well  and  profitably.  Besides 
which,  there  are  grammatical  limitations  as  well  as 
physical. 

Some    specific    word    groups    available    for    phrase 
writing  are :  — 

The  subject  of  a  sentence  and 
iti  qualifier: 

The  verb  and  pronomenal  sub- 
ject; Ihe  verb  and  its  object: 

The  p"incipal  verb  and  its 
auxiliary : 

Clauses    intrjduced    by     prepo-    ' — *\^X      "1     -,  ^""fL 

sitions  or  conjunctions: 

Adverbial  Clauses: 

Sometimes  the  technicalities  *  of 
a  business  : 

Commercial  terms,  common  ex- 
pressions, extended  titles, 


TRANSLATION    OF    ABOVE    PHRASES  : 

1.  This  notice,  human  nature,  these  things, 
that  circumstance,  his  opinion. 

*  It  is  generally  in  order  to  make  phrase  forms  and  con- 
tractions for  terms  and  expressions  of  frequent  occurrence 
in  any  writing. 


2G2  INSTRUCTION    IN 

2.  We  have'been,  it  can  be,  consider  the  matter, 
call  his  attention. 

3.  There  must  be,  have  been  received,  may  have 
been  observed,  we  shall  make. 

4.  In  every  respect,  on  this  occasion,   as  fast  as, 
of  course  it  is  impossible. 

5.  By  the  way,  at  all  events,  at  any  rate,  on  the 
contrary,   inasmuch  as. 

6.  10-Paymeut     Life,      Reversionary    Additions, 
Policy  contract. 

7.  Compound  interest,  House  of  Representatives, 
Gentlemen  of  the  Jury,   Act  of  Congress. 

These  are  proper  phrase  situations,  and  they  demon- 
strate the  principal  features  of  the  subject,  namely  :  — 

1.  That   grammatical   divisions   of    language,    or 
natural  and  rhetorical  groups  of  words  in  speech,  are 
oftenest  so  to  be  pictured. 

2.  That  the  best  phrase  form  is  one  composed  of 
word-signs,  or  beginning  with  a  word-sign. 

3.  That  the  first*  member  of  the  phrase  maintains 
its  original  position. 

In  other  respects  phrases  are  governed  by  the  rules 
regulating  all  outline  formation,  and  come  beneath 
the  restrictions  of  correct  syllabication,  analogy,  angles 
and  direction  of  strokes. 

The  most  earnest  advice  we  can  give  with  respect 
to  phrase  writing  is  —  be  simple  !  The  following 
tangles  are  quite  the  reverse ;  and  while  they  are  ex- 
tremely ingenious  combinations  of  forms,  and  repre- 
sent possibilities,  still  they  are  not  probable  in  actual 

*A  few  instances  like  all-those,  we-should-say,  where 
some  other  member  of  the  phrase  governs  the  position, 
are  exceptions. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  263 

writing  performed  at  a  high  rate  of  speed.  They 
might  be  called  curiosities  of  shorthand  literature, 
and  show  beautifully  what  can  be  done  in  the  direction 
of  phrasing ;  but  for  our  purpose  they  only  show  what 
need  not  be  done  by  the  business  writer. 


.Under-the-Constitution-of- 
the-United-States 

In-the-other-parts-of-the- 
globe 

Becanse-they-were-not-to- 
be-allowed-to-have 

With-her-main-engine-shaft 

Look-into-those-old-modes- 
of-parti-coloring-yarn 

That-you-will-also-render-  //^^     J? 

his- stay  <"» 

Quless-there-exist-other- 
reasons 


1 


Why-we-should-believe-that-  loo  ( 

the  Is*-* 

If  phrases  like  the  above  are  the  natural  outcome 
of  shorthand  proficiency,  no  exception  can  be  taken  : 
one  can  only  marvel  at  the  development  of  the  art. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  simple  examples  that  have 
been  presented  throughout  the  steps  of  this  manual 
illustrate  the  true  function  (as  we  believe)  of  the 
phrase  ;  while,  as  has  been  intimated,  to  ignore  phras- 
ing entirely  is  not  an  omission  fatal  to  success. 


264  INSTRUCTION    IN 

(393)     SYLLABIC-S. 

Special  attention  is  directed  to  the  new  name  applied 
to  the  character  commonly  termed  "  Stroke- S  " — now 
calling  it  SYLLABIC-S,  because  of  the  pronounced 
individuality  of  its  use  in  this  textbook  which  makes 
syllabic  structure  so  important  a  feature. 

In  Step  VI.  precept  and  examples  were  given  suffi- 
cient to  develop  the  principle,  but  now  on  the  following 
page  the  idea  is  presented  more  fully,  in  order  that  its 
entire  scope  may  be  appreciated. 

PLATE  A — (line  1) — asbestos,  aspect,  associate, 
acid,  assassin,  escape,  escalade,  asparagus,  assimi- 
late, esculent — (2) — ascetic,  ossify,  Easter,  Eskimo, 
Quincy,  sirocco,  escutcheon,  racy,  syringa — (3)  — 
simoom,  Israel,  Isis,  eastern,  isolate,  asterisk,  secant, 
assort,  aspersion,  currency,  ecstacy —  (4)  — aspirant, 
esquire,  asteroid,  sequence,  assent,  assume,  astute, 
saucy,  serum,  syenite,  esoteric — (5) — Sozodont, 
Sorosis,  estrange,  Lucy,  ostracize,  astral,  silo,  seduce, 
sapient,  Osman,  siesta,  fancy,  fussy —  (6)  —  satrap, 
osprey,  heresy,  sedate,  salute,  espousal,  ostler, 
assuage,  ascend,  esprit,  sojourn,  Suez,  assign — (7) 
—  assets,  espionage,  espy,  ostrich,  sodality,  suet, 
astound,  esplanade. 

PLATE  B  illustrates  a  few  cases  where  the  Stroke- S 
appears  still  further  in  its  role  of  vowel-implier,  though 
in  slight  deviation  from  the  rule.  The  number  of 
such  words  is  too  limited  to  require  a  special  law. 

(B)  Ask,  asp,  east,  used,  eased,  elocutionist, 
finest,  history,  osteology,  ostensible,  isthmus. 

Reference  to  Section  121  will  show  a  similar  situa- 
tion, namely,  the  words  cease,  assess,  size  and  sizes 
(to  which  might  be  added  says,  saws,  sauce,  seize,  sues, 
etc.);  but  where  no  vowel  implication  is  needed  (MS 
possessing  none)  the  procedure  illustrated  by  PLATE 


PRACTICAL  SHORTHAND. 


A. 


i>)i 


^ 

I 

V? 


Lr 


2G5 

L^. 


^      ^    \  ^    ^ 

v.)  .......  C  }  J  )  .....  \l  I  .....  ) 


a 


C. 


~3 


G 

' 


v. 


i        "~\ 
V?-«   k 


2Gfi  INSTRUCTION   IX 

C  can  obtain,  because  the  execution  of  the  more  fluent 
form  makes  no  sacrifice  of  legibility  : 

(C)  Cicily,  Ceserea,  sausage,  sesame,  saucer,  sis- 
ter, incisor,  systole,  season,  ancestor. 

But  in  disregard  of  the  rule  and  for  sake  of  the 
angle  (see  Alternatives,  p.  267),  theCircle-S  takes  the 
place  of  the  stroke  exceptionally,  to  secure  a  facile 
form.  Plates  D  and  E  show  such  treatment  of  initial 
and  final  syllables : 

(D)  Asphalt,  aspire,  consequent,  cyclone,  eschew, 
esthetic,  escort,  sober,  escheat,  secure,  superb,  solicit, 
severe,    silent,    social,  select,   secrecy,    cycle,    cedar, 
supreme.       (E)       Controversy,    galaxy,     sumptuous, 
obvious,    Poughkeepsie,    gorgeous,    contingency,    as- 
siduous, courteous,  serious,  previous,  stringency. 


(394)     ALTERNATIVE   PROCEDURE. 

The  remarkable  prevalence  of  Alternative  Procedure 
in  Pitmanic  shorthand  is  a  prolific  source  of  difficulty. 
At  the  same  time  it  may  be  some  mitigation  of  the 
difficulty  to  explain  briefly  and  to  classify. 

Many  words  in  the  language  can  be  but  should  not 
be  written  by  the  same  outline.  For  purposes  of 
distinguishment  a  variation  of  form  should  be  made, 
and  Alternatives  of  POSITION  take  place,  as  in  the 
words : 

PLATE  A  —  Absolute,  obsolete ;  theist,  atheist ; 
promise,  premise  ;  oldest,  eldest ;  till,  until;  infliction, 
inflection  ;  daughter,  debtor ;  adopt,  adapt ;  greatly, 
gradually ;  dissolute,  desolate. 

Note  that  the  vowel  does  not  wholly  govern  posi- 
tion. In  advanced  shorthand  the  need  for  distin- 
guishment occasions  Position  quite  as  often  as  the 
vowel. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


Y 


V 


\  Vri 

I  I       |\ 

Iff.  ..........  L....J 


2G7 


V 


> 


. 
I 


./. 


\ 

L 


v 


s,.. 


' 


2G8  INSTRUCTION'    IX 

Alternatives  of  Distinguishable  Outlines,  as  : 

PLATE  B  —  Proceed,  pursued;  fiscal,  physical; 
pattern,  patron ;  poor,  pure ;  property,  propriety ; 
probation,  prohibition ;  prefer,  proffer ;  decease,  dis- 
ease;  abundant,  abandoned. 

It  is  an  axiom  that  the  angle  (see  Section  104)  has 
the  most  to  do  with  the  difference  between  theoretical 
and  practical  shorthand  :  hence  come  — 

Alternatives  for  Improved  Angular  Junction  : 

PLATE  C — Deficit,  denial,  continue,  agent,  pink, 
mink,  Melton,  Putnam,  intimation,  mantel. 

Alternatives  of  Prefix  Junction  ;  — 

PLATE  D  —  Unsullied,  unsanitary;  forgive,  fore- 
warn, forego ;  almost,  always ;  unrelenting,  unrepin- 
ing;  unlatch,  enliven,  unladylike;  withheld,  withdraw, 
without. 

Alternatives  of  Affix  Junction  :  — 

PLATE  E  —  Pliable,  visible;  recipient,  respondent; 
toughest,  neatest,  interest;  inward,  outward;  native, 
creative;  require,  acquire,  inquire;  and-of,  hereof, 
whereof,  thereof ;  darkness,  kindness ;  endowment, 
ornament;  wherever,  whichever;  whereto,  thereto, 
unto,  onto  ;  observance,  radiance  ;  peeping,  seeing ; 
bountiful,  doubtful,  careful. 

Again,  there  is  danger  that  a  gain  in  speed  will  not 
compensate  for  an  involved  mental  operation,  but  we 
have  — 

Alternatives  of  Brevity  vs.  Syllabic  Consistency  :  — 

PLATE  F  —  Redeem,  affidavit,  retail,  anticipate, 
predict,  indicate,  indent,  indignity,  intent. 

Then  there  are  Alternatives  occasioned  by  the 
practical  need  for  halving,  or  sometimes  not ;  tome- 
times  the  Con-dot,  or  sometimes  not;  sometimes 
Lengthening,  sometimes  not ;  Prefixes  or  Affixes  some- 
times joined,  sometimes  not;  sometimes  the  H- stroke, 
sometimes  the  H-tick,  often  neither;  sometimes  the 


n:\rnr.\i.  siroKTHAxn.  2G9 


Hook   for   perfect    coalescence,  sometimes  not  —  and 
so  on. 

PLATE  G  —  Enter,  entertain  ;  selfish,  selfwill  ; 
fundamental,  regimental;  moulded,  needed;  physi- 
ology, phrenology;  commiserate,  commerce;  term, 
trim  ;  governorship,  courtship  ;  hark,  hist  ;  wisp, 
whisk  ;  obstacle,  refraction. 

(395)     VOWEL    IMPLICATION. 

It  cannot  be  denied  that  the  actual  representation  of 
the  dots  and  dashes  which  stand  for  the  vowel  sounds 
gives  to  graphic  shorthand  a  certain  definiteness  it 
might  not  otherwise  acquire  ;  and  yet  experts  the 
world  over  have  proved  that  such  measures  for  legi- 
bility are  incompatible  with  swift  writing,  and  have 
resolutely  discarded  them. 

At  the  same  time  there  is  a  method  of  outline  build- 
ing which  makes  their  absence  fairly  tolerable  :  namely, 
that  which  makes  a  strong  implication  take  the  place 
of  the  actual  and  visible  signs. 

Position.  Position  generally  is  but  an  imperfect 
vowel  implier,  though  third  Position  is  perhaps  more 
definite  than  the  others,  because  it  has  the  duty  of 
implying  the  common  initial  vowel  a  which,  like  all 
initial  vowels,  it  is  important  to  discover  quickly. 

PLATE  'A.  Await  (wait),  awake  (wake),  apparent 
(parent),  affect  (effect),  adjust  (just),  accompany 
(company),  attend  (tend),  admire  (demur),  advice 
(device),  amend  (mend),  opposite  (up-set),  attest 
(test),  access  (excess),  apparition  (operation),  assign, 
assume,  assumption,  assembly,  assort. 

The  words  above  in  the  parentheses  are  the  2d 
position  words  of  the  same  outline.  The  last  five  are 
a  few  Syllabic-S  outlines  properly,  but  which  may  be 


270  INSTRUCTION*   IX 

expressed  quite  safely  in  this  way.  Other  suggestions 
of  Position  are  too  familiar  to  require  comment,  although 
it  may  be  well  to  remind  the  young  writer  that  the 
expert  cares  less  and  less  for  the  promptings  of  Po- 
sition, relying  more  upon  forms  lineally  characteristic. 

Stroke  Indication.  A  stronger  vowel  implier 
than  Position  is  stroke  manipulation,  which  is  a 
syllabic  matter  according  to  this  textbook.  Any 
expedient  which  shows  the  syllable  is  a  vowel  implier 
—  indefinite  maybe  as  regards  the  exact  shade  of  vo- 
calization, but  sufficiently  suggestive  for  all  practical 
purposes.  Under  this  head  first  of  all  must  come  the 
principle  —  a  stroke  for  a  syllable  —  or  as  many 
strokes  as  there  are  syllables.  No  syllable  can  be 
conceivable  which  does  not  contain  a  vowel ;  therefore 
by  stroke  indication  some  vowel  is  implied. 

PLATE  B.  Fellow,  foliage,  affiliate,  apologize,  ap- 
paratus, resiliency,  policy,  manufactory,  monarchy. 
Immortal,  immoderate,  immigrate,  immaterial,  im- 
moral, immemorial,  immutable,  imminent. 

Note  that  stroke  indication  is  preferred  to  Position 
for  words  like  those  of  the  last  group. 

Syllabic- S  is  a  strong  vowel  implier,  concerning 
which  it  is  only  necessary  to  refer  to  page  264. 

Two  Strokes  R  and  L.  More  definite  impli- 
cation is  attained  by  the  two  directions  of  strokes  R 
and  L,  because  they  not  only  show  the  existence  of  the 
vowel  sound  (as  Syllabic-S  does) ,  but  they  tell  by  their 
direction  whether  it  may  be  heard  before  or  after  .the 
consonant  stem.  This  explains  why  a  logical  manage- 
ment of  R  and  L  strokes  adds  greatly  to  the  legibility 
of  shorthand.  Syllabic  strokes,  Syllabic-S  and  the 
dual  R  and  L  signification  are  progressive  steps  toward 
a  safe  rejection  of  the  vowel  signs. 


1'KACTICAL  8HOKTHAND. 


271 


272  INSTRUCTION   IN 

PLATE  C.  Loyal,  lowly,  array,  hearer,  actually, 
actual,  casual,  casually,  valiant,  violent,  fitly,  fatal, 
allay,  earl,  spoil,  compile,  allegation,  feel,  fail,  felt, 
pale,  bill,  coal.  Irrational,  irrefutable,  irredeemable, 
irresolute,  irrespective,  irrevocable,  irreverent,  irrele- 
vant. Irreparable,  irrepressible,  irresistible,  irre- 
sponsible, irremediable,  irreclaimable,  illegitimate. 
Irrigate,  irritable,  erratic,  irridescent,  arrogate,  ir- 
ruption. Arbor,  arabesque,  argue,  orchestra,  argaiid, 
oracle,  ornate,  archaic,  Czar. 

Exceptions  to  these  are  forms  purely  mechanical 
(see  Sec.  141),  for  words  like  origin,  orthodox,  argent, 
ardent,  orthography,  arch,  surf,  etc. 

The  foregoing  are  mostly  syllabic  situations  which 
admit  of  plain  treatment  under  this  head,  but  another 
class  of  words  exists  which  are  made  more  legible  by 
stroke  management  which  is  not  strictly  syllabic : 
namely, 

PLATE  D.  Erect,  elect,  alike,  elixir,  eruption, 
electric,  Erin,  irony. 

Still  another  phase  of  stroke  management  has  already 
been  illustrated  in  Section  308,  but  we  allude  to  it 
again  in  passing : 

PLATE  E.  Beat,  bought;  date,  debt;  paid,  put; 
load,  let;  shade,  shut;  bait,  bet;  chewed,  etched; 
code,  act ;  fate,  gate,  feed,  food,  lead.  Blade,  blood  ; 
plight,  plot;  braid,  bread;  bleed,  build;  crowd,  creed. 

The  suggestion  upon  page  172  regarding  per  r.nd 
pre  deserves  a  few  more  examples : 

PLATE  F.  Provide,  pervade  ;  prediction,  perdition  ; 
preclude,  percolate ;  prosecute,  persecute ;  Prussian, 
Persian ;  proffered,  pervert. 

Thus  will  be  seen  a  variety  of  vowel  impliers. 
The  writer  of  shorthand  should  have  grounds  for  con- 


PRACTICAL   SHOKTIIAXD.  273 

ficlence  in  the  performance  of  his  pen.  His  skill 
should  not  bo  wholly  art,  but  considerably  science,  — 
at  least  there  should  be  a  minimum  of  accident  in  his 
writing. 

If  every  stroke  can  be  made  to  have  a  design,  the 
intelligent  writer  will  read  his  notes  tomorrow  as  well 
as  today ;  and  next  mouth  or  next  year  he  will  be 
equally  well  able  to  fathom  the  mystery.  Shorthand 
to  be  legible  must  picture  or  strongly  imply  the. 
essential  elements  of  language.  A  weak  vowel  impli- 
cation is  fatal  to  legibility,  and  constitutes  a  grievous 
fault  in  any  style  of  shorthand  writing. 


274  INSTRUCTION  IN 


(396)    EXAMPLES   OF  FIGURE   METHOD. 

(A)  Nelson  Gordon  called  by  plaintiff.     The  rec- 
ords for  the  years  1838  and  1839  are  under  my  control, 
and  in  my  possession  for  1838  to  1844.     Upon  exami- 
nation of  my  records  of  assessment  for  1838  I  find  the 
name  of  Solomon  McFarland.     He  was  assessed  in 
Thorndike   for  the  year    1838  —  1  House   $10.00,   1 
Horse  $20.00,  1  Ox  $12.00,  1   Swine  $4.00.     Total 
amount  of  personal  $36.00  —  Total,  $46.00 

(B)  Cash   to  witnesses  in  Morey  case  July  20, 
1881  :  —  C.  B.  Turner,  s2  :J2 

(C)  From  the  books  I    John  Huzzey,  2  44 
am  reminded  that  I   made    William  Henley, 

J    M    P&VQ  2  04 

the  following  payments  :  - 


c  M 

3,  1880,  $500  00  T.  P.  Bachelder,               2  (is 

Jan.     19,  1881,  400  00  Examining  witnesses,    12  *;; 

May    24,  1881,  300  00 

March  9,  1881,  GOO  00                Total, 

(D)  Rafts  42  and  45,  mixed,  contained  51,805 
feet;  rafts  46  and  48  contained  64,136  feet;  65  and 
69,  63,552  feet;  78  and  82  contained  72,397  feet; 
86  and  87,  69,479  feet;  113  and  120,  73,803  feet; 
117  and  118,  80,512  feet.  Rafts  67  and  70  con- 
tained 120,374  feet;  73  and  76,  114,132  feet;  122 
and  123,  113,679  feet.  These  last  rafts  averaged 
58,023  ;  106  of  the  rafts  averaged  48,858. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


275 


^ C-c ^o * 

...^2l..:riA...k.,.-l.A^ _V 

\     ^  si  x     g-s-z  <    ^    p 

— - ^ -f r:>?v" 5 "fy- 

u         ,  •  s.  — D    i          e_y  ^ 

^\    r    t«   ^        O      .1       e_x        «       ^      <^  _  [j      f^,  ^ 

T^X    — o      Ao      »i  ^  OK ^       \ 

/  ^^     /  /       --\ 

«/«x^       \ 

Va ^C...i S? -^rv.H  .._\_ 

—  y        '      ^ 

J         "^y?  ^ZrC'...^.         \ 


)>        ~~^  !?T!Xx— O. ^- 


276  INSTRUCTION    IN 

(397)     SUGGESTIONS     FOR     TYPEWRITER 
PRACTICE : 

The  following  suggestions  for  typewriting  are  figured 
to  refer  to  Practical  Typewriting,  which  is  the  standard 
text-book  of  the  All-finger  method. 

At  the  outset  the  inquirer  should  fully  understand 
his  machine  —  what  it  can  do,  and  what  it  should  do. 
A  typewriter  is  not  a  complicated  piece  of  mechan- 
ism, and  the  average  person  can  easily  come  to  an 
understanding  of  its  parts  and  their  functions  by  an 
intelligent  perusal  of  the  book  of  directions  which  ac- 
companies every  machine.  This  supplemented  by  the 
teachings  of  a  good  text-book,  and  the  assistance  of  a 
qualified  teacher  at  critical  moments,  will  lead  to  the 
desired  result. 

Have  a  method  of  writing ;  do  not  sit  down  and 
pound  the  keys  aimlessly.  Pay  particular  attention  to 
the  function  of  the  carriage  and  its  parts,  —  the  platen, 
the  spacing  devices,  the  scale  and  margin  regulator, 
the  ribbon,  etc.  Keep  the  machine  clean ;  learn  how 
to  oil  and  otherwise  care  for  it. 

Passing  to  the  keyboard,  we  are  confronted  with  the 
problem  of  a  technique  in  typewriting,  which  is  the 
essence  of  this  method.  lu  the  first  place,  sit  erect, 
high  enough  in  the  chair  to  admit  of  the  forearm 
sloping  downward  the  least  bit  toward  the  keyboard. 
Hand  position  is  best  secured  by  dropping  the  fourth 
fingers  upon  P  and  Q  and  making  the  other  fingers 
fall  naturally  upon  the  next  figures  in  order,  P  O  I 
U,  for  right  hand,  and  Q  W  E  R  for  the  left;  then 
place  the  right  thumb  on  the  space  bar,  and  if  the  el- 
bows are  close  to  the  body,  a  good  hand  position  is 
attained.  It  can  not  be  too  often  reiterated  that  good 
hand  position  is  the  foundation  of  met/tod  in  type- 
writing. 

PRACTICAL  TYPEWRITING  by  Bates  Torrey  . —  Fowler  & 
Wells  Co.,  Publ'rs,  N.Y.,  $1.50. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  277 

Touch  is  the  next  important  feature.  In  order  to 
begin  well,  a  clear  idea  of  the  proper  touch  should  be 
had,  namely,  that  it  is  a  nervous  (in  distinction  from 
muscular)  staccato  movement,  followed  by  a  rapid 
and  entire  withdrawal  of  the  fingers  between  each  suc- 
cessive stroke.  Inasmuch  as  the  appearance  of  the 
writing  depends  upon  the  strength  of  the  blow,  the 
letters  being  very  heavy  and  broad  in  color,  or  very 
faint  and  light  in  color  according  to  the  force  exerted, 
it  will  be  understood  that  just  the  right  impression 
must  be  the  result  of  skilled  finger  action. 

(398)     SCHEDULE  OF  PRACTICE: 

Read  the  early  pages  of  Practical  Typewriting  to 
Lesson  1,  page  4,  also  the  reference  to  memorizing  key- 
board, Sect.  18.  It  may  be  suggested  to  commit  to 
memory  the  letters  in  both  horizontal  and  vertical 
rows,  or  rather  slantingly,  following  the  trend  of  the 
disks  to  the  right. 

After  the  right  idea  of  hand  position  is  formed,  ac- 
cording to  the  foregoing  remarks  on  that  point,  it  may 
be  noted  with  some  surprise  that  T  Y,  likewise  the  keys 
beneath  them,  T  G  B  and  Y  H  N,  are  not  covered, 
simply  because  in  each  horizontal  row  there  are  more 
letters  than  there  are  fingers  to  operate  them.  The 
disappointment  ma}'  be  but  temporary,  however,  for 
nature  has  provided  strong  index  fingers,  and  the  de- 
cree of  the  method  is  that  the  first  and  second  fingers 
shall  do  double  duty.  The  shifting  of  both  hands 
toward  the  center  when  occasion  requires  is  the  remedy  ; 
and  this  accounts  for  the  figuring  of  the  vertical  rows 
of  letters,  U  J  M  and  R  F  V,  which  are  fingered  by 
1,  when  the  hand  is  in  normal  position,  but  by  2  when 
the  shift  brings  the  first  fingers  upon  Y  H  N  and  T 
G  B.  This  arrangement,  however,  works  no  hardship, 
being  rather  a  convenience. 


278  INSTRUCTION   IX 

A    ONE-MONTH    COURSE. 

For  first  practice,  take  Lesson  1,  which  are  the 
4-finger  studies  of  typewriting.  Note  particularly 
that  the  figures  refer  only  to  fingers,  and  that  the 
object  of  the  exercise  is  to  impress  three  points, 
namely,  memorizing  the  keyboard,  the  scope  of  the 
fingering,  and  touch. 
First  day.  Practice  wholly  upon  Exercise  21.  Em- 

ploy all  the  fingers  with  fidelity.     Strike  the  keys 

daintily,  yet  forcibly  enough  to  secure  a  legible 

impression. 
Second   day.     Continue    upon   Exercise    22.      Begin 

now  to  form  those  habits  which  lead  to  systematic 

manipulation. 

Third  day.     Exercise  23,  but  omitting  if  desired  the 

single  letters. 
Fourth  day.    Exercise  243,  as  well  as  general  remarks 

and    particular   instructions    of   Chapter    for  the 

Blind. 

Fifth  day.     Exercise  245. 
Sixth  day.     Exercise  24,  always  alternating  between 

right  and  left-hand  practice.     It  is  advisable  to 

practice  the  left  hand  more  than  the  right.     Fill 

one  line  (at  least)  with  each  word  ;  otherwise  it 

is  not  good  practice. 
Seventh  day.     Exercise  246. 
Eighth  day.     Exercise  25. 

Write  no  Capitals  during  the  above  practice. 


Make  no  effort  for  speed  at  the  beginning.  Be  pains- 
taking and  accurate.  The  Ribbon,  the  Line-space  and  the 
completion  of  the  line  are  three  things  the  beginner  must 
look  out  for.  Heed  the  Bell.  The  right  margin  cannot  be 
even  like  the  left.  Operate  the  Platen  with  certainty.  Ig- 
nore the  top  row  of  keys  —  the  figures  —  for  the  present. 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  279 

Ninth  day.      Review  all  preceding  Exercises. 
Tenth  day.     Commonplace  words.     These  are  the 

WV//V.S    of    typewriting,   and  should  be   practiced 

every  day  from  now  on. 

The  Capital  is  now  introduced,  and  is  made  by  depressing 
the  key  marked  "upper-case"  with  the  left  fourth  finger, 
and  holding  it  down  while  another  linger  attacks  the  letter 
desired. 

The  fingering  of  capitals  under  the  right  hand  will  be  the 
same  as  for  lower-case ;  but  in  case  of  the  left  hand,  the 
fourth  finger  being  engaged  upon  the  shift,  the  fingers 
at  liberty  will  execute  as  consistent  a  rendering  of  the  all- 
finger  idea  as  may  be  expedient.  For  instance,  while  hold- 
ing down  the  shift  with  the  left  fourth,  strike  the  other 
letters  for  that  hand  as  follows  :  — 

QA/     WSX     EDO     RFV     TGB. 

Write  Exercise  27  and  the  following  sentences :  — 

lie  was.  Are  yon?  Will  be.  You  have.  Two  more. 
Had  not.  Are  not.  Shall  have.  Can  do.  Why  not?  Could 
be.  Our  own.  He  did  not.  From  whence.  Every  one. 
His  own.  The  two.  Beyond  them.  Always  here.  Come 
out.  Might  l)e. 

Begin  each  little  sentence  with  a  capital,  and  end 
with  the  period.  After  striking  the  period,  continue 
to  hold  down  the  shift  key  while  making  the  three 
intermediate  spaces,  so  that  the  capital  of  the  succeed- 
ing sentence  may  be  written  without  superfluous  * 
motions. 

Eleventh  day.     Exercise  29,  followed  by  these   sen- 
tences :  — 

Might  have  been.  Either  of  them.  Neither  of  you. 
Whether  or  not.  It  had  been.  Before  and  after.  Always 
can  come.  Shall  have  been.  There  is  much  to  do.  Whose 
was  it?  How  many  such?  Which  was  his?  It  has  done. 
It  had  not.  Why  will  he  come? 

Then  Exercise  31,. followed  by  — 

Where  were  the  other  two?  Come  over  when  you  can. 
What  will  you  have?  Before  you  made  this.  Can  that  be 


280  INSTRUCTION'   IX 

so?  About  every  one  can  see  it.  What  shall  we  do?  Now, 
then,  here  \ve  are.  They  were  beyond  you.  How  can  they 
do  it?  How  do  you  feel  about  doing  the  work?  Some  of 
them  were  mine.  From  whence  do  you  come?  What  will 
you  do  about  it?  We  will  always  thank  God  for  the  good 
they  have  done.  Were  you  there,  and  did  you  see  me? 

Twelfth  day.  In  sentence-writing,  endeavor  to  attain 
a  fluent  action  of  the  fingers  and  hands,  writing 
each  character  with  even  motion  and  touch,  in 
an  uninterrupted  movement  from,  the  beginning  to 
the  end  of  the  phrase. 

WRITE  :  They  sent  far  and  near  for  them.  Life  is  full  of 
hope.  Work  always  with  a  Avill.  It  is  now  time  to  go.  God 
is  near  unto  them  that  love  Him.  She  did  not  know  Avhether 
to  go  or  not.  We  thank  you  very  much  for  the  good  time. 
Neither  of  them  told  the  truth.  They  feel  as  though  they 
did  not  care  to  so.  Do  unto  others  as  you  would  that  they 
should  do  to  you.  I  have  not  seen  you  since  that  time. 
Good  people  always  do  quite  right.  He  knew  they  would 
come  at  the  usual  time.  All  men  do  not  think  alike. 

Avoid  the  habit  of  lifting  the  carriage  often.  Do  not 
move  the  paper  after  writing  has  begun ;  start  it  straight, 
and  then  let  the  regular  feed  mechanism  control  its  move- 
ment. Always  strike  a  space  after  the  comma  and  all 
punctuation,  except  the  first  quotation  mark  and  parenthesis, 
and  the  hyphen  in  a  compound  word. 

Write  slowly ;  no  speeding  as  yet.  When  restoring  the 
paper  after  removal,  adjust  the  longest  line  to  the  platen 
scale,  making  the  graduations  coincide  with  a  thin,  vertical 
letter  like  i  t  1  j  or  f .  Justify  the  risjht  margin  by  a  clever 
division  of  words  into  correct  syllables,  and  mark  each 
division  by  the  hyphen.  (See  Syllabication,  particularly 
note  of  Rule  V.) 

Thirteenth  day.  Write  'Exercises  37  and  38,  using 
capitals.  Then  practice  the  words  in  these  sen- 
tences :  — 

He  will  value  the  report.  It  was  a  merely  technical 
error.  The  plump  boil  makes  Johnny  pout.  This  trip  the 
11  Great  Mogul"  will  bring  freight  from  Lapland.  You  de- 
serve a  divine  reward.  The  witty  writer  had  a  quiet  kind 
of  power.  Bring  the  dear  boy  some  new  milk.  He  affected 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  281 

a  regard  for  the  truth.  The  Union  Mill  was  the  germ  of  a 
monopoly.  Xerxes  retreated  nimbly  after  sacking  the  port. 
It  was  his  care  to  abate  the  bank  tax.  The  State  debt  fades 
to  a  minimum.  All  agree  that  the  monk  was  clad  in  a 
black  sack.  The  crew  of  the  French  trader  were  numb  with 
fright. 

Fourteenth  day.  Prefixes.  Exercise  39.  Of  course 
these  Prefix  and  Affix  syllables  alone  are  but 
fragmentary;  therefore  it  may  be  profitable  (after 
a  little  practice)  to  apply  them  in  words  where  they 
belong,  writing  the  complete  word  several  times. 

Fifteenth  day.  Affixes.  Exercise  40.  As  a  relief 
to  the  tedium  of  these  Exercises  review  previous 
sentences. 

Sixteenth  day.     Exceptional  fingering. 

The  exceptional  fingerings  of  Practical  Typewriting  arises 
from  two  causes,  viz. :  want  of  harmony  between  a  fallible 
keyboard  and  natural  letter  sequences;  and  secondly,  the 
impeding  anatomy  of  the  hands.  The  fingering  of  IM  EDG 
(See  P.T.,  par.  1C)  ECT  and  ERT  is  of  the  first  class,  and 
follows  the  principle  (or  privilege)  of  using  the  next  best 
linger  when  the  situation  becomes  a  trifle  involved.  SW, 
.UJ.  NT,  HY  and  ()L  of  the  same  class  are  pairs  of  letters 
fingered  on  the  diagram  the  same,  and  to  secure  graceful 
action  the  next  finger  is  recommended  ;  but,  as  the  incorrect 
finger  precedes  the  correct,  the  sub-flgnres  mark  the  excep- 
tions. 

The  fingering  of  EV,  BE,  TE  and  GE  permits  the  long 
index  linger  to  help  the  weak  third  bridge  the  gap;  and  OM 
(see  par.  Ifi)  is  where  the  stiffness  of  the  third  linger  is 
humored.  These  latter  are  of  the  second  class  of  exceptions. 
None  of  them  occasion  any  particular  difficulty  in  business 
typewriting. 

Write  Exercises  41  and  42. 

Seventeenth  day.  Numerals.  Read  43  to  50. 
Write  50  and  after  noting  carefully  the  direc- 
tions of  49,  practice  on  p.  65,  beginning  with  the 
easiest  example  (the  second)  ;  also  p.  82. 


282  INSTRUCTION  IN 

Eighteenth   day.      Miscellaneous    words.      "Write 

Exercise  55,  followed  by  these  sentences  :  — 
Be  ye  up  and  doing.  I  have  given  him  my  tilings.  Not 
every  one  can  be  called  good.  I  have  heard  it  in  part.  It  is 
hard  for  him  to  be  patient.  I  told  him  the  proposition.  I 
do  not  know  how  we  can  discharge  it  any  more  equitably 
than  we  have  done.  I  am  willing  she  should  get  the  remit- 
tance. I  am  out  of  his  jurisdiction  now.  And  over  all  coun- 
cils is  the  great  God.  Which  constitution  would  you  like  to 
see?  How  many  subjects  will  the  argument  cover?  Only 
two  of  us  were  in  jeopardy.  I  have  answered  you  in  the 
affirmative  again  and  again.  I  will  tell  you  to  the  best  of 
my  recollection  how  I  made  his  acquaintance. 

Nineteenth  day.     Write  Exercise  53  and  54. 

I  do  not  believe  any  more  litigation  will  arise.  The  citi- 
zens of  northwestern  Colorado  do  a  great  many  things  more 
out  of  courtesy  and  kindness  than  policy.  Do  not  put  your- 
self in  the  way  of  scandal.  Did  the  lawyer  have  this  agree- 
ment executed?  If  we  could  get  one  more  representative  all 
would  be  secure.  The  property  does  not  belong  to  the 
opulent  Xanthus.  Valiant  action  will  mollify  his  excellency. 
Zenobia  can  tell  you  more  about  the  question  than  I  care  to. 
We  sincerely  acknowledge  that  the  medicine  assuaged  his 
suffering  and  refreshed  the  patient.  It  is  a  good  time  to 
surrender  the  privilege.  The  beginning  of  the  controversy 
excited  some  apprehension. 

Twentieth  day.     "Write  Exercise  51  and  52. 

Let  us  see  if  the  broker  will  know  the  endorsement. 
How  long  before  the  interest  on  the  premium-note  will  be 
due?  You  will  not  get  half  the  commission  you  deserve. 
It  is  a  good  thing  to  make  an  inventory  once  in  awhile. 
After  you  examine  the  collateral  let  me  know  its  value.  We 
are  willing  to  discount  the  draft.  Recourse  was  had  to  the 
bill-lading  of  the  merchandise.  A  balance  appeared  when 
the  account  current  was  audited.  The. coupons  of  the  de- 
benture bonds  are  negotiable  if  registered.  The  principal 
consignment  was  sold  to  arrive  for  a  small  percentage  over 
pro  rata  figures.  The  semi-annual  assessment  of  the  under- 
writers did  not  put  to  the  credit  of  the  policy  either  a  divi- 
dend, an  annuity  or  reversionary  additions.  Charter-party, 
salvage,  demurrage  and  manifest,  are  terms  pertaining  to 
the  merchant  marine.  The  indebtedness  was  receivable  in 
sterling  exchange.  The  item  of  primage  upon  the  invoice 
was  an  overcharge. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  283 

Twenty-first  day.     Exercises  57  and  58.     Names  of 
cities,  states,  etc.,  p.  105.    Write  par.  284  of  this 
manual,  Step  XIII. 
Twenty-second     day.       Exercise    56    and    par.    249 

(p.  78). 

\VRITE:  Your  favor  received.  By  return  mail.  Beg 
to  say.  Rein  it  at  once.  Duly  received.  Your  esteemed 
favor.  Return  by  bearer.  Your  offer  respectfully  declined. 
Enclosed  please  find.  Discount  for  cash.  This  is  to  con- 
tirin.  Further  advices.  Forward  by  express.  Regretting 
the  delay.  Send  freight  bill.  Yours  at  hand  and  noted. 
Will  send  sample.  Placed  to  your  credit.  Have  charged 
you.  Ship  the  balance.  Contents  duly  noted.  Hold  for 
orders.  Price  less  commission.  Wired  you  today.  Please 
protect  our  draft.  Your  letter  of  even  date.  Start  a  tracer. 
London  exchange.  Accept  our  thanks.  Days  of  grace. 
Free  on  board  (f.o.b.)  Cash  on  delivery  (c.o.d.)  Letter  of 
credit.  Bill  of  exchange.  Money  order.  Power  of  attor- 
ney. Price  current.  As  per  your  order.  Kindly  return 
voucher.  Pardon  the  error.  Subject  to  your  order.  We 
guarantee  satisfaction.  Pursuant  to  your  request.  Your 
obedient  servant. 

In  abbreviations  like  f.  o.  b.,  the  period  may  be 
omitted  ;  because  when  writing  with  a  lever  machine, 
where  the  force  of  the  blow  affects  the  impression,  the 
tendency  is  to  strike  the  period  as  strongly  as  any 
character ;  but  its  surface  is  so  small,  such  an  impact 
makes  an  ugly  mark.  Like  a  good  many  of  the  tricks 
of  typewriting,  such  an  omission  of  the  period  is  allow- 
able  when  the  writing  is  improved  thereby. 

The  direction  to  WRITE  in  this  schedule  of  practice 
really  means  to  write  a  great  deal.  If  it  be  a  word, 
that  word  should  be  written  many,  many  times.  If  it 
he  sentences,  every  sentence  should  be  repeated  over 
and  over  again  until  it  can  be  executed  readily. 

Twenty-third  day.  Touch  writing.*  Touch  is  the 
term  introduced  by  the  author  to  describe  type- 
writing without  looking  upon  the  keyboard.  This 

*  See  Sections  3:3  to  3G. 


284  INSTRUCTION  IN 

is  entirely  practicable,  as  the  result  of  correct 
hand  position,  exact  finger  attack  and  diligent 
practice.  For  exhibition  typewriting,  and  for  a 
high  degree  of  expertness,  touch  writing  can  be 
acquired  by  practice  according  to  the  fingering 
of  the  following  diagram  :  — 

DIAGRAM   FOR   TOUCH   WRITING. 


LEFT  HAND. 


Q      W      E      R      T 
A        S       D       F       G 
Z        X       C       V      B 


(       SPACEBAR  —  RIGHT  THUMB.       ) 

On  the  other  hand,  a  more  elastic  definition  of  the 
term  Touch  is  to  typewrite  with  only  an  occasional 
glance  upon  the  keys.  Facility  in  such  writing  is 
easily  attained,  and  is  the  natural  consequence  of  all- 
finger  procedure.  For  the  all-round  writer  this  liberal 
version  of  Touch  is  more  popular  than  the  other. 
Remember  that  a  fixed  hand  position  is  the  secret  of 
success  in  all  scientific  typewriting.  Management  of 
the  typewriter  partially  by  touch  has  positive  advan- 
tages. An  operator  with  no  particular  skill  does  a 
great  many  things  unconsciously ;  but  with  a  good 
method  of  fingering  he  would  have  so  much  better 
command  of  the  keyboard  that  the  situations  where  the 
attention  might  relax  would  become  far  more  numer- 
ous. Common  words  and  common  material  of  words 
would  be  written  with  hardly  a  glance  upon  the  manual, 


PRACTICAL    SHORTHAND.  285 

the  fingers  simply  dropping  upon  the  keys  almost 
without  volition.  The  practical  utility,  then,  of  me- 
thodic procedure  cannot  be  overestimated. 

W^rite    Exercise  62,   without   looking   very   much 
upon  the  keys;   also  Sect.   296  of  this  manual,  Step 
XIII.,  though  not  by  touch. 
Twenty-fourth   day.     Hints    for    Letter  Writing.* 

A  typewritten  letter  must  preserve  the  formalities. 
Follow  a  model  (see  p.  6'.),  Prac.  T.  ;  also  Step  XIII.) 
Every  letter  should  show  a  date,  and  begin  the  name  of 
the  person  or  concern  written  to  a  full  space  below  at 
0  of  the  scale,  and  prefix  a  title  of  respect.  Write  this 
address  in  rhomboid  form,  with  the  beginning  at  the 
upper  left  angle,  and  the  end  at  the  right  acute  angle. 
Make  half-space  between  the  lines.  For  example:  — 

Mu.  THEODORE  TORREY, 

15   Algonquin    Street, 
Indianapolis,  Indiana. 

If  the  second  line  be  shorter  than  the  first,  resort 
to  the  frustum  (inverted)  shape:  — 

ARTHUR   CUMMINGS,  ESQ. 
Saco,  Me. 


(See  examples  of  addresses,  page  68,  P.  T.) 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  name  of  the  address  is 
written  with  capitals.  This  is  done  to  give  a  certain 
style  to  the  make-up.  Some  writers  fail  to  appreciate 
this,  but  we  c;m  only  believe  it  is  because  they  lack 
taste  in  arrangement  of  typewriting.  Of  course  where 

*  See  Sections  59  to  Gl. 


286  INSTRUCTION   IN 

a  business  man  objects  to  anything  of  the  kind,  it  is 
the  duty  of  the  amanuensis  to  follow  instructions  — 
even  to  the  extent  of  misspelling  a  word  because  his 
principal  orders  the  perpetuation  of  error.  At  the 
same  time  a  finish  can  be  given  to  work  of  any  sort  by 
those  little  touches  which  distinguish  the  proficient 
from  the  bungler.  Typewriting  is  not  exempt  from 
such  a  privilege. 

At  all  events  maintain  the  terraced  look.  Limit 
the  number  of  lines  in  an  address  to  three,  if  pos- 
sible, and  it  were  better  to  have  only  two.  Much 
ingenuity  can  be  exercised  in  displaying  the  address 
of  a  letter. 

Adopt  the  same,  rhomboidal,  or  alternative,  form 
when  addressing  an  envelope,  though  have  full  space 
between  the  lines. 

Drop  a  full  space  to  the  "  Dear  A*V,"  which  should 
begin  at  0  ;  then  drop  another  full  space  to  the  body 
of  the  letter,  which  should  properly  begin  at  about  15 
of  the  scale. 

Write  all  dates  in  figures,  and  sums  of  money  with 
letters,  unless  the  dictator  specifies  figures.  Para- 
graph occasionally,  and  indent  to  5,  to  imitate  the 
em-quad  of  printing.  A  short  letter  should  be  full 
space  between  the  lines.  The  concluding  paragraph 
of  a  full  page  may  be  sometimes  condensed  to  leave 
room  for  the  signature. 

Punctuate  carefully  and  discreetly.  Be  painstaking 
always,  though  do  not  "potter";  be  business-like  upon  a 
business  matter.  Do  not  abbreviate  unduly.  Permit  no 
mistakes,  and  there  will  be  no  smutchy  marks  of  erasure. 
Go  sloAvly  at  first,  so  as  to  cultivate  absolute  accuracy. 
With  assiduous  practice,  grace  and  accuracy  will  lead  to 
speed,  and  the  battle  is  won. 

Write  for  practice  letters  of  Sect.  304,  Step  XIII. 

Begin  the  "  }'o///-.s  //•///>/ "  at  about  25,  or  at  a  lower 

number  if  the  subscription  be  extended.      Drop  two 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  287 

or  three  full  spaces  if  a  "P/-es.,"  "  Sec."  or  similar 
word  follows.      (See .Ex.  60  of  Prac.  T.) 

Twenty-fifth  day.  For  instruction  in  regard  to  making 
carbon  and  mimeograph  copies  of  typewriting, 
see  index  for  explanatory  paragraphs  in  Prac. 
T.  Teacher  will  give  a  practical  illustration 
of  taking  press-copies,  using  the  outfit  of  the 
school-room. 

The  following  "  Alphabet  Sentences,"  collected  from 
various  sources,  are  submitted  for  speed  prac- 
tice. The  habit  is  too  commonly  prevalent  of  prac- 
ticing for  speed  upon  the  sentence,  "Now  is  the 
time  for  all  good  men  to  come  to  the  aid  of  the  party," 
which  is  a  combination  of  short  words,  extending 
just  a  line,  and  illustrating  exceedingly  easy  progres- 
sions from  letter  to  letter.  Such  a  "trick"  sentence 
cannot  furnish  the  best  exercise  for  the  typewriter.  .On 
the  other  hand,  sentences  containing  all  the  letters  of 
the  alphabet  practice  the  hand  all  over  the  keyboard, 
and  build  up  a  harmonious  manual  proficiency  :  — 

Pack  my  box  with  live  dozen  liquor  jugs  of  sparkling 
mountain  dew. 

The  quick,  brown  fox  jumped  over  the  lazy  dog  that  was 
fast  asleep. 

Frowzy  quacks  vex,  jump  and  blight  everything  within 
their  reach. 

Please  give  the  money  box  to  Mr.  J.  Z.  Quack's  wife 
without  fail. 

John  quickly  extemporized  five  tow  bags  in  which  to  pack 
the  corn. 

The  judicious  advocate"  will  never  forget  that  a  good 
cause  may  be  quickly  lost  by  hasty  display  of  excessive  zeal. 

Dazzling  jewels  pendent  from  the  neck  were  thrown  quite 
in  the  shadow  by  exceeding  wit,  which  ever  flashed  from 
her  brilliant  mind. 

Old  and  quaint  maxims  filled  the  pages  of  that  very  curi- 
ous book,  on  which,  with  quiet  joy,  he  gazed  for  hours 
together. 


288  INSTRUCTION  IN 

The  earthquake  wrecked  the  grand  old  palace ;  next  the 
ruins  were  in  blaze;  yet  the  Junta  sat  hi  tlieir  chamber  with 
faces  as  calm  as  ever.- 

Our  queen  was  almost  crazed  with  vexation,  because  the 
prince  would  not  join  the  King's  forces  in  the  field. 

A  doctor's  judgment  sometimes  fails,  even  when,  by  ZCN'I- 
ous  endeavor,  he  has  acquired  an  exact  knowledge  of  the 
patient's  malady. 

Experts  in  jurisprudence,  and  learned  writers  on  ethics, 
are  alike  greatly  puzzled  to  solve  the  broad  question,  "  How 
to  repress  fierce  crime." 

We  seized  with  joy  on  the  thought  of  rejoining  loved  ones 
beyond  the  grave;  it  keeps  alive  exquisite  memories  of  their 
presence  here. 

At  the  zenith  of  the  Caitiff's  power,  his  subjects  were 
ruined  by  knavish  tax-gatherers  quartered  upon  them,  and 
•  even  life  was  in  jeopardy. 

In  yonder  quiet  nook,  away  from  the  exciting  jostle  of 
city  life,  I  lay  and  let  the  murmuring  zephyrs  cool  my  fev- 
ered brain. 

A  willful  and  querulous  priest,  seconded  by  a  lazy  abbot, 
excluded  the  kind  and  gifted  justice  from  the  vestry  cham- 
bers. 

Twenty-sixth  day.  Write  for  practice  the  miscella- 
neous letters  of  pp.  119,  120  and  121,  as  well  :is 
pp.  69  and  95.  Select  one  letter,  and  write  it 
many  times  for  speed  exercise. 

Twenty-seventh  day.  Refer  to  model  letter  of  Step 
XV.,  and  arrange  in  a  proper  style  of  typewriting. 
Also  write  the  letter  of  p.  96.  Practice  familiar 
matter  for  speed. 

Twenty-eighth  day.  Write  miscellaneous  law  forms, 
first  p.  86  ;  then  pp.  55  to  62,  as  time  will  permit. 
Also  pp.  92  and  94. 

Twenty-ninth  day.  Court  testimony.  Copy  pp.  93, 
124  and  125. 

Thirtieth  day.  General  review.  Fancy  typewriting. 
Continued  speed  practice. 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 


289 


(399  )  Appended  is  still  another  way  of  presenting 
the  model  letter  of  Step  XV.  Execute  the  ruled  lines 
with  red  ink  :  — 

BOSTOX,  May  2,  1893. 
Messrs.  GILL  &  CLARK, 

West  Newburyport,  Mass. 
Gentlemen : 

We  have  your  favor  of  the  7th,  enclosing  drafts  for 
0620.00,  payment  for  five  shares  of  the  Western  Investment 
Stock,  for  C.  M.  Brayton;  and  drafts  to  the  amount  of 
$1,476.55,  which  you  say  balances  the  stock  you  bought  of 
us  when  in  Boston. 

On  referring  to  our  books  we  find  the  items  stand  as 
follows :  — 


GILL   &   CLARK. 


DR. 


CR. 


Apr.  15 

By  stock 

$3312.50 

Apr.  15 

To  drafts 

$1476.55 

"  cash 

622.00 

/ 

"  deposit 

1095.45 

/ 

"  commission 

26.50 

/ 

"  balance 

92.00 

$3312.50 

$3312.50 

If  we  are  in  error,  please  advise  us  at  once ;  something 
may  have  escaped  our  attention. 

Yours  truly, 


self 


INDEX. 


Sect.  Page. 

A.  AN,  AND 100  49 

AFFIXES 342  173 

alternate  forms  for 346  176 

-hooil  -head  -worthy 343  174 

-ing  -ings 149,  150  71,  72 

-ingly 356  184 

-ture 344  175 

(    65  34 
1343  174 

ALTERNATIVE  PROCEDURE 394  266 

ANALOGY: 

general  article 391  257 

examples 259 

ANGLES 

and  Direction  of  Strokes 389  250-4 

in  Shorthand 104  50 

made  by  hooks 238-9  116 

with  L  and  R 141  69 

when  option  given If5  84 

in  figure  writing {gj  1« 

as  a  "study" 104  50 

APPENDAGES 16  18 

circle-S,  wuh  and  yuh 45  29 

hooks 184  95 

BLACKBOARD  ILLUSTRATIONS:   see  Appendix. 

BUSINESS 

shorthand 167-8  86-89 

the— letter 280  138 

letters  for  dictation 113, 124, 136 

"         "          "  149,  150, 164 

"         <«          •<  194 

word-signs 281  '  138 

nhrasp*  (  282  139 

' 1 284  140 

dictation 286  141 

CIRCLE-S: 

how  written 43, 46  29 

how  read 43  29 

between  curves 47  30 

straight  strokes }  2^  ^ 

prefixed  to  hooks 201-5  lof-2 

two  sounds  of,  before  R-hook 208  103 

CON-,  COM-,  COG- 146  71 

compounded j^jj  jij 

CONSONANTS : 

signs 10,  11, 17 

additional  signs 114  57 

(291) 


292  INSTRUCTION  IN 

Sect.  Page. 

CONSONANTS,  Continued  • 

conventional  name  of in*  £» 

sound-name  of w'  °' 

whispered {3  10,11,13 

voiced 01 

how  joined 

CONVENIENCE: 
signification  ol  word 

DEFINITIONS:  Jg 

appendage , j  45 

diphthong 

emb,emp 219  10, 

halving • 

lengthening 329 

outline 

Phra86 ,18687-9 

position |  109  51 

stem 

stroke 

tjck 97 

vowel 

word-sign 

( 279  135 

DICTATION: j  324  1(>2 

early 41 

sentence - 

letter  at   60  words  a  minute 231 

«        ••     80      "  "  255,  304  124,  149 

«        «    90      "  "          279, 304,  328     136,  150,  164 

«        ««  100      "  "          370 

DIPHTHONG:       93 

position  of •    .    .    . 

reading  exercise 

DISTINGUISHED  WORDS: 

general  article 390 

examples 

I    271-3  133 

-ED :  how  represented       ........  JRUieiv.  249 

ELECTRICAL  TERMS     .     .  .     .  2-9 

EM-DASH: 

of  shorthand 

used  tor  underscore    .    . 

EMB,  BMP  :  definition  of 219 

word-signs 220 

EXPEDIENTS: 

brief  wuh  and  yuh  inverted 

"      «       "     intersecting      ....      145,362  70.185 

< '     enlarged 361  185 

»         "      "       "     considered   as    conso- 
nants    56-7,363  32,185 

dw.qu.etc 382 

from -to- -™  }M 

hook  added  to  a  hook      262 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 

Sect. 
EXPEDIENTS,  Continued  : 

I,  phrased 355 

inde,  uncle,  etc 310 

in,  un,  en,  before  initial  hook 211 

of-the  denoted       357 

shun  after  hook 261 

there  phrased 356 

uncoalescent  S  before  R 209 

unsyllabic  Nr  and  XI 216-8 

HUH 127 

when  to  use      127 

(    126 

"      omitted {130 

(Note 

before  M  and  R 128 

between  strokes 129 

HE :  how  denoted )  Note 

{^154 
2*69 
305 

rule  for 224 

power  of,  how  read 228 

8y»abic jfJO 

unsyllabic 307 

order  of  reading  outline 269 

distinction  for  T  or  D 225 

L,  M,  N,  R 225 

position  of • 227 

sometimes  not  employed j  3^.9 

HOOKS:       169 

initial  L 171-5 

"      R 176-9 

"     how  read 184 

final  F  and  V 232 

"    N 233-4 

"    how  read 235 

shun 256 

"     after  hook 261 

five 257 

forms  inverted 177 

applied  to  M  and  N 178 

uncoalescent  L  and  R 180-1 

particular  management 184 

perfect  and  imperfect l>-2 

when  to  employ 183 

Rel  and  Ler 11)9 

enlarged  Huh      Note 

joined  to  hook 262 

to  L,  M,  N,  R,  halved       313 

eshon 25',) 

"    after  ns 260 

IN,  UN,  EN  : 

before  circle-S 210 

compounded 211 


Page. 

183 
154 
104 
'184 
127 
184 
103 
106-7 

61 

61 

60 

62 

32 

61 

61 

48 

49 

73 
110 
132 
152 
110 
112 
132 
152 
153 
132 
111 
111 
112 
152 
153-4 

90 
90-1 
91-3 

95 
114 
114-5 
115 
126 
127 
126 

92 

92 

93 

95 

94 

94 

99 

99 
128 
155 
127 
1-27 

103 
103 


294 


INSTRUCTION   IN 


Sect. 


Page. 


ING,  INGS:    .............  {  }g  l\ 

ing-and,  ing  -the    ...........  151  72 

JUDGMENT: 

in  joining  strokes    .....    .....  165  84-5 

outline  building  ..........  345 

word-sign  making  .........  379  201 

omissions     ............  364  186 

study    ..............  40  26 

syllabic  treatment   .........  136  65 

halving    .............  305  152 

lengthening     ...........  333  168 

L,  upward  and  downward      .......  137-139  67 

examples  of    ..........    ?  140  68 

LEGIBILITY: 

how  maintained    ...........  229  112 

a  help  to  ..............  181  93 

-ed  by  disjoining  ...........  272  133 

when  halving    ............  229  112 

"      lengthening     ..........  333  168 

by  dissecting   ............  358  184 

halving  waived  for  ..........  306  152 

LENGTHENING 

of  curves      .............  329  167 

"    straight  strokes  .......... 

"    emb.emp      ............  j  ^2te 

followed  by  N  or  shun     ........  331  167 

misguided     .............  333  168 

in  phrases    ..........    ...  335  169 

not  employed  ............  334  169 

LETTERS   ..............  303  148-9 

shorthand  models    ..........  352-3  180-1 

business    ..............  280  138 

form  of,  in  shorthand       ........  297-302  14(5-7 

for  dictation     ............  113,  124,  130 

"  ............  149,  150,  164 

"  »  ............  194, 

NOMENCLATURE: 

of  consonant  signs  .........    .  Note  14 

for  advanced  shorthand  ........  341  173 

NUMBERS: 

general  statement    ..........  250  122 

how  learned     ............  265  129 

Lesson      1  ..............  251  122 

II  ..............  274  133 

III  ..............  287  142 

ten-groups    .    ............  254  123 

"teens"    ..............  275  134 

"tys"       ..............  276  134 

hundreds       .............  287  142 

rule  for  expressing  hundreds      .....  288 

simple  hundred-groups   ........  278 

hundred-groups  with  S    ........  290  143 

(see  also  multiplication  table)      .....  337  170 

used  as  adjective      ..........  277  134 

further  illustrations     .........  274-5 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 

Sect. 
NUMBERS,   Continued: 

thousands,  millions,  etc 291 

dollars  and  cents       292 

fractions 293 

OMISSIONS: 

of  signs  from  outline 364 

"  words    "     phrases .    .         365 

ORGANS  of  speech Note 

PENMANSHIP:  of  shorthand i^ 

attitude  of  body  and  holding  pen    .... 

movement 

practice  iu 

PHRASING: 

introductory 67 

general  article  on 392 

examples 

principal  features  of 

involved 

68 
102 

simple 

244 
266 

tick 108 

else,  and  others 349 

L  and  R-hook 215-8 

of  time  and  take 311 

by  halving 310 

miscellaneous,  half  length 319 

by  lengthening 335 

(  282 

business j  234 

the-con,  etc Note 

POSITION: 

Introductory 109 

definition 188-9 

vowel I  £ 

(  BO 

word-sign 110 

outline 188 

illustrated 194-8 

first  exercise  in 185 

second  "         " 200 

third       "          " 212 

rule  for 192 

of  shortened  outline 227 

further  discussion  of 246 

definite  procedure  in 247 

of  derivative 248 

fourth,  so  called j  ^gte 

POSITIVE  and  negative 366 

/    -I  00     ft 

words  beginning  irre,  ille ggg" 


295 


Page. 

143 
144 
144 


186 
186-7 

16 
18 

190-4 

190 

191 

17,  192-3 

35 

260-3 
261 
262 
263 

35 

49 

53 

63 
119 
129 

61 
177 
106-7 
164 
154 
158 
169 
139 
140 

72 

51 

96 

39 

42 

52 

96 
97-8 

95 

99 
104 

97 
112 
120 
120-1 
121 
121 
184 

187 
67 

188 


296  INSTRUCTION   IN 

Sect.  Page. 

PRACTICE: 

manner  of 286                   141 

(See  LETTERS  for  dictation.) 

early  material  for 163                    82 

word-sign  of  the  steps 380               202,  207 

"        "      sentences 386                  232-3 

sneed  1 321                    16° 

8Peed J3-25                   103 

PREFIXES 339                     171 

special  form  for  Per  ami  Pro 340 

less  common 341                   173 

con,  com,  cog 146 

compound 148                     71 

PROPER  NAMES: 

first  suggestion 90                     45 

people  and  places 294-6               145-6 

In  letter 301                    147 

in  typewriting 398                   5*85 

PUNCTUATION: 

the  period J3^                  ,*} 

hyphen,  parenthesis,  underscore    ....  54 

R,  upward  and  downward 137-8                    67 

examples  of 140                     68 

final  after  Run Note                   70 

READING: 

shorthand 1 9j                    £* 

without  vowels 1U3                    97 

daily 54 

practice  (advanced) 

order  of : 

circle-S 43                    29 

books {}£                    91 

ticks 101                     49 

brief  wuh  and  yuh 80 

vowel 80                    41 

hooked  outline 186                    96 

S  and  the  R-hook 205                  102 

halved  outline 269                  132 

Exercises: 

vowels  applied  to  simple  strokes     ...  84                    42 

"       between  strokes 90                    45 

diphthongs 96                     48 

strokes  S,  Z,  W  and  Y 125                    60 

huh 131                     62 

upward  and  downward  R  and  L  .    .    .    .  145 

con,  corn,  cog .  153                     73 

REVIEW  QUESTIONS: 

Step        1 19 

II 27 

III 36 

IV 46 

V 56 

VI 66 

VII 76 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND.  297 

Sect.  Page. 
REVIEW  QUESTIONS,  Continued: 

Step      IX 100 

X 113 

XI 124 

XII 137 

XIII 151 

XIV 165 

XV.     . 182 

RULE: 

lor  joining  strokes 22  21 

"      circle-S  to  stems 46  29 

"      brief  wuh  and  yuh  to  stems    .    .  50  31 

applying  vowel  sign  to  simple  stroke    .  81-2  41 

"            "         "    between  strokes  .  86  42-3 

another  rule Note  43 

for  syllabic  writing 117  67 

stroke-S 119  58 

"      Z 122  59 

"      \V  and  Y 123  59 

upward  and  downward  R 138  67 

"            "           L 139  67 

position  in  general 192  97 

"        of  single  vertical  stroke    .    .    .  195  97 

"       double  stroke 196  98 

"        horizontal  outline 197  98 

"       extended        "           198  98 

halving 224  110 

speed  practice 324  162 

S- 

modifications  of 58-62  32-3 

stub-loop 58  32 

ster-loop 59  32 

ses,  sis,  sus,  etc 60  33 

a  th.rd  sound  of Cl 

cautions  regarding 62  33 

for  self,  selves 65,  343  34, 174 

after  stroke-S j  \%\  jjjj 

joined  to  final  hooks 236  115 

syllabic 119  58 

"       not  used  medially 120  68 

unsyllabic 46  30 

SHORTHAND: 

why  it  has  been  difficult 168  88 

how  to  study Note  89 

practical 167  86 

business 168  89 

SPEED: 
discussion  of    . 

•  •>_  1  lo- 

upon  common  words 332-3  161 

"     commonplace  sentences 325-6-7  163-4 

how  prompted 369  19:i-4 

of  typewriting 304  151 

STROKES: 

definition  of 16  18 

length  of 18  18 

direction  of 19  19 


298 


INSTRUCTION  IN 


STROKES,  Continued: 
S,  Z,  W,  Y 114 

syllabic  tendency 

how  joined 22 

Direction  of  (article; 389 

SYLLABLE,  the: 

first  notion  of 115 

in  shorthand 104 

general  article  upon 

Syllabication  in  Shorthand 388 

for  legibility    . 

14,> 

in  words 136 

tendency  of  R  and  L 

when  writing  some  words      142 

and  final  hook 237 

when  practicable 238 

-ed 271 

a  unit  in  word  analysis 1G4 

as  to  vowels 87 

SYLLABIC-S H™ 

THE  :  how  denoted 99 

relative  frequency  of Note 

102 
phrased 10g 

TICKS: 

definition  of 

reason  for 98 

why  two  directions  of 103 

as  word-signs       '     107 

angles  of 105 

phrased 108 

intersecting 181 

TYPEWRITING  : 

general  article 397 

simple  practice 154 

further  remarks 304 

the  scales  of 325 

schedule  of  practice 398 

in  one  month 

abbreviations,  c.o.d.,  etc 

by  touch 

diagram  for  touch 

of  letters 

diagrams  of  letter  addresses 

best  alphabet  practice 

model  of  tabulation 

VOWELS : 

definition  of 

how  represented 

long  —  scale 72 

short  —    "        74 

position  of 75 

OJ  _rt 

rules  for  applying 8(. 

with  Ses 85 


Page. 

57 
57 
58 
21 
241 

57 
83 


69 
65 
67 
68 
69 
115 
116 
133 
84 
44 
68 
2<;4 
48 
48 
49 
51 

48 
48 
50 
50 
50 
49 
51 
93 

276 
73 
151 

lt>3 

277 

278 

388 

284 
285-6 

88B 
287-8 

881 

38 
38 
38 
39 
39 
41 
43 
42 


PRACTICAL   SHORTHAND. 

VOWELS,  Continued: 

accented 191-2 

167 
185 

omitted 

200 
,212 

implied  by  tick 181 

by  position 187 

"        by  stroke \\^> 

"         by  form  of  outline 308 

assist  reading 193 

bearing  of  in  syllabication 

Vowel  implication 395 

WORD-SIGNS: 
definition  of 

abbreviation j  j5g 

reason  for 35 

not  wholly  arbitrary 36 

final  forms 37 

to  memorize 110 

List  1 38 

"II 64 

diphthong 94 

tick       107 

Group  1 110 

List  III Ill 

List  IV 132 

Group  II 155 

half  length 154 

"        "        miscellaneous 318 

simple  stroke 159 

"            "       miscellaneous 160 

Group  111 213 

List  VI.    .    .    •     .    • 214 

emb,  emp       220 

Group  IV 242 

List  VI 1 243 

Group  V •    .    .    .    .  264 

List  VI II 265 

(  39 

how  learned <  317-157 

(  381 

business 281 

Group  VI 317 

what  for 372 

how  many  presented 374 

how  many  classes •     .  377 

how  made 378 

of  the  steps,  alphabetically  arranged      .    .  380 

imitative 3S2 

general  dictionary  of 383 

sacred •    .    .  384 

sentences  for  practice 386 

unclassified       ...                           ....  383 


299 


Page. 

96-7 

86 

95 

96 

97 

!9 
104 

93 

96 

58 

69 
153 

97 

24<!-8 
2(59 

25 

26 

78 

25 

25 

26 

52 

26 

34 

47 

50 

52 

53 

62 

74 

73 
157 

78 

79-80 
105 
105 
107 
118 
118 
128 
129 

26 

159-78 
207 
138-9 
156 
198 
198 
199 
200 
202-7 
208 

211-225 
230 
232-3 
2-JC-8 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


OOt  20  I348 


APR 
JUL18 


Form  L9-25w,-9,'47(A5618)444 


Z56   Torrey  - 

T63i  Instruction  in 


short hand < 


Z56 
T63i 


A  000  570  390  5 


'  '"ER 

ZR 


